Matrix Switcher
Operating Instructions
Model No.
WJ-SX150A
OPERA
TE
OPERA
TE LED
WILL BLINK
F
AN MALFUNCTIONS
IF COOLING
Matrix Switcher WJ-SX
1
5
0A
Before attempting to connect or operate this product,
please read these instructions carefully and save this manual for future use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1) Read these instructions.
2) Keep these instructions.
3) Heed all warnings.
4) Follow all instructions.
5) Do not use this apparatus near water.
6) Clean only with dry cloth.
7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
8) Do not use near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider
than the other. A grounding-type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are
provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the
obsolete outlet.
10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles and the points
where they exit from the apparatus.
11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a
cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-overs.
S3125A
13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus
has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTENTS
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ............................. 3
■ Time Adjustment with an External Equipment .......48
CONTENTS ........................................................................ 4
PREFACE ........................................................................... 6
FEATURES ......................................................................... 6
PRECAUTIONS .................................................................. 7
DOCUMENT CONVENTION .............................................. 7
■ Master-slave Connection .......................................49
WJ-SX150A SETUP PROCEDURES ...............................57
FIRMWARE UPDATE .....................................................58
■ Installation of SX150A Program Writer ...................58
■ Firmware Update of SX150A Program Writer ........58
■ Error List ................................................................60
SETUP PROCEDURES ..................................................61
■ Setup Procedures ..................................................61
■ Description of Setup Procedures ..........................61
WJ-SX150A SETUP MENU (OSD) .................................63
■ Displaying SETUP MENU ......................................63
■ Programming SETUP MENU .................................63
■ TIME & DATE .........................................................64
■ D. S. T. (Daylight Saving Time) ..............................66
■ SEQUENCE SETUP ...............................................66
■ ALARM SETUP ......................................................67
■ CAMERA TITLE ......................................................71
■ RECORDER ...........................................................71
■ SYSTEM SETUP .....................................................72
■ OPERATOR REGISTRATION .................................76
■ MULTIPLEXER MUX ..............................................77
■ MUX CAMERA TITLE MUX ....................................78
WJ-SX150A ADMINISTRATOR Console .......................79
■ Description of WJ-SX150A Administrator
FEATURES OF THE MATRIX SWITCHER SYSTEM ....... 9
MATRIX SWITCHER SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS ............10
■ Crosspoint Switches ..............................................10
■ Monitoring Mode ....................................................10
■ System Control ......................................................11
■ Example of a SYSTEM with Basic Functions .........12
TERMINAL MODE DESCRIPTIONS ..............................14
■ Log-in/Log-out .......................................................14
■ Monitor-related Functions ......................................15
■ Camera-related Functions .....................................16
■ Alarm-related Functions ........................................17
■ Timer Event ............................................................18
■ System Status Table ..............................................19
■ Setup Procedures ..................................................19
■ Extended Functions ..............................................19
NOTIFICATION ABOUT PS·DATA
CONTROLLER OPERATION .........................................22
DETAILED PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ............................23
MAJOR OPERATING CONTROLS AND
Console ..................................................................79
■ Installation/Uninstallation .......................................79
■ The Main Window ..................................................80
■ Master-Slave ..........................................................81
■ Logical Camera Number .......................................82
■ Put a file to SX150A ...............................................83
■ Get a Configuration Data from SX150A .................83
■ Tour Sequence ......................................................84
■ Group Sequence ...................................................85
■ Timer Event ............................................................85
■ Camera Cleaning ...................................................86
■ Daylight Saving Time/Summer Time ......................87
■ Alarm Mode ...........................................................88
■ Alarm Event ...........................................................89
■ Alarm Port ..............................................................90
■ Operator Registration ............................................90
■ Level Table ............................................................91
■ Monitor Selection ...................................................92
■ Auto Login/Logout (Auto Log-in/Log-out) .............92
■ Time & Date ...........................................................93
■ Cable Compensation/VD2/DATA ...........................94
■ Camera Title ..........................................................94
■ Data Port ................................................................96
■ Recorder ................................................................97
■ Multiplexer Mode MUX ..........................................98
■ Multiplexer Title MUX...........................................100
■ New ......................................................................101
■ Select Setup Data File .........................................101
■ Account Manager ................................................101
■ Communication Port ............................................102
THEIR FUNCTIONS .......................................................24
■ WJ-SX150A Matrix Switcher ..................................24
■ WV-CU360C/CU360CJ System Controller
(TERMINAL MODE) ...............................................26
INSTALLATIONS AND SYSTEM CONNECTIONS..........31
INSTALLATIONS ...........................................................32
■ Mounting into the Rack ..........................................32
■ Installing the Multiplexer Board MUX ...................32
SYSTEM CONNECTION EXAMPLES ............................33
■ Basic System Connection ......................................33
■ System Expansion Connection ..............................33
CONNECTIONS .............................................................36
■ Connection with the Camera Sites ........................36
■ Connection for RS-485 Type Camera ....................37
■ Connection with the Monitors ................................38
■ Connection with the System Controllers ................39
■ Connection with the Alarm Sensors .......................39
■ Connection with the Alarm Output .........................40
■ Connection with Digital Disk Recorder
WJ-HD500 Series ..................................................40
■ Connection with Digital Disk Recorder
WJ-HD200 Series ..................................................43
■ Connection with Digital Disk Recorder
WJ-HD100 Series MUX .........................................45
■ Connection with the Time-lapse VCR
(Panasonic Models) MUX ......................................46
■ Connection with the Time-lapse VCR
(Non-Panasonic Models) MUX ..............................47
■ Connection with the PC .........................................48
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATING PROCEDURES (TERMINAL MODE) ......103
LOG-IN AND LOG-OUT ..............................................104
■ Log-in ...................................................................104
■ Log-out ................................................................105
■ Auto Log-in ..........................................................105
■ Auto Log-out ........................................................105
MONITOR SELECTION AND CAMERA SELECTION ..106
■ Monitor Selection .................................................106
■ Priority Lock .........................................................106
■ Camera Selection ................................................107
CAMERA CONTROL ...................................................108
■ Lens Control ........................................................108
■ Pan/Tilt Control ....................................................108
■ Program Preset Position ......................................109
■ Call Preset Position ..............................................109
CAMERA FUNCTION CONTROL ................................110
■ Camera Setup ......................................................110
■ Camera Function (Shortcut Function) ..................110
■ Changing to Black and White Images .................111
■ Patrol Learn and Play ..........................................111
■ Camera Panning Function ...................................112
CAMERA SITE ACCESSORIES CONTROL .................113
■ Receiver Control ..................................................113
RUNNING SEQUENCE ...............................................114
■ Tour Sequence ....................................................114
■ Group Sequence .................................................114
MONITOR DISPLAY CONTROL ..................................115
■ On-screen Display (OSD) Control .......................115
■ On-screen Display (OSD) Position Control ..........115
■ System Status Table ............................................116
■ Alarm History Table .............................................117
■ Video Loss History Table .....................................117
ALARM CONTROL ......................................................118
■ Alarm Mode .........................................................118
■ Operation during an Alarm Mode ........................118
■ Operation of an Alarm-related Camera (ACK) ....118
■ Resetting the Alarm Inputs ..................................119
■ Suspending the Alarm Inputs ..............................119
EXPANDED FUNCTION .................................................129
WJ-HD500 SERIES CONTROL (TERMINAL MODE) ...130
■ Displaying WJ-HD500 Series SETUP MENU .......130
■ Controlling Digital Disk Recorder
WJ-HD500 Series ................................................131
WJ-HD200 SERIES CONTROL (TERMINAL MODE) ...135
■ Displaying WJ-HD200 Series SETUP MENU .......135
■ Controlling Digital Disk Recorder
WJ-HD200 Series ................................................135
MUX
WJ-HD100 SERIES CONTROL
(TERMINAL MODE) .....................................................137
■ Displaying WJ-HD100 Series SETUP MENU .......137
■ Controlling Digital Disk Recorder
WJ-HD100 Series ................................................137
MUX
TIME-LAPSE VCR CONTROL
[PANASONIC MODELS] (TERMINAL MODE) .............139
■ Controlling the Time-lapse VCR ..........................139
MUX
TIME-LAPSE VCR CONTROL
[NON-PANASONIC MODELS] (TERMINAL MODE) ...140
■ Controlling the Time-lapse VCR ..........................140
WJ-HD500 SERIES CONTROL (PS·DATA) .................141
■ Controlling the Recorder with a
PS·Data System Controller ..................................141
WJ-HD200 SERIES CONTROL (PS·DATA) .................143
■ Controlling the Recorder with a
PS·Data System Controller ..................................143
MUX
WJ-HD100 SERIES CONTROL
■ Controlling the Recorder with a
PS·Data System Controller ..................................144
MUX
(PS·DATA) .......144
TIME-LAPSE VCR CONTROL
[PANASONIC MODELS] (PS·DATA) ...........................145
■ Controlling the Time-lapse VCR with a
PS·Data System Controller ..................................145
MUX
TIME-LAPSE VCR CONTROL
[NON-PANASONIC MODELS] (PS·DATA) ..................146
■ Controlling the Time-lapse VCR with a
PS·Data System Controller ..................................146
MONITOR DISPLAY WHEN A
MUX
MULTIPLEXER OPERATIONS
...........................120
VIDEO LOSS OCCURS ...............................................147
■ Video Loss Display ..............................................147
■ Monitoring the Camera Picture ........................... 120
MUX
■ Camera Switching Pulse Loss Display
.......147
OPERATING PROCEDURES (PS·DATA)......................123
WHEN USING A PS·DATA SYSTEM CONTROLLER ...124
MONITOR CONTROL .................................................125
■ Monitor Selection .................................................125
■ Priority Lock .........................................................125
RUNNING SEQUENCE ...............................................126
■ Tour Sequence ....................................................126
■ Group Sequence .................................................126
MONITOR DISPLAY CONTROL ..................................127
ALARM CONTROL ......................................................128
■ Alarm Mode .........................................................128
■ Operation during an Alarm Mode ........................128
■ Resetting All the Alarm Inputs .............................128
■ Suspending All the Alarm Inputs .........................128
TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................148
APPENDIX ......................................................................151
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL .................................152
■ Command Table ..................................................153
■ Error Code List .....................................................161
WORKSHEETS ............................................................162
■ Instruction ............................................................162
■ Checklist ..............................................................163
SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................175
STANDARD ACCESSORIES .......................................175
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES .........................................175
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREFACE
Matrix Switcher WJ-SX150A is designed for a surveillance control system, which is composed of cameras, monitors and sys-
tem controllers.
System controllers are used to operate the surveillance control system.
In combination with Digital Disk Recorder or a time-lapse VCR, a surveillance system can be established in a local area.
* To use WJ-HD100 Series or a time-lapse VCR, you need to install Multiplexer Board WJ-SXB151 inside the matrix switcher.
FEATURES
• 16 cameras, 4 monitors and 4 system controllers connectable
• Master-slave connection supported: Up to 64 cameras connectable using 5 matrix switchers
• Multiple sequence modes: 32 tour sequences and 4 group sequences
• Control data and timing pulse (VD2) multiplexed over a coaxial cable
• Cable compensation selectable depending on the cable length
• Cameras (or images on the monitors) selectable with alarm (sensor)
• RS-485 cameras connectable
• Multiscreen display, electronic zooming, still picture, multiscreen sequence, and motion detector available with Multiplexer
MUX
Board WJ-SXB151
• Disk Recorder controllable
• Connectable to external devices supporting PS·Data
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRECAUTIONS
• Refer all work related to the installation of this
product to qualified service personnel or system
installers.
• Do not expose the appliance to water or moisture.
Do not try to operate it in wet areas.
Take immediate action if the appliance gets wet. Turn
the power off and refer servicing to qualified service
personnel. Moisture can damage the appliance and
also cause electric shocks.
• Do not block the ventilation opening or slots on the
cover.
To prevent the appliance from overheating, place it at
least 5 cm (2 inches) away from the wall.
• Do not use strong or abrasive detergents when
cleaning the appliance body.
• Do not drop metallic parts through slots.
This could permanently damage the appliance. Turn
the power off immediately and contact qualified service
personnel for service.
Use a dry cloth to clean the appliance when it is dirty.
When the dirt is hard to remove, use a mild detergent
and wipe gently.
• Do not operate the appliance beyond its specified
temperature, humidity, or power source ratings.
Use the appliance at temperatures within –10°C -
+50°C (14°F - 122°F) and humidity below 90 %.
The input power source for this appliance is 120 V AC,
60 Hz.
• Do not attempt to disassemble the appliance.
To prevent electric shock, do not remove screws or
covers.
There are no user-serviceable parts inside. Contact
qualified service personnel for maintenance.
• Handle the appliance with care.
Do not strike or shake, as this may damage the appli-
ance.
• We recommend that you note down your settings
and save them. Power or battery failure may erase
the settings you enter.
DOCUMENT CONVENTION
This operating instructions use the following convention when describing the use and operation of this unit.
Unit: Panasonic Matrix Switcher WJ-SX150A
MUX
Multiplexer board : Panasonic Multiplexer Board WJ-SXB151
System controller: Panasonic System Controller WV-CU360C or WV-CU360CJ
Recorder: Panasonic Digital Disk Recorder or a time-lapse VCR* (*Available only when the Multiplexer board is installed)
Receiver: Panasonic Indoor Receiver WV-RC100 or Outdoor Receiver WV-RC150
System: Surveillance control system
Master recorder: Recorder connected to the Master unit in a master-slave connection
Slave n* recorder: Recorder connected to Slave n unit in a master-slave connection
* n is a unit number.
Notes:
• Text with this appearance is a special instruction, rule, or side comment related to the topic.
• In these operating instructions, WV-CU360C is used for the illustrations and descriptions of the system controller.
Symbol Used in The Operating Instructions
These operating instructions use the icon shown below to describe the functions available when the Multiplexer board is
installed in the unit.
MUX
: Functions available with the Multiplexer board
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES OF THE MATRIX
SWITCHER SYSTEM
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MATRIX SWITCHER SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
Matrix Switcher System WJ-SX150A is a surveillance control system, which is composed of cameras, recorders, and this unit
(the matrix switcher).
This system has various functions for surveillance control.
The following are the descriptions about the functions.
■ Crosspoint Switches
SW11
SW12
SW13
SW14
SW21
SW22
SW23
SW24
SW31
SW32
SW33
SW34
SW41
SW42
SW43
SW44
All matrix switchers, no matter how complicated and sophisticated they may be, depend on crosspoint switches to perform the
basic operations of the switcher. The crosspoint switches from a rectangular array of rows and columns in which any row may
be connected to any column.
In the figure shown above, the rows are connected to video cameras and the columns are connected to video monitors.
By closing a certain crosspoint switch we may connect any camera to any monitor.
In the example above, by closing switch SW12 the camera 2 is displayed on the monitor 1. Likewise, by closing SW24 camera
4 is displayed on the monitor 2.
■ Monitoring Mode
In the normal connection, this system can control up to 16 cameras, 4 monitors, and 4 system controllers. In the master-slave
connection, the system can control up to 64 cameras.
There are two surveillance ways:
One is the spot mode that associates one camera with one monitor. The other is the sequence mode that sequentially displays
the images through more than one camera.
■ Spot Mode
The specified camera images are continuously displayed on a given monitor.
When another camera input is accepted, the images are replaced by new ones.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Sequence Mode
More than one camera's images are sequentially displayed for a
fixed time.
Monitor 1
Dwell time: 2 sec.
Step 1
Monitor 1
Dwell time: 2 sec.
Step 2
Monitor 1
Dwell time: 2 sec.
Step 3
The illustration shows an example of the sequential display of
images through Camera 2, 4, and 6 on Monitor 1.
Before use, the parameters* of the sequence need to be config-
ured and uploaded to the unit.
s
s
* Example: Camera selection, monitor selection, and dwell time
(the time to display each image).
Camera 4
Camera 6
Camera 2
■ System Control
System controllers are used to control the equipment connected to this system.
■ About System Controller
This matrix switcher system has four data ports: DATA 1 to 4. The ports DATA 1 to 3 supports the terminal mode, and the
DATA 4 port supports both the terminal mode and Panasonic Security Data (PS·Data) Systems. These are the operation mode
of the matrix switcher. When using the DATA 4 port, you can employ either of them. Refer to p. 14 for details of the terminal
mode. Refer to p. 22 for notification about PS·Data System.
■ Camera control
As the illustration, this unit sends the control data and VD2 timing pulse to the cameras.
On the contrary, the cameras send the video signal and state signal to the unit.
Control data is supplied via the coaxial cable from the unit, multiplexed with the camera image.
The unit is equipped with the circuit to multiplex or separate the video signal and control data with each channel.
These connections enable the control of the equipment from the system controller.
When using Panasonic RS-485 cameras, the unit can send the separated control data to them.
RS-485 cameras can be installed at longer distance from the matrix switcher than cameras that multiplex the control data.
Matrix switcher
Combination camera
Multiplexed
Coaxial cable
Video signal
data
Sync
signal
Control signal
Status signal
Every channel is equipped with
multiplexed data and sync
signal.
Timing pulse (VD2)
Each signal functions as the illustrations in the next page.
VD2 provides the timing pulse of the same phase to prevent the unconformity during the switching of the image in a sequence
mode.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Signal type
Function
Control signal
Controls camera functions (pan/tilt, zooming, focusing, lens iris, preset position) and camera
site accessories.
Status signal
Shows camera status.
Timing pulse (VD2)
This signal is supplied to the unit to each camera.
Each figure shows the picture status with or without the timing pulse.
VD2 OFF
s
s
VD2 ON
s
s
■ Example of a SYSTEM with Basic Functions
The illustration in the next page shows the surveillance system in a parking lot as an example.
Before the connections, the matrix switcher's system configuration* and the recorder's alarm recording setting are necessary.
Example: Operations of cameras and other connected equipment during an alarm input
1. The infrared sensor sends an alarm signal to the unit when detecting a car comes in.
2. The unit enters the sequence mode associated with Monitor 1.
At the same time, the unit controls the digital disk recorder to change its recording mode into the alarm-recording mode.
Monitor 1 is associated with the following sequence.
Displaying Camera 1's image
↓
Displaying Camera 4's image (Preset Position 1)
↓
Camera 4 moves from preset position 1 to 2 according to the sequence setting.
Displaying Camera 4's image (Preset Position 2)
↓
Controlling AUX 1 and 2 (The gate will open and the lamp will light up.)
↓
Displaying Camera 5's image
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitor 2 displays Camera 6's image consistently in the spot mode.
Operators will observe the parking lot by looking at these images on a monitor in a management office.
Receiver
Camera 1
Camera 5
Camera 4
Preset
position 1
Aux 1
Preset
position 2
Sensor
Aux 2
Camera 6
Recorder
Matrix switcher
Alarm 3
t
t
t
Alarm
Sequence mode
Monitor 1
s
s
s
Gate
Lamp
opens.
(Aux 1)
lights up.
(Aux 2)
Camera 5
Dwell time : 30 s
Camera 1
Dwell time : 1 s
Camera 4/position 1
Dwell time : 3 s
Camera 4/position 2
Dwell time : 2 s
Monitor 2
Alarm
mode
s
s
s
s
s
Camera 6
Alarm recording mode
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TERMINAL MODE DESCRIPTIONS
In the terminal mode, each external device (such as a cam-
era, monitor, system controller, or a recorder, etc.) has the
name and number (Camera 1, etc.). When you control a
device, you are to select the device number and execute the
selection. For example, before controlling Camera 1, you will
press the numeric button 1, and then press the CAM (SET)
button. Each operator has a level and priority. When you try
to control a device beyond the level and priority, the PRO-
HIBITED or BUSY indicator will light up to inform you that you
cannot control it.
The following are the properties, which can prevent the oper-
ation conflict.
Level Setting
16 operators are classified in the level from 1 (the highest) to
3 (the lowest).
A higher-level operator can control more functions.
Password Setting
Up to 5 digit numbers can be registered as a password.
When an operator logs in, the system identifies the operator
ID and password by comparing the registered data.
If they are correct, the operator can control the system.
■ Log-in/Log-out
Before starting the system operation, it is necessary to input
an operator ID and a password from a system controller.
The system identifies the operator ID and password by com-
paring the registered data. If the ID and password are cor-
rect, the system will enter the operation mode.
Priority Setting
The system classifies the operators in priority from 1 to 16.
This setting includes the control coverage that is configured
by level, and the priority in case of the conflict with the same-
level operator.
This identification is called log-in. On the contrary, the termi-
nation of the system operation is called log-out.
Operable Cameras and Sequences
Log-in/log-out has two ways: One is the manual log-in/log-out
and the other is auto log-in/out.
This setting assigns each operator the cameras and
sequences operable by the level.
Through the auto log-in, an operator can login the system
without entering a password, after turning the power on.
Through the auto log-out, an operator can logout of the sys-
tem when not operating the system for a fixed time.
The way of log-in/log-out and the time for auto log-out is con-
figurable when setting up the system.
Notes:
• Each operator’s ID, password, level and priority need to
be configured in SETUP MENU and WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console.
• Auto log-in/log-out is configurable in WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console.
• The level and priority are assigned to each operator.
Operators cannot control the system beyond the assign-
ment.
When configuring the auto log-in, it is necessary to assign an
operator ID to each data port.
Even within the level and priority, a device controlled by
a higher-level operator is not operable.
• Manual log-in/log-out or auto log-in/log-out is assignable
to the system controllers Terminal – K1 to K4.
■ Operator Registration
When operating the system, the operator registration is nec-
essary.
Up to 16 operators can be registered and filed by their oper-
ator IDs.
They are registered in SETUP MENU and WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console.
• Description of Operator Registration
Level Table
SX150A Setup
Camera Setup
Program Preset Position
Camera Control
Items operable by
the level are set to
ON.
• • •
Operator 1 Operator 2 Operator 3 Operator 4 Operator 5 Operator 6
Operator n* (Max 16)
Camera Selection
Recorder Setup
Recorder Control
ID
150
150
1
100
100
101
101
102
102
103
103
–
–
Password
12345
Level
1
1
1
1
2
3
–
Priority
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
–
–
Camera Operation Level
1: This level can select and control the camera.
2: This level can only select the camera.
Camera Operation
3: This level can neither select nor control the camera.
*n is a number.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SLAVE DOWN (Displayed when communication is not
established between the Master and Slave units: for
example, power/cable disconnection)
■ Monitor-related Functions
The following functions related to monitors are configurable.
* “n” is a number.
08/21/2001 6:50:08 PM
Clock
Notes:
• When pressing the associated numeric button (1 to 5)
while holding down the OSD button, information is
turned on or off.
• When you select the LCN (logical camera number) not
assigned in the system, “NOT ASSIGN” will appear
beside the camera number.
Monitor status
M1 K1 T01
C01 camera title
■ The Display Position
ALARM10*
The display position of the information is adjustable with the
joystick on the system controller.
Event
Camera title
■ Monitor Selection
It is necessary to select a monitor when controlling the
monitor-related functions, such as camera images or
SETUP MENU.
■ Priority Lock
Priority lock is the function to prevent other operators' con-
trol of a monitor even after the system log-out.
While the priority lock is active, the monitor is operable by
the locking operator and higher-priority operators.
■ Information Displayed on the
Monitors
■ Sequence Mode
Camera images are displayed for a fixed time, and they are
sequentially switched.
The following information is displayed on monitors.
The change from a tour sequence into the spot mode is
also possible.
Time and Date
Time and date are displayed.
Before use, the parameters of the sequence, such as a
camera or monitor selection and dwell time need to be con-
figured.
The date display is selectable from five patterns, and the
time display is selectable from 24- or 12- hour system.
There are two sequences:
The date display pattern (Example: August 21, 2001)
• Tour sequence
• Group sequence
21/08/2001
08/21/2001
21/Aug/2001
2001/08/21
Aug/21/2001
Tour Sequence
Camera Title
The camera number (C01 to C99) and characters (up to 20)
can be configured as a camera title.
The title is displayed in one line.
Monitor Status
The following status is displayed in one line.
Mn (Monitor number)*
CH1
CH2
Kn (Controller number)*
Tnn (Monitor mode: the example shows the tour
sequence)*
Rn (Recorder number)*
* "n" is a number.
Event
The information related to system operation is displayed.
An alarm control, alarm suspension, and timer event are the
example.
CH3
The images through Camera 1 to 99 are displayed on a
given monitor in the desired sequence.
A tour sequence is consisted of 64 steps and up to 32
sequences are configurable.
Up to 30 seconds are selectable as each step's dwell time.
Each step can call the desired preset position of a camera
to be displayed.
ALARMnn (The alarm is operating.)
ALARMnn ACK (The alarm has been acknowledged.)
Tnn (Timer event: tour sequence number)
LOSS CHnn (the video loss channel number)
ALM SUSPENDED (The alarm is suspended.)
CAM SW LOSS Rn* (Displayed when no camera switch-
ing pulse is supplied from Rn)
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In each step, the desired preset position of a camera can
be called and displayed.
Tour sequences are configurable in SETUP MENU and WJ-
SX150A Administrator Console.
Focus
This setting adjusts the lens focus.
An auto-focus camera can automatically adjust the focus.
Zoom
Group Sequence
This setting adjusts the lens zoom rate.
Group sequence is a function to display up to 4 tour
sequences in a group on up to 4 monitors. More than one
sequences can be activated at one time by registering
each tour sequence in a group.
Iris
This setting adjusts the lens iris .
Up to 4 tour sequences can be registered in a group.
■ Pan/Tilt Head Control
Pan/Tilt
Camera rotates on the pan/tilt heads.
There are two ways of control:
• Manual control by the joystick
The joystick on the system controller can control a cam-
era's pan/tilt head.
Notes:
• Up to 4 group sequences are configurable in WJ-
SX150A Administrator Console. The configuration in the
matrix switcher's SETUP MENU is unavailable.
• The black picture is displayed when the following are
included in a tour or group sequence: a camera chan-
nel without image or the image restricted to the opera-
tor.
• Preset position control
Entering preset position number can automatically
rotate the camera to the desired position.
It is necessary to register a camera's preset position
numbers.
Group sequence 1
Tour 1
Tour 5
Tour 2
Tour 7
The specified cameras support the registration during
the pan/tilt head control.
Notes:
• Depending on the system components, the specified
combination cameras are not operable.
• The speed varies depending on cameras.
• Some cameras' pan/tilt speeds cannot be controlled by
the joystick.
Monitor 1
Monitor 2
Monitor 3
Monitor 4
■ Multiscreen Display (4, 9, and 16 Screens)
With a recorder, more than one camera images can be dis-
played in 4, 9, and 16 multiscreen segments.
(Refer to the camera's operating instructions for
details.)
Refer to p. 129 EXPANDED FUNCTION for details.
Auto Pan
The camera automatically turns within the preset panning
range.
■ Camera-related Functions
This system can operate the following camera-related func-
tions.
Sequence Mode
The camera turns in the sequence of preset positions in
numerical order.
Notes:
• When operating the motorized zoom lens, a combina-
tion camera is necessary.
• A motorized zoom lens needs to be installed on a cam-
era. Confirm the system components.
Sort Mode
The camera turns in the sequence of preset positions
counterclockwise from pan/tilt starting point.
Patrol Learn
The combination camera can learn and reproduce a routine
of manual operation.
■ Camera Selection
There are two ways of patrol learn:
• Learning during the operation
• Configuration in the camera's SETUP MENU
The camera needs to be selected when controlling the
camera-related functions such as a lens zoom, pan/tilt
head, or spot image of a camera.
■ Housing Control
■ Operating Zoom Lens
The wiper or defroster of the camera housing can be con-
trolled.
Note: Make sure that the lens selection switch (DC/VIDEO)
is set to DC.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
■ External Equipment Control
• The images cannot be displayed while cleaning the
camera. Use this function when continuous surveillance
is not necessary, such as after-hours time.
• Cameras which are operating or being in the sequence
mode are not cleaned.
When the camera is connected via a receiver, the external
equipment connected to the receiver can be controlled.
■ Controllable Camera-related
• Camera selection will immediately stop the camera
cleaning.
• If noise remains in the monitor even after the camera
cleaning, there can be a malfunction. Stop using the
camera and consult qualified service personnel.
Functions
The control is conducted while watching the camera
images on the monitor.
• Changing to black and white pictures
• Camera function (Shortcut function)
Note: The specified cameras can control each function.
Confirm the functions of the connected cameras and
external devices.
■ Alarm-related Functions
This unit is equipped with 16 alarm input connectors. When
an alarm input signal is accepted via one of them, the
alarm-associated spot image or tour sequence image is
displayed on the monitor. With the alarm image on the mon-
itor, the unit notifies you of the alarm information with
"ALARM nn (nn is the alarm number)."
Changing to Black and White Pictures
Color images are changeable to black and white images.
This function is intended for surveillance in a dark place
such as an underground parking lot.
There are two ways to display the alarm-associated image:
• Sequence mode
• Hold mode
Camera Function (Shortcut Function)
The frequently-used functions are registered with the cam-
era function button.
Pressing the button can activate the registered functions.
Refer to the camera's operating instructions for details on
the registered functions.
Notes:
• The camera (or tour sequence) and monitor need to be
associated with the alarm number through the configu-
ration in SETUP MENU (OSD) or WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console.
• The mode is selectable and configurable in SETUP
MENU (OSD) or WJ-SX150A Administrator Console.
• Even in the alarm mode, pressing the ACK button can
control the camera's pan/tilt, zoom, focus and lens iris.
• When a recorder is connected to the matrix switcher,
the alarm-related recording of the camera images is
possible.
■ Camera Title
The titles for camera identification, which are displayed on
the monitor, can be registered.
For example, if a camera setting place is registered as a
camera title, operators can be informed where the image is
recorded.
The title is displayed in one line.
• Description about sequence mode and hold mode
The available character numbers:
20 (camera number and the characters)
The available characters:
Alarm Alarm
Alarm
input 1 input 5 input 2
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijkl
mnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!"#$%&'()=+*_:;,. */?
Sequence
mode
Camera image
ALARM 01
ALARM 05
ALARM 02
Notes:
Dwell time
• Camera title is configurable in SETUP MENU and WJ-
SX150A Administrator Console.
Automatically replaces
the alarm image
• User font characters can be made through WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console.
Alarm Alarm
Alarm
input 1 input 5 input 2
Hold mode
Camera image
ALARM 01
ALARM 05
■ Camera Cleaning
When using a combination camera, noise can occur on the
monitor after the long-term use.
In this case, the camera needs to be cleaned.
Camera cleaning is configurable to be conducted at the
designated day and time.
Alarm reset operations
Time
The cleaning time is approximately 30 seconds per cam-
era.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
■ Sequence Mode
• When turning off the unit, all the history will be deleted.
• Alarm history can also be identified on the PC.
In the sequence mode, the unit displays the initial alarm
image on the monitor until the dwell time ends, even when
another alarm input is accepted. When the dwell time ends,
the unit automatically replaces the alarm image with the
next one.
■ Video Loss History Table
While the unit's power is ON, the video signal loss from a
camera or a recorder can occur by cable disconnection,
etc.
■ Hold Mode
In the hold mode, the unit continues to display the initial
alarm image until the alarm reset. With the alarm image on
the monitor, the unit notifies you that more than one alarm
input is accepted with "*" next to "ALARM nn (nn is the
alarm number)."
In this case, video loss history will be reserved in the sys-
tem, and this table will display the history.
The loss order, date, time, camera number/recorder num-
ber and event can be identified.
Up to 100 item can be reserved, and they are overwritten
from the oldest, after more than 100 item have occurred.
■ Alarm Reset
The built-in timer automatically resets the alarm operation
after the time specified in WJ-SX150A Administrator
Console.
After the reset, the monitor displays and the sequence will
return to the state before the alarm input.
VIDEO LOSS HISTORY
1 of 2
NO YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS CH EVENT
012 2002/08/21 18:59:08 99 VIDEO RECOVER
011 2002/08/21 18:58:08 14 VIDEO RECOVER
010 2002/08/21 18:57:08 99 VIDEO LOSS
009 2002/08/21 18:55:08 07 VIDEO LOSS
008 2002/08/21 18:54:08 R0 SW RECOVER
007 2002/08/21 18:53:08 16 VIDEO LOSS
006 2002/08/21 18:53:00 09 VIDEO LOSS
005 2002/08/21 18:52:08 R0 SW LOSS
004 2002/08/21 18:51:08 S1 SLAVE DOWN
003 2002/08/21 18:50:08 S1 SLAVE RECOVER
Note: When more than one alarm input has been accepted,
only the newest can be reset.
■ Alarm Suspension
As well as the video loss history, the date of the loss and
recovery, the camera number and the loss status are dis-
played on the table.
Even when an alarm signal is input, the system will deacti-
vate the alarm input and the alarm mode.
When the alarm suspension is active, "ALM SUSPENDED"
will appear on the monitor.
Notes:
• When turning off the unit, all the history will be deleted.
• Alarm history can also be identified on the PC.
■ Alarm History Table
This table displays the alarms that have occurred in the
past.
The alarm order, date, time, alarm number and event can
be identified.
■ Timer Event
Up to 100 item can be reserved, and they are overwritten
from the oldest, after more than 100 item have occurred.
The built-in timer can automatically start the sequence or
spot mode on the specified days, which is configurable in
WJ-SX150A Administrator Console.
The available operations:
Tour sequence and spot mode
The available timer events:
ALARM HISTORY
1 of 2
NO YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS ALARM EVENT
Up to 50
016 2002/08/21 18:59:08 80
015 2002/08/21 18:58:08 80
014 2002/08/21 18:57:08 80
013 2002/08/21 18:55:08 07
012 2002/08/21 18:54:08 07
011 2002/08/21 18:53:08 07
010 2002/08/21 18:53:00 09
009 2002/08/21 18:52:08 09
008 2002/08/21 18:51:08 06
007 2002/08/21 18:50:08 06
ALARM
ACK
RESET
ALARM
ACK
RESET
ALARM
RESET
ALARM
ACK
Note: When displaying SETUP MENU while timer event is
operating, the operation will stop.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ System Status Table
■ Extended Functions
The current system status can be identified.
The continuous display becomes possible by the OSD set-
ting.
If a recorder is connected to the matrix switcher, the follow-
ing will be available.
■ Recorder Connection
SYSTEM STATUS
The operations are conducted with the buttons on the
recorder, system controller or PC.
• The setup of the recording device
• The playback of the recorded images (the multiscreen
display, still picture, etc.)
MON
1
CAM MODE
KB
K1
K2
K4
OPE
12345
2
PRI
30
2
01
99
04
R1
T01
2
SPOT
ALARM
RECORDER PC
3
4
4
1
30
1
MON: Monitor number
CAM: Camera number / Recorder number
MODE: Operation mode
KB: Controller name
OPE: Operator number
PRI: Priority
• The search for the recorded image
• Forward or backward search
• Forward of backward field advance
• Fast-forward
• Rewind
• Index
■ Setup Procedures
To use the unit, it is necessary to configure the system
Refer to each device's operating instructions for details.
through the following setup procedures:
• OSD setup with an active monitor and system controller
The basic parameters are configurable to operate the
unit.
• WJ-SX150A Administrator Console with the PC
The setup utility can configure all the functions of the
unit.
Refer to p. 63 WJ-SX150A SETUP MENU (OSD) and p. 79
WJ-SX150A ADMINISTRATOR CONSOLE for details.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MUX
■ Multiplexer Board Function
To use WJ-HD 100 Series or a time-lapse VCR as a recorder, you need to install a Multiplexer board inside the matrix switcher.
With the Multiplexer board installation, the following will be available.
• Multiscreen display
More than one camera images can be displayed in 4, 9, and 16 multiscreens.
The sequence output is also available.
As the sequence output, the following are configurable in WJ-SX150A Administrator Console.
• The images are switched within 4 multiscreens. (QUAD)
• The images are displayed in 4 multiscreens, and the images of Camera 4 to 16 are displayed in the sequence mode.
The images of Camera 1 to 3 are fixed.
(3+1→2S)
• The images are displayed in 9 multiscreens, and the images of Camera 9 to 16 are displayed in the sequence mode.
The images of Camera 1 to 8 are fixed.
(8+1→2S)
CH1 to CH8 are fixed.
CH1 to CH3 are fixed.
CH9 to CH16 are in a
sequence mode.
CH4 to CH16 are in a
sequence mode.
Notes:
• The black image will be displayed for a camera channel which is not connected to the camera.
• Even during the multiscreen display, pressing the camera number can display the camera's image in the spot mode.
• Still display
The desired image can be displayed in a still picture.
Live images can be displayed in multiscreen display.
Playback images can be displayed in spot/multiscreen display.
"STILL" will appear on the active monitor.
• Zoom
The desired image on the monitor can be zoomed up to two fold.
Note: This function is available only when a playback image is displayed in a spot picture.
• Alarm priority mode
When an alarm is activated and the alarm signal is input to the unit, the camera channel with the alarm input will be recordable
according to the configuration in SETUP MENU and WJ-SX150A Administrator Console.
The following are configurable as the recording mode when the alarm is activated:
• The camera channel with the alarm input is given recording priority. (ALM-PRI)
• Only the camera channel with the alarm input is recorded. (ALM-ONLY)
• Up to 4 camera channels are assigned to an alarm input to record the images by priority. (GROUP)
Notes:
• The recording mode needs to be configured in SETUP MENU and WJ-SX150A Administrator Console in advance.
• Detailed settings of GROUP is configurable only in WJ-SX150A Administrator Console.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Motion detector
When the multiplexer board detects motions in the image, the Multiplexer board sends an alarm signal to the unit.
Then, the unit will send the alarm signal to the connected devices.
The areas can be divided in four segments, and the detection is conducted in each segment.
For example, this function can be applied to a time-lapse recording, which responds to the break-in at night.
Notes:
• The motion-detection area needs to be configured in SETUP MENU in advance.
• The range of the motion detector is also configurable in the WJ-SX150A Administrator Console.
• When connected with Digital Disk Recorder WJ-HD100 Series/time-lapse VCR
The multiplexed recording and playback of all the camera images connected to the unit are possible.
Each camera's image and camera ID are recorded.
The camera ID can search and play back the desired camera's image.
The digital disk recorder (WJ-HD100 Series) connected to the unit and time-lapse VCR have the following functions.
The operations are conducted with their buttons or the system controller or the PC.
• The setup of the recording device (HD100 only)
• The start of the playback
• The stop of the playback
• The playback of the recorded images (the multiscreen display, still picture, zoom spot picture)
• The search of the recorded image (the search by the recorded time and date) (HD100 only)
• Forward or backward search
• Forward or backward field advance
• Fast-forward
• Rewind
• Index (HD100 only)
Refer to each device's operating instructions for details.
Notes:
• When recording on the WJ-HD100 Series or time-lapse VCR, an optional Multiplexer board needs to be installed in this
unit.
• Only Panasonic time-lapse VCRs supporting RS232C are operable.
■ Master-slave Connection
When applying this connection, up to 5 matrix switchers (units) and 64 cameras can be connected in a surveillance control
system. One of the units is designated as Master and others as Slave 1 to 4. Each unit has camera channels (CAM 1 to 16).
Cameras have logical camera numbers (LCN 1 to 99), which are uniquely assigned for camera control and monitor display.
(Refer to pp. 49 to 52 for illustrations.)
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTIFICATION ABOUT PS·DATA CONTROLLER OPERATION
In the factory default setting, you can control the unit, if you connect a PS·Data system controller to the DATA 4 port. For exam-
ple, if you connect a PS·Data unit supporting network connections (refer to p. 42), remote-control of the unit and the PS·Data
units will be available with a system controller or PC.
When you use a PS·Data system controller, take notice the following:
• The administer authorization and log-in/log-out procedure differs from the unit. They are conformed to the system con-
troller. Refer to the system controller's operating instructions.
• Use the PS·Data template supplied with the system controller, as the operating procedures differ from those of the terminal
mode. (Refer to pp. 123 to 128.)
• When connecting a recorder to the unit, you may have to configure the settings of the unit and recorder, depending on the
recorder's available functions and connections. (Refer to pp. 40 to 55.)
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DETAILED PRODUCT
DESCRIPTION
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAJOR OPERATING CONTROLS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
■ WJ-SX150A Matrix Switcher
■ Front View
q
OPERATE
OPERATE LED WILL BLINK
IF COOLING FAN MALFUNCTIONS
Matrix Switcher WJ-SX
A
w
e
r
RESET UNIT
MODE
ON
0
5
1
2
3
4
q Operation indicator (OPERATE)
r Mode selector (MODE)
Selects the unit's operation mode.
Lights up when the power of the unit is turned on.
Normally, set all switches to OFF (NORMAL mode) as
shown in the figure.
Note: The indicator will blink to indicate rising tempera-
ture in the matrix switcher.
When the indicator blinks, turn the power off and
refer servicing to qualified service personnel.
MODE SW SETUP
ON
NORMAL
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
w Reset button (RESET)
ON
ON
Resets and restarts the unit.
SX150
SOFTWARE UPLOAD
Note: The system configuration is not reset.
MULTIPLEXER
SOFTWARE UPLOAD
e Unit number selector (UNIT)
Normally, set this selector to “0”.
When applying the master-slave connection, set this
selector to one of the following unit numbers. (Refer to
pp. 49 to 55 for details on the master-slave connection.)
SX150A SOFTWARE UPLOAD:
Set the switches to this position when you update
the firmware of the unit. (Refer to the operating
instructions of the Multiplexer board.)
Master/Slave
Master
Unit number
0
1
2
3
4
MULTIPLEXER SOFTWARE UPLOAD:
This mode is reserved for future use.
Slave 1
Slave 2
Slave 3
Slave 4
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Rear View
u
i
o
! ! ! !! ! !
!
!
EXT IN
(PLAY IN)
3
1
SIGNAL GND
ALARM
SERIAL
DATA 3 DATA 2
CAMERA
SW IN
RS485(CAMERA)
DATA HDR DATA 4
DATA 1
LINE
SELECT
TERM
OFF ON
2
4
POWER
AC IN
4
2
1
EXT OUT
(REC OUT)
4
PS•DATA
10
RS485(CAMERA)
MONITOR OUT
16
15
15
14
14
13
13
12
12
11
9
8
7
6
5
5
3
3
2
IN
y
OUT
t
16
11
10
9
8
7
6
4
2
1
CAMERA
!
Note: To connect terminal-mode controllers, the setting
in SETUP MENU and WJ-SX150A Administrator
Console is required. (Refer to pp. 61 to 102 for
details.)
t Camera Output connectors (CAMERA OUT 1–16)
The video signal connected to the CAMERA IN connec-
tor is supplied at these connectors.
When the power of the matrix switcher is turned off, no
signal is supplied at these connectors.
! Line selector (LINE SELECT 2/4)
Lets you select either full duplex (4 lines) or half duplex
(2 lines) for RS-485 cameras.
y Camera Input connectors (CAMERA IN 1-16)
• Connect to cameras or camera site accessories.
These connectors accept either a composite color or
B/W video signal from a camera.
! Camera Switching Input connector
MUX
(CAMERA SW IN)
In addition, the VD2 signal to synchronize the vertical
timing of the cameras, and data to control camera site
devices are multiplexed at these connectors.
The camera switching pulse from the time lapse VCR is
supplied to this connector.
The camera switching interval (Sequential Dwell Time)
can be synchronized with the time lapse mode set in
the associated time lapse VCR.
• When applying the master-slave connection, the func-
tions of connectors will differ. (Refer to p. 53 for details.)
u Termination selector (TERM ON/OFF)
When you connect a PS·Data system controller to the
DATA 4 port, this selector turns the unit's termination
switch to ON/OFF.
! External Output connector
MUX
(EXT OUT/REC OUT)
The recording signal for the recorder is provided via
this connector.
The factory default setting is ON.
! External Input connector (EXT IN/PLAY IN)
A playback or live images from the recorder are sup-
plied to this connector.
Note: When you connect a terminal-mode system con-
troller to the DATA 4 port, set this selector to ON.
i Alarm port (ALARM)
! Monitor Output connectors (MONITOR OUT 1/2/3/4)
• Connect to monitors.
Connects to alarm sensors.
Accepts the alarm input from the associated alarm sen-
sors.
The video output signals are supplied to the monitors at
these connectors.
• When applying the master-slave connection, the func-
tions of connectors will differ. (Refer to p. 53 for details.)
o Data ports (DATA 1/2/3/4/DATA HDR)
• DATA 1 to 4 connect to the system controller.
DATA 1 to 3 can connect to RS-485 cameras with the
configuration in WJ-SX150A Administrator Console.
(Refer to p. 96.) DATA 4 can connect to the system
controller via the PS·Data protocol.
! Power switch (POWER)
Turns the power of the matrix switcher on and off.
! AC Inlet socket (AC IN)
• DATA HDR connects to a recorder.
To use the unit, plug the power cord (supplied as a
standard accessory) into this socket and connect it to
an AC outlet.
• When applying the master-slave connection, the func-
tions of ports will differ. (Refer to p. 53 for details.)
! Serial port (SERIAL)
! Blank panel
Connects to a PC for the system configuration through
WJ-SX150A Administrator Console.
When the Multiplexer board installed in the unit, remove
this panel and then attach the cooling fan inside the
unit. (Refer to the Multiplexer board’s operating instruc-
tions.)
Note: Fan unit needs replacement after around 30 000
hours of operation.
! RS-485 Camera port
• Connects to an RS-485 camera.
Daisy chain connection is also available.
• When the unit is used as Master in the master-slave
connection, terminal-mode system controllers can be
connected.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ WV-CU360C/CU360CJ System Controller (TERMINAL MODE)
A template, on which “For Matrix Switcher (WJ-SX150A)” is written, is provided with a system controller. When using the tem-
plate, place it on the surface of the controller.
In these operating instructions, this template's illustrations are used for descriptions.
■ Front View (WV-CU360C)
■ Front View (WV-CU360CJ)
@
@
@
@ @ @
@
@
%
OPERATE
LINK
ACK
ALARM
RESET
BUSY
PROHIBITED
MONITOR
CAMERA
CU360CJ
tem Controller WV
-
CU360C
System Controller WV
-
r Matrix Switcher (WJ-SX150A)
For Matrix Switcher (WJ-SX150A)
#
#
$
F1
IRIS
CLOSE
OPEN
CAM SETUP
F2
SUSPEND
ALL RESET
TOUR SEQ
UP
AUTO IRIS
CALL
FOCUS
$
$
$
GROUP SEQ
PRESET
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
NEAR
WIDE
FAR
PROGRAM
PRESET
AUX1 OFF
ALL
REW/FF
INDEX
STILL
AUTO FOCUS
ZOOM
PREV
NEXT
MON STATUS
L
R
$
%
$
$
$
AUTO PAN
CAM FUNC
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
STEP
EL-ZOOM
RECORDER
TELE
STOP
PAUSE
ALM H
REC
DOWN
DEF OFF
DEF ON
STOP
PLAY
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
CLEAR
OSD
LOG OUT
MON LOCK
WIPER
SETUP
SHIFT
MULTI SCREEN SEL
#
# #
@
# #
%
% $ % $ %
#
#
#
@
@ Operation indicator (OPERATE)
@ Prohibited indicator (PROHIBITED)
Lights up when the controller's power is turned on.
Blinks when an operator attempts to control a monitor
(or camera) that is already used by a higher-priority
operator or the operator has done the prohibited opera-
tion.
@ Link indicator (LINK)
Lights up when communication is established with the
matrix switcher.
@ Joystick
@ Alarm indicator (ALARM)
Use this joystick to manually operate cameras, camera
site accessories and a recorder, or to move the cursor
in SETUP MENU on the active monitor screen.
Lights up when an alarm condition exists.
@ Monitor indicator (MONITOR)
Lights up when the monitor number appears on the
LED display.
UP:
Up
DOWN: Down
L:
R:
Left, rewind*, backward field advance*
Right, fast-forward*, forward field advance*
@ LED Display
*Available after pressing the RECORDER button while
connecting to a recorder.
Displays the monitor number, camera number, numeric
entry and error status, etc.
@ Iris buttons (IRIS CLOSE/OPEN)
@ Camera indicator (CAMERA)
Lights up when the camera number appears on the
LED display.
Close or open the lens iris of cameras equipped with
the specified lens.
Press the CLOSE and OPEN buttons simultaneously.
The lens iris is reset to the factory default setting.
@ Busy indicator (BUSY)
Lights up when the higher-priority operator selects the
camera or monitor you are currently operating.
Operations from the system controller are disabled until
this indicator goes off.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• In the recorder mode, electronic zooming and multi-
screen sequence, etc. are available when pressed in
combination with the SHIFT button.
# Focus buttons (FOCUS NEAR/FAR)
Adjust the lens focus of cameras equipped with the
specified lens.
Press the NEAR and FAR buttons simultaneously. The
lens focus is adjusted automatically, if the specified
auto focus camera is equipped.
# Monitor (Escape) button [MON (ESC)/MON LOCK]
MON: Press this button to select a monitor.
To select a monitor, press the corresponding
numeric buttons, followed by the MON (ESC) but-
ton.
# Zoom buttons (ZOOM WIDE/TELE)
Press these buttons to zoom the lenses equipped with
the specified cameras.
Press the WIDE and TELE buttons simultaneously dur-
ing the recorder mode. The recording is started.
ESC: Press this button to escape from the currently
highlighted selection and return to the previous
page of SETUP MENU.
MON LOCK: To prevent other operators from control-
ling the monitor, press this button while holding
down the SHIFT button. To release the lock, press
this button while holding down the SHIFT button
again. (Refer to p. 106.)
# Call Preset button (CALL PRESET/PROGRAM
PRESET)
To call the selected camera's preset position, press this
button in combination with the numeric buttons. (The
specified cameras support this function.)
To program a preset position, press the corresponding
numeric button(s), and then press this button while
holding down the SHIFT button.
# Alarm Reset button (RESET/ALL RESET)
RESET: To reset an alarm activated in the currently
active monitor, press this RESET button.
ALL RESET: To cancel all activated alarms at a time,
press this button while holding down the SHIFT but-
ton.
# Auto Pan button (AUTO PAN/CAM FUNC)
Activates the auto panning function of cameras
equipped with this feature.
# Alarm Acknowledge button (ACK/SUSPEND)
ACK: Acknowledges an activated alarm.
To select the alarm monitor, press the ALARM but-
ton.
To execute camera functions, press this button in com-
bination with the numeric buttons.(The specified cam-
eras support this function.)
To select the desired alarm action number, press
the numeric buttons, then press this ACK button.
"ACK" will appear on the monitor.
# Clear button (CLEAR/LOG OUT)
Use this button to clear numeric input on the LED dis-
play, or exit from the ALARM HISTORY table (p. 117),
the VIDEO LOSS HISTORY table (p. 117), or the
SYSTEM STATUS table (p. 116).
To logout of the system, press this button while holding
down the SHIFT button.
To reset the alarm, press the RESET button after
acknowledging the alarm. "ACK" will go out.
SUSPEND: To suspend an activated alarm, press this
button while holding down the SHIFT button. "ALM
SUSPENDED" will appear on the monitor. To cancel
the suspension, press this button while holding
down the SHIFT button again.
# Camera (Set) button [CAM (SET)/WIPER]
CAM: To select a camera, press the corresponding
numeric button, followed by this button.
SET: To enter numeric input, such as operator ID and
password, press this button in combination with the
numeric buttons.
$ Function 1 button (F1/CAM SETUP)
Press this button while holding down the SHIFT button
to open the camera's SETUP MENU on the active moni-
tor.
Also use this button to execute the currently high-
lighted selection and go into a submenu of SETUP
MENU.
The function as the F1 button is reserved for future use.
$ Tour Sequence button (TOUR SEQ)
WIPER: To turn on the housing wiper of the camera,
press this button while holding down the SHIFT but-
ton.
Press this button, in combination with the numeric but-
tons, to run a tour sequence on the active monitor.
$ Group Sequence button (GROUP SEQ)
Press this button to select a group sequence.
To select a group, press the corresponding numeric
buttons, followed by the GROUP SEQ button.
# Numeric buttons
Press these buttons to enter numbers into the system
such as the camera and monitor number, sequence
number, preset position, etc.
• In combination with the OSD button, parameter
selection in OSD (On-screen Display) operation of
the monitor status or research in a history table
become available.
$ Function 2 button (F2/INDEX)
Displays date and time entry form during the recorder
mode.
• In combination with the SHIFT button, AUX and
Defroster are available.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
$ Next button (NEXT)
% Setup button (SETUP)
Moves a tour sequence one step forward from the step
previously paused on the active monitor.
Also selects a camera. If the active monitor is in the
spot mode, press NEXT while holding down the CAM
(SET) button, to replace the currently selected camera
with the next higher-numbered camera.
To display the unit's SETUP MENU, press this button
while holding down the SHIFT button.
* The playback of the recorded images is possible when
a recorder is connected.
% Zoom wheel controller
During the recorder mode, this button moves the play-
back image one step forward.
This control is used for zooming cameras equipped
with the specific lens. Moving the control to the right will
zoom in the image. Moving the control to the left will
zoom out the image.
$ Previous button (PREV)
Moves a tour sequence one step backward from the
step previously paused on the active monitor.
Also selects a camera. If the active monitor is in spot
mode, press PREV while holding down the CAM (SET)
button, to replace the currently selected camera with
the next lower-numbered camera.
% Joystick
Use this joystick to manually operate cameras, camera
site accessories and a recorder, or to move the cursor
in SETUP MENU on the active monitor screen.
}: Up
During the recorder mode, this button moves the play-
back image one step forward.
{: Down
[: Left, rewind*, backward field advance*
]: Right, fast-forward*, forward field advance*
*Available after pressing the RECORDER button while
connecting to a recorder.
$ Recorder button (RECORDER)
To enter the recorder mode, press this button. (Refer to
p. 131.)
Note: Only one operator can enter the recorder mode
at one time.
% Top button
Pressing this button will automatically set the lens focus
of a specified camera.
$ Pause button (PAUSE)
Pauses a tour sequence, and the playback of the
recorded images* that is being run on the active moni-
tor.
Also restarts the sequence from the next step forward,
or the playback of the recorded images*.
$ Play button (PLAY)
Starts the playback of the recorded images*.
$ Stop button (STOP)
Ends a tour sequence, or stops the playback of the
recorded images* that is being run on the active moni-
tor.
% Shift button (SHIFT)
To activate the alternate function of each button, press
this button, in combination with buttons associated with
special functions.
% On-screen Display button (OSD)
In combination with the numeric buttons, this button
toggles the currently selected display items on the
active monitor.
1: Clock display (T&D)
2: Camera title display (CAM ID)
3: Event display (EVENT)
4: Monitor status display (MON STATUS)
5: All displays (ALL)
7: ALARM HISTORY table (ALM H)
8: VIDEO LOSS STATUS table (VLD H)
9: SYSTEM STATUS table (SYS S)
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Rear View
%
%
%
%
^
0
5
RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK. DO NOT OPEN
RISQUE DE CHOCS ELECTROUES
NE PAS OUVRIR
CONTROLLER No. MODE
DATA
DC 9V IN
^
DC 9V IN
% Controller Number switch (CONTROLLER No.)
% Data ports (DATA)
Selects a number for the system controller for identifica-
tion in a system. Normally, set the switch to number 1.
Exchange the control data with the matrix switcher via
RS-485 cable (supplied with the system controller).
0
% DC 9V Input jack (DC 9V IN)
Use this jack to plug the AC adapter supplied with the
system controller.
#1
5
CONTROLLER No.
% Mode Selection switches (MODE)
^ Clamp
The operation mode of the system controller is selected
with these switches.
Fastens the supplied AC adapter's power cord.
When you use a terminal-mode system controller, set
the switches to the positions shown in the figure.
^ AC adapter
Caution: Use only the supplied AC adapter to feed 9 V
DC to the system controller.
Note: Disconnect the plug from the controller before
setting the controller number switch or mode selec-
tion switch, and reconnect it when finished. The
new settings will take effect when the power is
turned on.
OFF
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MODE
Note: When you use a PS·Data system controller, refer
to the system controller's operating instructions.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATIONS AND SYSTEM
CONNECTIONS
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATIONS
Notes:
WARNING
• An optional cooling fan attached inside the unit is
subject to wear. It needs to be replaced periodical-
ly.
Keep the temperature in the rack below 45°C
(113°F) at any time.
The installations described in the figures should be
made by qualified service personnel or system
installers.
• If the rack is subject to vibration, secure the rear of
the appliance to the rack by using additional mount-
ing brackets (procured locally).
■ Mounting into the Rack
The matrix switcher can be mounted into the rack as
described.
1. Remove the four rubber feet by unwinding the four
screws on the bottom of the matrix switcher.
■ Installing the Multiplexer Board
MUX
To use WJ-HD100 Series or a time-lapse VCR as a
recorder, you need to install a Multiplexer board inside the
matrix switcher. Refer to the Multiplexer board’s operating
instructions for how to install.
Remove 4 rubber feet
2. Place the rack mounting brackets on both sides of the
matrix switcher and tighten with the four supplied
screws (M4 X10).
3. Install the matrix switcher in the rack with the rack
mounting brackets secured with four screws (procured
locally).
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM CONNECTION EXAMPLES
■ Basic System Connection
This is an example of basic system connection.
Camera
3
Camera Camera
Camera
16
1
2
CAMERA IN 1 to 16
ALARM IN 1 to 16
Matrix Switcher
MONITOR OUT 1 to 4
Terminal-mode
PS·Data/Terminal-mode
Max. 4 System Controllers
Note: Before connecting a terminal-mode system controller to the DATA 4 port, configure the system through SETUP
MENU or WJ-SX150A Administrator Console.
■ System Expansion Connection
■ Connection with Digital Disk Recorder WJ-HD500 Series or WJ-HD200 Series
When connecting the camera output connectors to Digital Disk Recorder WJ-HD500 or WJ-HD200 Series, the digital disk
recorder can record all the camera channels. More than one camera images can be displayed in multiscreen segments on the
desired monitor.
Camera
3
Camera Camera
Camera
16
1
2
CAMERA IN 1 to 16
ALARM IN 1 to 16
MONITOR OUT 1 to 4
Available for live or play-backed camera images
(GENLOCK OFF)
Matrix Switcher
Recorder
Terminal-mode
PS·Data/Terminal-mode
Max. 4 System Controllers
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
• Before connecting a terminal-mode system controller to the DATA 4 port, configure the system through SETUP MENU or
WJ-SX150A Administrator Console.
• If an optional network board is installed inside the recorder and you are to control it from LAN (local area network) or the
Internet, refer to a service manual procurable in your area.
MUX
■ Connection with Digital Disk Recorder WJ-HD100 Series or Time-lapse VCR
• With the Multiplexer board, the recorded images of Camera 1 to 16 can be multiplexed to Digital Disk Recorder, WJ-
HD100 Series or a time-lapse VCR.
Camera
3
Camera Camera
Camera
16
1
2
Max. 16
Camera Inputs
16 Alarm Inputs
Multiplexer Board
WJ-SXB151
Matrix Switcher
Recorder or Time-lapse VCR
Max. 4 System Controllers
4 Monitor Outputs
Available for surveillance or playback of the camera images
To use WJ-HD100 Series or a time-lapse VCR as a recorder, you need to install a Multiplexer board inside the matrix
switcher.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Master-slave Connection
When applying this connection, up to 5 matrix switchers and 64 cameras can be connected in a surveillance control system.
One of the matrix switchers is designated as Master and the others are designated as Slave.
Camera
1
Camera
17
Camera
3
Camera
19
Camera
16
Camera
32
Camera
Camera
18
2
CAMERA IN
1 to 16
CAMERA IN
1 to 16
Matrix Switcher
Matrix Switcher
ALARM IN
1 to 16
ALARM IN
1 to 16
Slave 1
Slave 2
Camera
33
Camera
49
Camera
35
Camera
51
Camera
48
Camera
64
Camera
34
Camera
50
CAMERA IN
1 to 16
CAMERA IN
1 to 16
Matrix Switcher
Matrix Switcher
ALARM IN
1 to 16
ALARM IN
1 to 16
Slave 3
Slave 4
ALARM IN 1 to 16
Master
Matrix Switcher
MONITOR OUT 1 to 4
Terminal-mode
PS·Data/Terminal-mode
Max. 4 System Controllers
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTIONS
Connect non-multiplex type cameras to the CAMERA IN
connectors 1 to 16. For cameras equipped with RS-485
communication facilities, connect the RS-485 cable as fol-
lows.
■ Connection with the Camera
Sites
Connect the data-multiplex type cameras (or camera site
equipment) to the CAMERA IN connectors 1 to 16 on the
matrix switcher's rear panel.
Check the camera addresses when using RS-485 cameras.
Operations from the system controller will be invalid if the
camera addresses are set improperly.
Notes:
• Make sure that the cable length is less than 900 m
(3 000 ft) between the camera site and the unit when
using RG-59/U, BELDEN 9259 or equivalent cables.
• If you use locally procured cables, it is important to use
only a data-grade cable, which is suitable for RS-485
communication (shielded 2-wire twisted cable).
• When the cable length is extended, cable compensa-
tion is available. (Refer to pp. 74 and 94.)
• Use addresses from 1 to 16 for individual cameras.
• Do not set the same address for more than one camera
in an RS-485 chain.
• Before connecting the RS-485 camera(s) to DATA 1, 2
and/or 3, configure the system through WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console.
AUX
Alarm
RS485(CAMERA)
DATA 3 DATA 2
DATA 1
LINE
SELECT
2
4
RS485(CAMERA)
16
16
1
10
9
8
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
IN
OUT
9
8
7
CAMERA
Matrix Switcher
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Connection for RS-485 Type Camera
(A)
(B)
GND
OFF
ON
There are two options to connect the camera with the matrix
switcher, depending on the distance between them.
One is "Home Run" wiring and the other is daisy chain
wiring. "Home Run" wiring has the transmission stability with
less transmission loss, and daisy chain wiring has connec-
tion flexibility with less data ports occupied. For data-multi-
plex type cameras, 900 meters (3 000 ft) is the limit to use
coaxial cable such as RG-59/U, BELDEN 9259 or equiva-
lent.
WV-CPR450 and others (For the
Termination Switch positions, refer
to the oprating instractions of the
camera.)
Set it to
position 2.
RS485(CAMERA)
DATA HDR
DATA 4
DATA 3 DATA 2
DATA 1
LINE
SELECT
Note: If more distance is required, use cameras and
matrix switcher with RS-485 communication feature.
Remote control becomes possible.
TERM
OFF ON
2
4
RS485(CAMERA)
PS•DATA
Matrix Switcher
■ "Home Run" Wiring
1. Connect with a RS-485 camera in "Home Run" wiring as
shown in the figure.
■ Daisy Chain Wiring
2. Set the LINE SELECT switch to 2 or 4.
1. Draw up a plan for connection between the cameras
and the input channels of the matrix switcher, and the
assignment of unit addresses to cameras.
Notes:
• Before connecting RS-485 cameras to DATA1 to 3, data
port setting through WJ-SX150A Administrator Console
is necessary. (Refer to p. 96 Data Port.)
2. Set the LINE SELECT switch to 2. Also, set the connect-
ed device's switch if required.
• Recommended for RS-485 communication is AWG#22
or thicker one. The cable should be shielded, two-wire,
twisted pair, and with low impedance.
• Set the LINE SELECT switch to 4 when programming
preset position of WV-CSR600/650 Series camera is
connected to the unit.
3. Connect one end of the cable to RS-485 (CAMERA),
and the other end to the first camera in the chain, as
shown in the figure. Repeat this procedure for all cam-
eras.
4. Set the termination switches of the cameras at the chain
ends to ON. Camera's termination switches must be set
to OFF except the ones at the chain ends.
Notes:
• Set the same number for the camera's unit address as
and CAMERA IN.
RS-485 type camera
• Check the settings of the camera addresses when
using RS-485 cameras. Operations from the system
controller will be invalid if the camera addresses are set
improperly.
Set it to
position 4.
• Do not use addresses other than 1 to 16 for individual
cameras (More than 17 cameras are not allowed).
• Do not set the same address for more than one camera
in an RS-485 chain.
• Termination is the key to data transmission and recep-
tion in the chain. While the other switches are set to
OFF, only the switches at the chain ends must be set to
ON.
RS485(CAMERA)
DATA HDR DATA 4
PS•DATA
DATA 3 DATA 2
DATA 1
LINE
SELECT
TERM
OFF ON
2
4
RS485(CAMERA)
Matrix Switcher
RS485 Port
• The termination of this unit's RS-485 camera port is
always set to ON. Connect the unit at the end of the
daisy chain.
• The more equipment there is in the chain, the slower
the response may be.
Matrix switcher's rear panel
RB
RA
TB
TA
GND
RB
RA
None
TA
TB
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The switch on a daisy-
chain-connected unit
other than the
extremities must be set
to OFF.
■ Connection with the Monitors
Connect the monitors to the MONITOR OUT connectors at
The switch on the end
unit should be set to
ON.
the unit's rear panel with the coaxial cable.
(A)
(B)
GND
(A)
(B)
GND
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
The connectors MONITOR OUT 1 to 4 are associated to
Monitor 1 to 4. When you control the monitors from a PS·
Data controller, the connectors MONITOR OUT are associ-
ated to Unit 1 to 4.
WV-CPR450 and others
(For the termination
switch positions, refer
to the operating
Martix Switcher
instruction of the
3
1
corresponding unit.)
4
2
RS485(CAMERA)
MONITOR OUT
DATA HDR
DATA 4
DATA 3 DATA 2
DATA 1
LINE
SELECT
TERM
OFF ON
2
4
Set it to 2 or 4
(the same as
the connected
equipment).
PS•DATA
RS485(CAMERA)
Matrix Switcher
Auto termination works inside the matrix switcher.
Monitor 3
Monitor 4
Monitor 2 Monitor 1
Unit address 4 Unit address 3 Unit address 2 Unit address 1
Set the same
number for the
camera's unit
address as and
CAMERA IN.
DATA 3 DATA 2
DATA 1
RS485(CAMERA)
16
16
1
10
9
8
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
IN
OUT
9
8
7
CAMERA
Matrix Switcher
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Connection with the System
■ Connection with the Alarm
Controllers
Sensors
Connect the system controller to the DATA 1 to 4 port at the
unit's rear panel with the modular cable.
Connect the sensor switches to the unit's alarm port, as
shown in the example.
Recover
Input
Alarm
Sensor 1
RS485(CAMERA)
DATA HDR DATA 4
PS•DATA
DATA 3 DATA 2
DATA 1
LINE
SELECT
13
TERM
OFF ON
1
2
4
RS485(CAMERA)
ALARM
25
14
Matrix Switcher
Alarm
Sensor 2
Pin No. Designation
Pin No. Designation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Alarm Input 1
Alarm Input 3
Alarm Input 5
Alarm Input 7
Alarm Input 9
Alarm Input 11
Alarm Input 13
Alarm Input 15
GND
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Alarm Input 2
Alarm Input 4
Alarm Input 6
Alarm Input 8
Alarm Input 10
Alarm Input 12
Alarm Input 14
Alarm Input 16
GND
System controller
System controller
Alarm Output 1
Alarm Output 3
GND
Alarm Output 2
Alarm Output 4
GND
DATA1 to DATA4 Port
Matrix switcher's rear panel
Recover Input
RB
RA
DATA 1 to 4
TB
TA
Notes:
GND
RB
RA
GND
TA
TB
• Alarm inputs that are simultaneous or with very short
intervals will be ignored.
Allow for at least 100 ms interval from one alarm input to
the next.
• Confirm the alarm sensor type (N.O. or N.C.) and con-
figure the system through SETUP MENU (OSD) or WJ-
SX150A Administrator Console.
Notes:
• Up to four system controllers are connectable.
• Connect them in home run.
The factory setting is N.O.
• In the factory default setting, the DATA 4 port is a
PS·Data terminal. To connect a terminal-mode system
controller to this port, you need to change the data port
N.O.: Normally Open alarm contact
N.C.: Normally Closed alarm contact
• Alarm pins assigned as the time adjusting (TIME) termi-
nals cannot be used as alarm input terminals.
• The specification of Recover Input: 5 V DC / 0 V (low-
active)
setting
through
SETUP MENU
or
WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console. (Refer to pp. 74 or 96.)
Recover Input, which resets alarm signals, is Pin No. 13
of the ALARM port. To reset alarm signals, contact GND
and Recover Input.
When you connect Digital Disk Recorder WJ-HD100
Series to the matrix switcher, set the recorder's alarm
polarity to Open-collector low by setting the MODE
switch #6 to off.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Connection with the Alarm
■ Connection with Digital Disk
Output
Recorder WJ-HD500 Series
Pins #10, 11, 23 and 24 (open collector) turns to 0 V while
the alarm is activated. These terminals can drive external
warning devices such as a buzzer or lamp of up to 100 mA,
16 V DC. If the rating exceeds 100 mA, 16 V DC use a relay
as shown in Example 2.
Note: Refer to a service manual procurable in your area, for
details on the connection with a recorder (after the net-
work board installation) to operate via LAN or the
Internet.
Alarm signals are output from the terminals until the reset.
■ To Confirm the Images from a
Example 1: Direct drive connection
Recorder Connected to the Unit
The following is the description of the connection between a
recorder and this unit to confirm the images from the
recorder.
1. Set the unit address of the recorder to 1. Then, confirm
that the recorder’s CAMERA GENLOCK is set to OFF in
its SETUP MENU. (Refer to the recorder's operating
instructions.)
Buzzer
2. Connect the unit’s CAM OUT 1 to 16 connectors to the
recorder’s VIDEO IN 1 to 16 connectors with a coaxial
cable.
Example 2: Connection of devices exceeding drive
3. Connect the unit’s EXT IN connector to the recorder’s
MULTI SCREEN OUT connector with a coaxial cable.
4. Connect the unit’s DATA HDR connector to the
recorder’s DATA port with a modular cable.
(The control data and alarm signal will be output from
the unit to the recorder.)
NC
NO
Monitor
To Buzzer
C
Relay
+12V
GND
NC: Normally Closed Contact
NO: Normally Open Contact
C: Common
Matrix Switcher
MONITOR
OUT
EXT IN
EXT IN
(PLAY IN)
CAMERA
3
1
ALARM
SERIAL
RS485(CAMERA)
LINE
SELECT
SW IN
DATA HDR DATA 4
DATA 3 DATA 2
DATA 1
TERM
OFF ON
2
4
4
2
1
EXT OUT
(REC OUT)
4
PS•DA
TA
RS485(CAMERA)
MONITOR OUT
16
16
15
15
14
14
13
13
12
12
11
10
9
8
8
7
6
5
5
3
3
2
IN
OUT
11
10
9
7
6
4
2
1
Note: An alarm signal is output from the Master unit and a
unit activated by the alarm. Be careful of connections
as the Master unit outputs alarm signals to directly-con-
nected devices any time when an alarm is activated.
CAMERA
DATA HDR
MULTI SCREEN
OUT
GEN-LOCK OUT
IN
EXT STORAGE
COPY
SIGNAL GND
REMOTE(WV-CU50)
SERIAL
SPOT
OUT
DATA
10/100BASE-T
OUT
CONTROL
13
ALARM
10
MODE
8
MU
L
TI S
C
R
E
E
N O
U
T
AUDIO
15
16
14
14
12
12
11
11
9
7
7
6
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
IN
OUT
16
15
13
10
9
8
6
5
1
VIDEO
Recorder
Notes:
• You cannot record the camera images in maximum
recording rate through this connection. Refer to the next
connection example in this page.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Make sure the recorder’s unit address is set to 1
through SETUP MENU or WJ-SX150A Administrator
Console. (Refer to pp. 71 or 97.) If another number is
selected, you cannot control the recorder.
■ To Record the Camera Images in Maximum
Recording Rate
The following is the description of the connection between a
recorder and this unit for the maximum-rate recording.
1. Set the unit address of the recorder to 1. Then, set the
recorder’s CAMERA GENLOCK to ON in its SETUP
MENU. (Refer to the recorder's operating instructions.)
2. Connect the unit’s CAM OUT 1 to 16 connectors to the
recorder’s VIDEO IN 1 to 16 connectors with a coaxial
cable.
3. Connect the unit’s EXT IN connector to the recorder’s
GENLOCK OUT connector with a coaxial cable.
4. Connect the unit’s DATA HDR connector to the
recorder’s DATA port with a modular cable.
(The control data and alarm signal will be output from
the unit to the recorder.)
5. After the connection, set the unit’s EXT IN to GENLOCK
ON through SETUP MENU or WJ-SX150A Administrator
Console (Refer to pp. 71 or 97).
Notes:
• You need WJ-HD500A or a newer model for the maxi-
mum-rate recording.
• The playback, multiscreen output or live images from the
recorder are not displayed on Monitor 1 to 4. To confirm
the images, you need to connect another monitor with
the recorder.
• The recorder will not operate if its unit address is set to
other than 1.
• Make sure the recorder’s unit address is set to 1
through SETUP MENU or WJ-SX150A Administrator
Console. (Refer to pp. 71 or 97.) If another number is
selected, you cannot control the recorder.
EXT IN
Matrix Switcher
EXT IN
3
1
(PLAY IN)
CAMERA
SW IN
ALARM
SERIAL
RS485(CAMERA)
LINE
SELECT
DATA HDR DATA 4
DATA 3 DATA 2
DATA 1
TERM
OFF ON
2
4
4
2
1
EXT OUT
(REC OUT)
4
PS•DA
TA
RS485(CAMERA)
MONITOR OUT
16
16
15
15
14
14
13
13
12
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
5
3
3
2
IN
OUT
11
10
9
8
7
6
4
2
1
CAMERA
DATA HDR
DATA
GEN-LOCK OUT
IN
EXT STORAGE
COPY
SIGNAL GND
MULTI
SCREEN
OUT
REMOTE(WV-CU50)
SERIAL
SPOT
OUT
DATA
10/100BASE-T
OUT
CONTROL
13
ALARM
10
MODE
8
MU
L
TI S
C
R
E
E
N O
U
T
AUDIO
15
16
14
12
12
11
11
9
7
7
6
6
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
IN
OUT
16
15
14
13
10
9
8
5
1
VIDEO
GENLOCK
OUT
Recorder
Monitor
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
41
Monitor
■ To Control a Recorder via the
Network
The following is the description of the connection between
a recorder and this unit to control the recorder via the net-
work.
MONITOR
OUT
Matrix Switcher
EXT IN
1. Set the recorder's unit address to a number 5 or larger .
(Refer to the recorder's operating instructions.)
EXT IN
(PLAY IN)
CAMERA
3
1
ALARM
SERIAL
RS485(CAMERA)
LINE
SELECT
SW IN
DATA HDR DATA 4
DATA 3 DATA 2
DATA 1
TERM
OFF ON
2
4
4
2
1
EXT OUT
PS•DA
T
A
RS485(CAMERA)
MONITOR OUT
(REC OUT)
4
16
16
15
15
14
14
13
13
12
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
5
3
3
2
IN
2. Connect the unit’s CAM OUT 1 to 16 connectors to the
recorder’s VIDEO IN 1 to 16 connectors with a coaxial
cable.
OUT
11
10
9
8
7
6
4
2
1
CAMERA
DATA HDR DATA4
(PS·Data)
3. Connect the unit’s DATA HDR and DATA4 connectors
to the recorder’s DATA port with a daisy chain connec-
tion cable kit (WV-CA48/10K).
Daisy Chain Connection Kit
(WV-CA48/10K)
(The control data and alarm signal will be output from
the unit to the recorder.)
MULTI SCREEN
OUT
DATA
COPY
GEN-LOCK OUT
IN
EXT STORAGE
SIGNAL GND
REMOTE(WV-CU50)
SERIAL
4. Select the recorder’s new unit address, which is set in
Step 1, in 600 RECORDER (refer to p. 71 ) of SETUP
MENU or the Recorder (refer to p. 97 ) window of WJ-
SX150A Administrator Console.
SPOT
OUT
DATA
10/100BASE-T
10/100 BASE-T
OUT
MULTI SCRE N OUT AUDIO
CONTROL
13
ALARM
10
MODE
8
E
16
15
14
14
12
12
11
11
9
7
7
6
6
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
IN
OUT
16
15
13
10
9
8
5
1
VIDEO
Recorder*
5. Through a browser, set the unit address of an optional
network board (WJ-HDB502) to a number other than 1.
(Refer to WJ-HDB502 Operating Instructions.)
LAN Cable
HUB/Router
6. Refer to p. 38, p. 40 and p. 41 for MONITOR OUT con-
nection, MULTI SCREEN OUT connection, and EXT IN
connection.
LAN**
* WJ-HD500A or Newer Models with Network Board (WJ-HDB502)
** LAN : Local Area Network
Notes:
• You will need WJ-HD500A or a newer model, in which
an optional network board (WJ-HDB502) is installed.
• Select the PS·Data protocol for the DATA 4 setting.
(Refer to p. 74 CAMERA/DATA1 - 4 PORT or p. 96 Data
Port.) If the terminal mode is selected, you cannot con-
trol the recorder.
• The recorder will not be operable if its unit address is
set to 1/2/3/4.
• If the recorder's unit address in Step 1 and the recorder
setting in Step 4 are different, the recorder will not be
operable.
• In these connections, you cannot use a PS·Data system
controller.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Connection with Digital Disk Recorder WJ-HD200 Series
Note: Refer to a service manual procurable in your area, for details on the connection with a recorder to operate via LAN or the
Internet.
■ To Confirm the Images from a Recorder Connected to the Unit
The following is the description of the connection between a recorder and this unit to confirm the images from the recorder.
1. Set the unit address of the recorder to 1. (Refer to the recorder's operating instructions.)
2. Connect the unit’s CAM OUT 1 to 8 connectors to the recorder’s VIDEO IN 1 to 8 connectors with a coaxial cable.
3. Connect the unit’s EXT IN connector to the recorder’s MULTI SCREEN OUT connector with a coaxial cable.
4. Connect the unit’s DATA HDR connector to the recorder’s DATA port with a modular cable.
(The control data and alarm signal will be output from the unit to the recorder.)
Monitor
Matrix Switcher
MONITOR OUT
EXT IN
(PLAY IN)
3
1
SIGNAL GND
ALARM
SERIAL
CAMERA
SW IN
RS485(CAMERA)
LINE
SELECT
DATA HDR DATA 4
DATA 3 DATA 2
DATA 1
TERM
OFF ON
2
4
EXT IN
POWER
AC IN
4
2
1
EXT OUT
(REC OUT)
4
PS•DATA
10
RS485(CAMERA)
MONITOR OUT
16
16
15
15
14
14
13
13
12
12
11
9
8
8
7
6
5
5
3
3
2
IN
OUT
11
10
9
7
6
4
2
1
CAMERA
DATA HDR
CAMERA
OUT 1 to 8
(WV-CA48/10K)
DATA
VIDEO IN
1 to 8
MULTI
SCREEN OUT
IN
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
4
4
3
3
2
1
1
POWER
IN
ON
SPOT
OUT
SIGNAL GND
ALARM/REMOTE
OUT
OFF
OUT
5
2
MULTI
AUDIO
VIDEO
RS-232C
MODE
10/100BASE-T
DATA
SCREEN OUT
Recorder
Notes:
• If you use two WJ-HD200 Series recorders, you cannot control the recorders with the system controller connected to the
Master unit. When recording the images from CAM IN 1 to 16, it is recommended to use WJ-HD500 Series recorders.
• Make sure the recorder’s unit address is set to 1 through SETUP MENU or WJ-SX150A Administrator Console. (Refer to pp.
71 or 97.) If another number is selected, you cannot control the recorder.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ To Control a Recorder via the Network
The following is the description of the connection between a recorder and this unit to control the recorder via the network.
1. Set the recorder's unit address to a number 5 or larger . (Refer to the recorder's operating instructions.)
2. Connect the unit’s CAM OUT 1 to 8 connectors to the recorder’s VIDEO IN 1 to 8 connectors with a coaxial cable.
3. Connect the unit’s EXT IN connector to the recorder’s MULTI SCREEN OUT connector with a coaxial cable.
4. Connect the unit’s DATA HDR and DATA4 connectors to the recorder’s DATA port with a daisy chain connection cable kit
(WV-CA48/10K).
5. Select the recorder’s new unit address, which is set in Step 1, in 600 RECORDER (refer to p. 71 ) of SETUP MENU or the
Recorder (refer to p. 97) window of WJ-SX150A Administrator Console.
6. Through a browser or the recorder’s SETUP MENU, set the CTL-UNIT ADDR to a number other than 1. (Refer to the
recorder’s operating instructions.)
Monitor
Matrix Switcher
MONITOR OUT
EXT IN
(PLAY IN)
3
1
SIGNAL GND
ALARM
SERIAL
CAMERA
SW IN
RS485(CAMERA)
LINE
SELECT
DATA HDR DATA 4
DATA 3 DATA 2
DATA 1
TERM
OFF ON
2
4
EXT IN
POWER
AC IN
4
2
EXT OUT
(REC OUT)
4
PS•DATA
10
RS485(CAMERA)
MONITOR OUT
16
16
15
15
14
14
13
13
12
12
11
9
8
8
7
6
5
5
3
3
2
1
IN
OUT
11
10
9
7
6
4
2
1
CAMERA
DATA HDR
CAMERA
OUT 1 to 8
DATA 4
(PS DATA)
•
(WV-CA48/10K)
DATA
VIDEO IN
1 to 8
MULTI
SCREEN OUT
IN
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
4
4
3
3
2
1
1
POWER
IN
ON
SPOT
OUT
SIGNAL GND
ALARM/REMOTE
OUT
OFF
OUT
5
2
MULTI
AUDIO
VIDEO
RS-232C
MODE
10/100BASE-T
DATA
SCREEN OUT
Recorder
LAN Cable
LAN *
HUB/Router
* LAN: Local Area Network
Notes:
• Select the PS·Data protocol for the DATA 4 setting. (Refer to p. 74 CAMERA/DATA1 – 4 PORT or p. 96 Data Port.) If the ter-
minal mode is selected, you cannot control the recorder.
• The recorder will not be operable if its unit address is set to 1/2/3/4.
• If the recorder's unit address in Step 1 and the recorder setting in Step 5 are different, the recorder will not be operable.
• In these connections, you cannot use a PS·Data system controller.
• If you use two WJ-HD200 Series recorders, you cannot control the recorders with the system controller connected to the
Master unit. When recording the images from CAM IN 1 to 16, it is recommended to use WJ-HD500 Series recorders.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MUX
■ Connection with Digital Disk Recorder WJ-HD100 Series
1. To record the camera images with Digital Disk Recorder WJ-HD100 Series, install an optional Multiplexer board in the
matrix switcher.
2. Connect the matrix switcher’s EXT OUT (REC OUT) to the digital disk recorder’s VIDEO IN with a coaxial cable.
3. Connect the matrix switcher’s EXT IN (PLAY IN) to the digital disk recorder’s MONITOR OUT (PLAY) with a coaxial cable.
4. Connect the matrix switcher’s DATA HDR to the digital disk recorder’s DATA with a modular cable.
5. Connect the matrix switcher’s CAMERA SW IN to the digital disk recorder’s CAMERA SW OUT with an RCA-pin cable.
6. Select “HD100” for 600 RECORDER in SETUP MENU. (Refer to p. 71.)
7. Conform the parameter of 740 CAMERA/DATA 1 - 4 PORT to the setting of the recorder.
The following parameters are fixed.
Data bit: 8 bits
Parity check: None
Stop bit: 1 bit
8 Conform the parameter of 620 RECORDER UNIT ADDRESS in SETUP MENU to the setting of the recorder. (Refer to the
recorder’s operating instructions for the unit address.)
Note: After the connection, configure the system through SETUP MENU and WJ-SX150A Administrator Console.
Pin #10 (Alarm Out 1)
Pin #11 (Alarm Out 3)
Pin #13
(Recover Input)
Matrix Switcher
EXT IN
3
1
2
(PLAY IN)
ALARM
SERIAL
CAMERA
SW IN
RS485(CAMERA)
LINE
SELECT
DATA HDR DATA 4
PS•DATA
DATA 3 DATA 2
DATA 1
TERM
OFF ON
2
4
4
EXT OUT
(REC OUT)
RS485(CAMERA)
MONITOR OUT
Pin #24 (Alarm Out 4)
Pin #23 (Alarm Out 2)
Pin #9 (GND)
POWER
IN
IN
ON
SIGNAL GND
OUT
OUT
OFF
CAMERA
SW OUT
MONITOR OUT
(PLAY)
TIME
ADJUST
SERIES
RECORD
AUDIO
VIDEO
RS-232C
DATA
MODE
REMOTE
ALARM
Recorder
Set the recorder’s alarm
ON
polarity to Open-collector
low by setting the MODE
switch #6 to OFF.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Polarity switch
MODE
■ DATA HDR Port
DATA HDR Port
Matrix switcher's rear panel
DATA HDR
TB
TA
RB
RA
GND
TB
GND
RA
RB
TA
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MUX
■ Connection with the Time-lapse VCR (Panasonic Models)
1. Configure the parameters of the Multiplexer functions in the Multiplexer Mode (refer to p. 98) window of WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console.
Note: To put a file from PC to the unit, select PC in 600 RECORDER in SETUP MENU. (Refer to p. 71.) When VCR is select-
ed, parameter configuration in the Multiplexer Mode window is unavailable.
2. After Step 1, select VCR for 600 RECORDER in SETUP MENU. (Refer to p. 71.)
3. Conform the communication speed (SPEED) for 740 CAMERA/DATA 1- 4 PORT in SETUP MENU to that of the time-lapse
VCR. (Refer to pp. 74 and 75.)
The following parameters are fixed.
Data bit: 7 bits
Parity check: ODD
Stop bit: 1 bit
4. Connect the matrix switcher’s EXT OUT (REC OUT) to the time-lapse VCR’s VIDEO IN with the coaxial cable.
5. Connect the matrix switcher’s EXT IN (PLAY IN) to the time-lapse VCR’s VIDEO OUT with the coaxial cable.
6. Connect the matrix switcher’s SERIAL to that of the time-lapse VCR with a 9-pin D-sub cable.
7. Connect the matrix switcher’s CAMERA SW IN to the time-lapse VCR’s CAMERA SW OUT with an RCA-pin cable.
Notes:
• Only Panasonic time-lapse VCRs which support RS-232C are usable. (Refer to Cable Specifications on the next page
for details of cables.)
• Both of the time-lapse VCR and PC cannot be connected to the matrix switcher.
• When configuring the system through WJ-SX150A Administrator Console, pull out the time-lapse VCR’s cable and con-
nect the PC’s cable to the serial port.
• To use the alarm recording function, connect the matrix switcher’s all alarm output terminals (Alarm Output 1 to 4) to
the time-lapse VCR’s ALARM IN.
• Be sure to activate auto-recovery for the VCR’s alarm reset function.
Pin #10(Alarm out 1)
Pin #11(Alarm out 3)
Pin #13
(Recover Input)
Matrix Switcher
EXT IN
(PLAY IN)
3
1
2
ALARM
TERM
SERIAL
CAMERA
SW IN
RS485(CAMERA)
DATA HDR DATA 4
DATA 3 DATA 2
DATA 1
LINE
SELECT
2
4
OFF
ON
4
EXT OUT
(REC OUT)
PS•DATA
RS485(CAMERA)
MONITOR OUT
Pin #24(Alarm out 4)
Pin #23(Alarm out 2)
Pin #9(GND)
Time-lapse VCR
VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
CAMERA
SW OUT
GND
2
1
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
ALARM
IN
ALARM
OUT
WARNING
OUT
SERIES
REC IN
SERIES
REC OUT
TIME
ADJUST IN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
13
COM
1 SHOT IN 10 HUMID OUT 14
ALARM
RESET IN
ALARM
RECOVER OUT
COM
11 REC OUT 15
REC REVIEW
TAPE END
OUT
TIME
12
16
ADJUST OUT
OUT
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Cable Specifications
AG6730, AG6740
RT850
Matrix Switcher
Time-lapse VCR
Matrix Switcher
RT850
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
20
22
Straight Cable
Frame
Frame
Shield
MUX
■ Connection with the Time-lapse VCR (Non-Panasonic Models)
1. To record the camera images through a time-lapse VCR, install an optional Multiplexer board in the matrix switcher.
2. Select OFF for 600 RECORDER in SETUP MENU. (Refer to p. 71.)
3. Connect the matrix switcher’s EXT OUT (REC OUT) to the time-lapse VCR’s video input connector with the coaxial cable.
4. Connect the matrix switcher’s EXT IN (PLAY IN) to the time-lapse VCR’s video output connector with the coaxial cable.
Notes:
• To use the alarm recording function, connect the matrix switcher’s all alarm output terminals (Alarm Output 1 to 4) to the
time-lapse VCR’s ALARM IN.
• Be sure to set the VCR to automatically recover from alarm reset.
Pin #10(Alarm out 1)
Pin #11(Alarm out 3)
Pin #13
(Recover Input)
Matrix Switcher
EXT IN
(PLAY IN)
CAMERA
SW IN
3
1
2
ALARM
TERM
SERIAL
RS485(CAMERA)
LINE
SELECT
DATA HDR DATA 4
DATA 3 DATA 2
DATA 1
2
4
OFF
ON
4
EXT OUT
(REC OUT)
PS•DATA
RS485(CAMERA)
MONITOR OUT
Pin #24(Alarm out 4)
Pin #23(Alarm out 2)
Pin #9(GND)
Time-lapse VCR
VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
CAMERA
SW OUT
GND
2
1
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
ALARM
IN
ALARM
OUT
WARNING
OUT
SERIES
REC IN
SERIES
REC OUT
TIME
ADJUST IN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
13
COM
1 SHOT IN 10 HUMID OUT 14
ALARM
RESET IN
ALARM
RECOVER OUT
COM
11 REC OUT 15
REC REVIEW
TAPE END
OUT
TIME
12
16
ADJUST OUT
OUT
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Time Adjustment with an External
■ Connection with the PC
Equipment
1. Conform the communication speed (SERIAL PORT
SPEED) parameter in SETUP MENU to that of the PC.
2. Connect the matrix switcher's serial port to that of the
PC with the 9-pin D-sub cable.
The specified external devices can output the time adjust-
ing signal to the matrix switcher.
This signal can adjust the time by up to 30 seconds every
hour.
To use this function, it is necessary to assign the alarm
input terminal(s) (pin # 1 to 16) to the time adjusting termi-
nal(s).
SETUP MENU or WJ-SX150A Administrator Console can
assign the signal.
D-sub9
or
D-sub25
D-sub9
Note: In the master-slave connection, time setting of every
unit can be synchronized when the time adjusting sig-
nal is input to any unit.
SERIAL
Matrix Switcher
Personal Computer
Notes:
■ Master Clock Connection Example
• The following parameters are fixed.
Data bit: 8 bits
for Time Adjustment
Parity check: none
Stop bit: 1 bit
• Refer to Cable Specifications in this page for details on
cables.
Connect the matrix switcher's time adjusting terminal to
those of the master clock with the twisted pair cable.
The figure below shows the case in which Alarm Input 16 is
assigned as the time adjusting terminal.
Note: A master clock with N.O. (Normally Open alarm con-
tact)-type output is connectable.
■ Cable Specifications
PC
Matrix Switcher
Matrix Switcher
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
ALARM
3
Pin #21
Pin #22
GND
4
5
6
7
12
6
8
9
3
Frame
Frame
Shield
Master clock
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Master-slave Connection
The following are master-slave connection patterns.
Pattern 1: Master and Slave 1 are connected in the system.
Slave 1
Camera 1 to 16
HDR PSD D3 D2 D1 CAM
R
E
C
FS 16
Digital Disk
Recorder
WJ-HD
A
Master
Camera 17 to 28
MON1→CAM1
MON2→CAM2
MON3→CAM3
MON4→CAM4
HDR PSD D3 D2 D1 CAM
MONITOR OUT 1 to 4
REC
FS 16
Digital Disk
Recorder
WJ-HD
A
Terminal - mode
•
PS Data
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pattern 2: Master, Slave 1 and 2 are connected in the system.
Slave 1
Slave 2
Camera 1 to 16
Camera 17 to 32
HDR PSD D3 D2 D1 CAM
HDR PSD D3 D2 D1 CAM
R
E
C
R
E
C
FS 16
FS 16
Digital Disk
Recorder
Digital Disk
Recorder
WJ-HD
A
WJ-HD
A
Master
Camera 33 to 40
MON1→CAM1
MON2→CAM2
MON3→CAM3
MON4→CAM4
MON1→CAM5
MON2→CAM6
MON3→CAM7
MON4→CAM8
HDR PSD D3 D2 D1 CAM
MONITOR OUT 1 to 4
REC
FS 16
Digital Disk
Recorder
WJ-HD
A
Terminal - mode
•
PS Data
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pattern 3: Master, Slave 1 to 3 are connected in the system.
Slave 1
Slave 2
Slave 3
Camera 1 to 16
Camera 17 to 32
Camera 33 to 48
HDR PSD D3 D2 D1 CAM
HDR PSD D3 D2 D1 CAM
HDR PSD D3 D2 D1 CAM
R
E
C
R
E
C
R
E
C
FS 16
FS 16
FS 16
Digital Disk
Recorder
Digital Disk
Recorder
Digital Disk
Recorder
WJ-HD
A
WJ-HD
A
WJ-HD
A
Master
Camera 49 to 52
MON1→CAM1
MON2→CAM2
MON3→CAM3
MON4→CAM4
MON1→CAM5
MON2→CAM6
MON3→CAM7
MON4→CAM8
MON1→CAM9
MON2→CAM10
MON3→CAM11
MON4→CAM12
HDR PSD D3 D2 D1 CAM
MONITOR OUT 1 to 4
REC
FS 16
Digital Disk
Recorder
WJ-HD
A
Terminal - mode
•
PS Data
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pattern 4: Master, Slave 1 to 4 are connected in the system.
Slave 1
Slave 2
Slave 3
Slave 4
Camera 1 to 16
Camera 17 to 32
Camera 33 to 48
Camera 49 to 64
HDR PSD D3 D2 D1 CAM
HDR PSD D3 D2 D1 CAM
HDR PSD D3 D2 D1 CAM
HDR PSD D3 D2 D1 CAM
R
E
C
R
E
C
R
E
C
R
E
C
FS 16
FS 16
FS 16
FS 16
Digital Disk
Recorder
Digital Disk
Recorder
Digital Disk
Recorder
Digital Disk
Recorder
WJ-HD
A
WJ-HD
A
WJ-HD
A
WJ-HD
A
Master
MON1→CAM1
MON2→CAM2
MON3→CAM3
MON4→CAM4
MON1→CAM5
MON2→CAM6
MON3→CAM7
MON4→CAM8
MON1→CAM9
MON2→CAM10
MON3→CAM11
MON4→CAM12
MON1→CAM13
MON2→CAM14
MON3→CAM15
MON4→CAM16
HDR PSD D3 D2 D1 CAM
MONITOR OUT 1 to 4
Terminal - mode
•
PS Data
Note: Before connections, make sure all the units have the same firmware version. You can see the firmware version of each
unit in SETUP MENU. (Refer to pp. 72 and 73 710 MASTER-SLAVE.) In case there is a version difference, update the
firmware of each unit to the newest using a CD-ROM. (Refer to pp.58 to 60 FIRMWARE UPDATE.)
■ Preparation
Prepare the following items besides standard accessories.
• Personal computer x 1 (Refer to p. 79 Platform for details on system requirements.)
• 9-pin D-sub crossing cable x 1 (Used for connection between the PC and the Master unit)
• Phillips screwdriver x 1 (Used for opening the front panel and setting unit numbers)
• Coaxial cable* (Used for connection of the Master and Slave units)
• Cable Kit WV-CA48/10K* (Used for connection of more than one Slave unit)
* Necessary number will differ depending on the connection pattern.
■ Unit Number Selection
Set the unit number selector of each unit to determine Master and slave n*. (Refer to the illustration and diagram in p. 24.)
*n is a unit number.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Video Cable Connection
Connect the camera input connectors of Master and the monitor output connectors of Slave with coaxial cables as described
in the diagram.
Connection
Master
Slave
Camera Input 1
Camera Input 2
Camera Input 3
Camera Input 4
Camera Input 5
Camera Input 6
Camera Input 7
Camera Input 8
Camera Input 9
Camera Input 10
Camera Input 11
Camera Input 12
Camera Input 13
Camera Input 14
Camera Input 15
Camera Input 16
Monitor Output 1
Monitor Output 2
Monitor Output 3
Monitor Output 4
Monitor Output 1
Monitor Output 2
Monitor Output 3
Monitor Output 4
Monitor Output 1
Monitor Output 2
Monitor Output 3
Monitor Output 4
Monitor Output 1
Monitor Output 2
Monitor Output 3
Monitor Output 4
Master and Slave 1
Master and Slave 2
Master and Slave 3
Master and Slave 4
■ DATA Port Connection
• Connect the DATA 3 port of the Master unit and the DATA 4 port of the Slave units.
• Connect the Master and Slave units with the supplied crossing cable.
• Connect Slave and Slave with Cable Kit WV-CA48/10K.
• Set the termination selectors of the Master and terminal Slave unit to ON.
• Set the termination selectors of other Slave units to OFF.
• Connect system controllers to the Master unit. (Refer to p. 39.)
Example: Master, Slave 1 and 2 are connected in the system.
Slave 1
Slave 2
DATA HDR DATA 4
DATA HDR DATA 4
TERM
OFF ON
TERM
OFF ON
PS•DATA
PS•DATA
Cable Kit WV-CA48/10K
Connect the side
marked as “Slave”
to the DATA 4 port
of Slave 1.
Cable Kit WV-CA48/10K
Master
DATA HDR DATA 4
DATA 3
TERM
OFF ON
Crossing cable
(supplied to the unit)
PS•DATA
Connect the side marked as
“Master” to the DATA 3 port
of Master.
Note: System controllers cannot be connected to Slave units.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Connection between the Units and Cameras
Connect each camera to CAMERA IN 1 to 16 of each unit. (Refer to p. 36 Connection with the Camera Sites.) Each camera has
its own logical camera number.
The default setting of the logical camera numbers is as follows. (The logical camera numbers can be configured in SETUP
MENU and WJ-SX150A Administrator Console.)
Camera total
number
Cameras connected Cameras connected Cameras connected Cameras connected Cameras connected
to Master
1 to 16
17 to 28
33 to 40
49 to 52
–
to Slave 1
to Slave 2
to Slave 3
to Slave 4
1 to 16
17 to 28
29 to 40
41 to 52
53 to 64
–
–
–
–
1 to 16
1 to 16
1 to 16
1 to 16
–
–
–
17 to 32
17 to 32
17 to 32
–
–
–
33 to 48
33 to 48
49 to 64
Connect the cameras and the Master/Slave 1 to 4 with the coaxial cables according to the diagram.
■ Recorder Connection
Connect recorders to each Master/Slave units. Refer to pp. 40 to 47 for connection procedures.
Example: Master, Slave 1 and 2 are connected in the system.
Camera
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
Connected to Slave 2
Connected to Slave 1
16
16
15
15
14
14
13
13
12
12
11
11
10
10
9
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
Master unit
IN
OUT
CAMERA
16
16
15
15
14
14
13
13
12
12
11
11
10
10
9
8
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
Master recorder
IN
OUT
9
8
7
VIDEO
Notes:
• Recorders and/or the Multiplexer board cannot be connected to the Master unit when Slave 1 to 4 are connected in the
system.
• The Master unit’s camera channels which loop thru Slave units cannot be connected to the recorder. (In the illustration, the
Master unit’s CAM OUT 1 to 8 and the recorder’s VIDEO IN 1 to 8 cannot be connected.) The Master recorder can record
only images from directly-connected cameras when the Master and Slave 1/2/3 are connected together. (For example in
the illustration, the Master recorder can record images from Cam 33 to 40.) Camera input signals from Slave units to the
Master unit are not for recording but for cross point switching.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Connection with the PC
Connect the PC and the Master unit. (Refer to p. 48 for the
connection procedure.)
■ Software Setup
After connecting the PC to the Master unit, do the setup
procedure with SETUP MENU or WJ-SX150A Administrator
Console.
• With SETUP MENU
1. Turn the power of each unit to ON.
2. Log-in the system with a system controller. (Refer to p.
104.)
3. Open SETUP MENU. (Refer to p. 63.)
4. Open “700 SYSTEM” - “710 MASTER-SLAVE”. (Refer to
pp. 72 and 73.)
5. Set the connected Slave units to ON. “Is the MASTER-
SLAVE changed? NO” will appear.
6. Change NO to YES by pressing the NEXT or PREV but-
ton on the system controller.
7. Press the SET button. The setting will be saved and you
will log-out from SETUP menu.
• With WJ-SX150A Administrator Console
1. Turn the power of each unit to ON.
2. Open WJ-SX150A Administrator Console. (Refer to p.
80.)
3. Open the Master-Slave window. (Refer to p. 81.)
4. Configure and save the settings by clicking on the Save
Exit button. (Refer to p. 82.)
5. Open the “Put a file to SX150A” window. (Refer to p.
83.)
6. Click on the “OK” button. The setting data will be trans-
ferred to the Master unit.
7. Close the main window (refer to p. 80) to quit WJ-
SX150A Administrator Console.
■ Recorder Setup
When connecting a recorder with more than one video
input (WJ-HD500 or WJ-HD200 Series), conform the LCN
(logical camera number) settings of the unit to the camera
number setting of a recorder. (Refer to pp. 73/82 and the
recorder’s operating instructions.)
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WJ-SX150A SETUP PROCEDURES
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FIRMWARE UPDATE
This setting is required when there is a firmware version dif-
ference among each unit in the master-slave connection.
Before the procedure, confirm the versions written on the
label on each CD-ROM.
■ Firmware Update of SX150A
Program Writer
1. Connect the matrix switcher's serial port to that of the
PC with the 9-pin D-sub cable. (Refer to p. 48.)
2. Launch SX150A Program Writer by selecting “Start” –
“Programs” – “Panasonic” – “SX150A Program Writer”.
The RS232C Setting window will appear on the PC
screen.
■ Installation of SX150A Program
Writer
Note: Refer to p. 79 for the platform necessary for installa-
tion.
1. Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the PC.
2. Open the CD-ROM drive window.
The file is located in the following directory.
E: \PWriter\SetupPWriter.exe (E is the CD-ROM drive.)
3. Confirm whether the following are selected.
Then, click on "SET".
3. Double-click the “SetupPWriter.exe” icon to begin the
installation. The Welcome window will appear on the PC
screen.
Baud Rate: 38400
Data Bit: 8
Parity: NONE
Stop Bit: 1
Com Port: 1 (Select the usable communication-port
number of the PC.)
Note: Conform the baud rate to the SERIAL port setting
in 740 CAMERA/DATA 1 - 4 PORT. (Refer to pp. 74
and 75.) The factory default setting is 38400 bps.
4. Set the mode selector at the front panel as shown in the
Version confirmation mode window. Besides, make sure
the unit number selector is set to “0”.
4. Press the NEXT button to continue the installation.
5. Respond to the dialog boxes by following the directions
given.
In case you have changed the selector settings, do the
following after Step 4.
(1) Turn off the unit.
(2) Turn on the unit again.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.Click on the OK button in Version confirmation mode win-
dow.
11. Wait until the following message appears.
“■■SDRAM INITIALIZE COMPLETED.START LOAD-
ING…”
Note: If the selector settings are wrong when you do
Step 5, the following message will appear to notify
that version confirmation was failed.
12. Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the PC.
13. Click on the “Browse…” button to select a .mot file.
The file is located in the following directory.
E: \PWriter\sx150A_v■■■■■.mot
(E is the CD-ROM drive and ■ is the software version.
For example, V111■■ means Version 1.11.)
14. Make sure that the new software version is displayed in
the Transfer File box.
In this case, confirm the connections and do Step 1 to 5
again.
15. Press the Transfer button.
6. Turn off the Master unit.
16. A message window will appear to ask you if it is OK to
overwrite the software. After confirmation, click on "OK".
The .mot file will be copied from the CD-ROM to the
matrix switcher.
7. Set the mode selector as shown in the Firmware update
mode window.
You can confirm the status by viewing messages.
(1) “■■■LOAD OK…”: The copy is finished.
(2) “■■■■NOW ERASING…”: Data is being erased
from the flash memory.
(3) “■■■■■NOW WRITING…”: New data is being
written in the flash memory.
(4) “■■■■■■COMPLETED!!”: The flash-memory
writing is finished.
Notes:
• Copying takes approx. 7 minutes.
• Avoid disconnecting or powering off the PC and the
matrix switcher. It may cause trouble.
17. After “■■■■■■COMPLETED!!” is displayed, power off
the matrix switcher.
8. Turn on the unit again.
18. Set the mode selector of the matrix switcher as follows.
9. Click on the OK button. The unit will be set to the
firmware update mode.
MODE
10. The Program Writer for SX150A window will be dis-
played.
ON
1
2
3
4
19. Display the matrix switcher’s SETUP MENU. (Refer to
the matrix switcher’s operating instructions.)
20. Make sure that the version of the matrix switcher is dis-
played in SETUP MENU. That shows the software
update has been successfully executed.
When you power on the matrix switcher and the system
becomes ready for update, the following message will
appear on the PC screen.
“■FIRMWARE UPLOAD START! WAIT…”
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Timeout Error
■ Error List
The following error messages are displayed through SX150
Program Writer.
■ File Error
This error message is displayed when a specified time has
passed since you started installing SX150A Program
Writer/updating the firmware. The following are the timeout
error statuses.
This error message is displayed during the following occa-
sions.
Status 0: 30 seconds has passed since the PC
became idle.
• You have selected a wrong file (whose file extension is
not “. mot”) in Step 13 of p. 59.
• The “.mot” file is broken.
To solve this problem, select the correct file. (Refer to p.
59.)
Status 1: 30 seconds has passed since the SD-RAM
started to be cleared.
Status 3: 20 minutes has passed since the file transfer
was started.
Status 4: 30 seconds has passed since the file transfer
was completed.
Status 5: 30 seconds has passed since the file loading
became OK.
Status 6: 5 seconds has passed since the file erasing
is started.
■ Not Ready
Status 7: 5 seconds has passed since the file writing is
started.
This error message is displayed when the matrix switcher’s
mode is not “SX150 SOFTWARE UPLOAD”.
To solve this problem, do the following.
1. Power off the matrix switcher.
2. Set the mode selector of the matrix switcher to “SX150
SOFTWARE UPLOAD”. (Refer to p. 24.)
3. Power on the matrix switcher again.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP PROCEDURES
• WJ-SX150A Administrator Console (PC)
All the functions of this unit (except camera manual clean-
ing) are configurable. You need a PC to use WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console.
Refer to p. 79 WJ-SX150A ADMINISTRATOR CONSOLE for
details on the platform and installation.
■ Setup Procedures
This unit has two setting procedures.
The one is SETUP MENU, which is the unit's on-screen dis-
play (OSD).
The other is WJ-SX150A Administrator Console, which
operates on the PC.
Notes:
• The Master unit administrates all the system settings.
Do the setup procedure with the Master unit only.
• To use WJ-SX150A Administrator Console, you need to
prepare a PC and a 9-pin D-sub cable.(Refer to p. 48.)
• When changing the configuration of WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console, configuration data getting and
putting are necessary between the unit and PC to acti-
vate your configuration.
Master-slave connection settings
• Master-slave
• Logical camera number
Sequence settings
• Tour sequence
• Group sequence
Schedule settings
• Timer event
• Camera cleaning
• Daylight saving time
Alarm settings
• Alarm mode
■ Description of Setup Procedures
This chapter describes about configurable items.
• Alarm event
• Alarm input/Alarm port
Operator settings
• Operator registration
• Level table
■ Master-Slave Connection Settings
Both SETUP MENU and WJ-SX150 Administrator console
can configure the parameters of master-slave connection
and logical camera number.
• Master-slave: The composition of the master-slave con-
nection is configurable.
• Logical camera number: Logical camera number,
which is used for camera control and monitor display,
can be assigned to each camera.
• Monitor select (Monitor selection)
•
Auto login/logout (Auto log-in/log-out)
System settings
• Clock (Time and date) *1
• Cable compensation
• Camera title
• Data port *2
• Recorder
• Multiplexer
• Mux camera (Multiplexer) title
Setup file operation
• Put a file to SX150A
■ Sequence Settings
•
Get a configuration data from SX150A
SETUP MENU can configure tour sequences. WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console can configure both of tour
sequences and group sequences.
• Tour sequence: Up to 32 tour sequences are config-
urable (64 steps per tour).
• Group sequence: Tour sequences can be activated on
up to 4 monitors simultaneously (1 tour sequence per
monitor).
SX150A Admin Console configuration
• File open
• Account manager
• Communication (Serial) port
• Camera manual cleaning ON/OFF
*1 WJ-SX150A Administrator Console can configure the
display pattern.
*2 WJ-SX150A Administrator Console can configure the
communication speed (baud rate) of the ports Data 1 to 4.
■ Schedule Settings
SETUP MENU can configure daylight saving time. WJ-
SX150A Administrator Console can configure timer event,
camera cleaning, and daylight saving time.
• Timer event: A sequence or spot mode can be activat-
ed on the regular time of every month, week or day.
Up to 50 timer events can be registered.
• Camera cleaning: Camera cleaning can be executed
on the regular time of every month, week or day.
• Daylight saving time: Daylight saving time schedule for
20 years are configurable.
• SETUP MENU (OSD)
The basic functions, which are essential for the operation,
are configurable. However, some items are not config-
urable. The settings about group sequences, operators and
schedules, etc.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Camera title: Camera title is configurable to identify the
camera images on the monitor. WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console can configure the camera title
including original characters.
• Data port: Usually, the ports DATA 1 to 3 connect to the
terminal-mode system controllers. RS-485 cameras will
be connectable with the data port configurations
through WJ-SX150A Administrator Console and SETUP
MENU.
When you use the system controllers via the PS·Data
protocol, you need to configure the DATA 4 port setting
through SX150A Admin Console or SETUP MENU.
• Recorder: The type and unit address of the recorder
are configurable.
• Multiplxer: The parameters of the recorder mode are
configurable. You can set the alarm and normal record-
ing rate. You can also activate/deactivate dynamic
recording, dummy black, and "CAMSW LOSS Rn” indi-
■ Alarm Settings
The operation parameters when an alarm is input to the unit
are configurable.
• Alarm mode: The operation mode activated along with
an alarm input is configurable. Sequence mode or hold
mode is selectable. Alarm mode can be set to OFF
when not using it.
• Alarm event: The sequence number or spot camera is
selectable for the alarm event.
• Alarm input (Alarm port): The alarm polarity (N. O. or N.
C.) is assignable to each alarm input terminal.
• It is also selectable whether to activate the recording
and sequence/spot image monitoring when an alarm
signal is input to the unit. Alarm recording without the
sequence/spot image monitoring is also available.
■ Operator Settings
MUX
cation. (Rn is a recorder number.)
• Mux camera (Multiplexer) title: Camera titles which are
displayed with multiscreen segments are configurable.
MUX
If you control this unit with a terminal-mode system con-
troller, your operator information, controllable monitors and
auto log-in/log-out will be registrable and configurable.
• Operator registration: Up to 16 operators are available.
ID and password for operator identification are config-
urable. Level and priority can be assigned to each
operator. Each camera's control coverage is also con-
figurable.
• Level table: Restriction level for each password is cus-
tomizable.
• Monitor select (Monitor selection): Controllable monitor
can be assigned to each controller.
■ Setup File Operation
WJ-SX150A Administrator Console can send a configura-
tion file from the PC to this unit. The utility can also send the
file from the unit to the PC for configuration.
• Put a file to SX150A: A configuration data is sent from
the PC to the unit.
• Get a configuration data from SX150A: A configuration
data is sent from the unit to the PC.
• Select setup data file: A configuration data is selected
when sending it from the PC to the unit (or from the unit
to the PC.)
• Auto login/logout (Auto log-in/log-out): Auto log-in/log-
out is configurable for each controller.
Notes:
• These settings (except Operator registration) are con-
figurable only through WJ-SX150A Administrator
Console. Operator registration is configurable through
SETUP MENU and WJ-SX150A Administrator Console.
• When you control the unit with a PS·Data system con-
troller, the above settings will be invalid. Refer to the
system controller's operating instructions.
Note: These settings are configurable only through WJ-
SX150A Administrator Console.
■ WJ-SX150A Administrator Console
Configuration
The PC-related settings are configurable.
■ System Settings
SETUP MENU can configure the clock (time and date),
cable compensation and camera title.
Besides these settings, WJ-SX150A Administrator Console
can select the data ports' baud rates.
• Account Manager: WJ-SX150A Administrator Console
operators are registrable and changeable.
• Communication (Serial) port: PC's usable communica-
tion port number and its baud rate (communication
speed) are configurable.
• Clock (Time and date): The unit's time and date are
configurable.
• Cable compensation: Cable compensation type is
selectable depending on the distance between a cam-
era and the unit. It is also possible to determine whether
to send the VD2 timing pulse or control data with the
camera output signals.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WJ-SX150A SETUP MENU (OSD)
The WJ-SX150A SETUP MENU (SETUP MENU) enables
function controls that are not available by direct operation.
Note: Only one operator can enter SETUP MENU.
4. To end the setting and return to the normal view, press
the SETUP button while holding down the SHIFT button
when SETUP MENU is displayed.
The system controller's SETUP indicator will go off.
■ Displaying SETUP MENU
To display SETUP MENU, follow the procedure below.
■ Programming SETUP MENU
1. Confirm that the camera and peripherals are correctly
and securely connected and that all components are
turned on.
As shown in the tree, SETUP MENU has 10 submenus:
TIME & DATE, D. S. T., SEQUENCE, ALARM, CAMERA
TITLE, RECORDER, SYSTEM, OPERATOR REGISTRATION,
MULTIPLEXER, and MUX CAMERA TITLE. The submenus
except TIME & DATE and D. S. T. are divided into addition-
al submenus.
2. To execute the selection, select one of the monitors (1
to 4) by pressing the numeric button, then press the
MON (ESC) button.
The MONITOR indicator will light up.
The (O) mark indicates that the item has a submenu for
more detailed setups.
3. Press the SETUP button while holding down the SHIFT
button on the system controller.
Refer to the figure in p. 65 for the composition of SETUP
MENU.
WJ-SX150A SETUP MENU will appear on the active
monitor as shown below, and the system controller's
SETUP indicator will light up.
The tree of SETUP MENU is shown in the next page.
Note: “x.xx” in SETUP MENU shows the firmware ver-
sion.
* This is the factory default setting.
WJ-SX150A SETUP MENU
x.xx
SETUP
SHIFT
100 TIME&DATE
200 D.S.T.
Aug/21/2002 10:55 AM
ON
300 SEQUENCEO
400 ALARMO
500 CAMERA TITLEO
600 RECORDERO
700 SYSTEMO
800 OPERATOR REGISTRATIONO
900 MULTIPLEXERO
1000 MUX CAMERA TITLEO
The following functions and buttons are valid in SETUP
MENU:
Joystick to UP(D): Moves the cursor up or returns to
the previous page.
Joystick to DOWN(C): Moves the cursor down or dis-
plays the next page.
Joystick to L(A): Moves the cursor to the left.
Joystick to R (B): Moves the cursor to the right.
PREV button: Selects the previous mode or parameter.
NEXT button: Selects the next mode or parameter.
Numeric buttons: Enters numerals.
CLEAR button: Deletes a character when editing a
camera title.
CAM (SET) button: Executes the selections and dis-
plays a submenu for items with the (O) mark.
MON (ESC) button: Returns to SETUP MENU or the
previous menu.
This operating instructions uses the symbols to
describe the buttons.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ TIME & DATE
WJ-SX150A SETUP MENU
x.xx
100 TIME&DATE
200 D.S.T.
Aug/21/2002 10:55 AM
ON
300 SEQUENCEO
400 ALARMO
500 CAMERA TITLEO
600 RECORDERO
700 SYSTEMO
800 OPERATOR REGISTRATIONO
900 MULTIPLEXERO
1000 MUX CAMERA TITLEO
■ How to Display
To display this menu on the monitor, move the cursor to 100
TIME & DATE in SETUP MENU by moving the joystick to D
or C.
■ Parameters
You can move the cursor to each parameter by moving the
joystick to A or B.
• Month
Press the NEXT or PREV button to select the correct month.
• Day
Press the numeric buttons to enter it directly.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WJ-SX150A SETUP MENU
x.xx
300 SEQUENCE
TOUR NO.= 1
STEP LCN PRE DWELL STEP LCN PRE DWELL
1 of 4
420 ALARM EVENT
10 of 10
420 ALARM EVENT
2 of 10
100 TIME&DATE
200 D.S.T.
Aug/21/2002 10:55 AM
ON
420 ALARM EVENT
1 of 10
300 SEQUENCEO
400 ALARMO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2S
2S
2S
2S
2S
2S
2S
2S
9
9
2S
2S
2S
2S
2S
2S
2S
2S
ALM MONMODE
RECALARM PORT
1
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
LCN(PRE)/TOUR
2
500 CAMERA TITLEO
600 RECORDERO
700 SYSTEMO
1
2
1LCN 01PRE01 R0 MASTER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
/
/
3
1LCN 02PRE01R0MASTER
/
/
4
3
1LCN 03PRE01R0MASTER
/
/
5
800 OPERATOR REGISTRATIONO
4
1LCN 04PRE01R0MASTER
/
/
6
5
1LCN 05PRE01R0MASTER
/
/
1
900 MULTIPLEXERO
6
1LCN 06PRE01R0MASTER
/
/
2
1000 MUX CAMERA TITLEO
7
1
LCN 07
/
PRE01 R0 MASTER
/
3
LCN:LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
8
1
LCN 08
PRE01 R0 MASTER
/
/
4
9
1
1
LCN 09PRE01R0MASTER9
/
/
10
LCN 10
PRE01 R0 MASTER
//
10
400 ALARM
Outside the U. S.:
· Aug/21/2002... 21/08/2002
· D. S. T.... SUMMER TIME
LCN:LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
410 ALARM MODE
SEQUENCE
DWELL 2sec
/
420 ALARM EVENTO
ALARM INPUT
440 ALARM INPUT(ALARM PORT)
SWITCHER=SLAVE1(1 of 5)
430
440
450
460
CAMERA
OFF
ALARM PORT
SERIAL PORT
ONO
ON
MUX MOTION DET OFFO
1 NORMALLY OPEN
2 NORMALLY CLOSE
3 NORMALLY OPEN
4 NORMALLY OPEN
5 NORMALLY CLOSE
6 NORMALLY OPEN
7 NORMALLY OPEN
8 NORMALLY OPEN
9 NORMALLY OPEN
10 NORMALLY OPEN
11 NORMALLY OPEN
12 NORMALLY OPEN
13 NORMALLY OPEN
14 NORMALLY OPEN
15 NORMALLY OPEN
16 TIME ADJUST
500 CAMERA TITLE
500 CAMERA TITLE
2 of 2
1 of 2
SWITCHER=MASTER(2 of 2)
CAM LCN TITLE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
-- ---
-- ---
-- ---
710 MASTER-SLAVE
-- ---
17
18
19
20
MASTER
SLAVE1
SLAVE2
SLAVE3
SLAVE4
*.**
ON
*.**
*.**
*.**
*.**
ON
OFF
OFF
LCN:LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
“CAUTION”
600 RECORDER
Part of settings are initialized when
the MASTER-SLAVE composition is changed.
CONTROL
ADR
01
EXT IN
610 MASTER ---
620 SLAVE1 HD100
630 SLAVE2 OFF
640 SLAVE3 VCR
650 SLAVE4 HD500
Is the MASTER-SLAVE changed? NO
GENLOCK OFF
GENLOCK OFF
01
720 LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
SWITCHER=SLAVE1(1 of 4)
--COMMUNICATION STATUS--
DATA BIT
PARITY BIT
STOP BIT
BAUD RATE
COMM PORT
7bit
ODD
CAM LCN
CAM LCN
1bit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
9600bps
SERIAL PORT
LCN:LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
730 COMPENSATION/VD2/DATA
SWITCHER=SLAVE1(1 of 4)
CAM LCN COMP VD2 DATA
1 of 2
700 SYSTEM
710 MASTER-SLAVEO
720 LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBERO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
730 COMPENSATION/VD2/DATAO
740 CAMERA/DATA1-4 PORTO
750 RS485 CAMERAO
760 CAMERA CLEANING
OFF
LCN:LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
800 OPERATOR REGISTRATION
OPERATOR NO.=1
740 CAMERA/DATA1-4 PORT
SWITCHER=SLAVE1(1 of 5)
ID
=150
PRIORITY= 1
PASSWORD
=∗∗∗∗∗
LEVEL
= 1
PORT
MODE
SPEED
CAMERA
DATA1
DATA2
DATA3
DATA4
HDR
CAMERA
CAMERA
CAMERA
CAMERA
MASTER-SLAVE
HDR
19200bps
19200bps
19200bps
19200bps
38400bps
9600bps
SWITCHER=SLAVE1(1 of 5)
CAM LCN CAM LCN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
21 VIEW&CONTROL
22 VIEW ONLY
9
51 VIEW&CONTROL
10 52 VIEW&CONTROL
23 VIEW&CONTROL 11 53 VIEW ONLY
24 VIEW ONLY 12 54 VIEW&CONTROL
25 VIEW&CONTROL 13 55 VIEW&CONTROL
26 VIEW&CONTROL 14 56 VIEW&CONTROL
27 VIEW&CONTROL 15 57 PROHIBITED
28 VIEW&CONTROL 16 58 PROHIBITED
SERIAL
--
38400bps
900 MULTIPLEXER
750 RS485 CAMERA
SWITCHER=SLAVE1(1 of 5)
Ver.∗.∗∗
SWITCHER=SLAVE1(1 of 5)
VCR REC MODE
CAM LCN PORT
CAM LCN PORT
51
910
920
ALARM
EXT.
EXT.
OFF
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
9
NORMAL
10 52
11 53
12 54
13 55
14 56
15 57
16 58
930 DYNAMIC REC
940 DUMMY BLACK
950 CAM SW LOSS
ON
LCN:LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
1000 MUX CAMERA TITLE
SWITCHER=SLAVE1(1 of 3)
CAM LCN TITLE
CAM LCN TITLE
09 C09
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 C01
2 C02
3 C03
4 C04
5 C05
6 C06
7 C07
8 C08
9
10 10 C10
11 11 C11
12 12 C12
13 13 C13
14 14 C14
15 15 C15
16 16 C16
LCN:LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
Depending on the composition of master-slave connection, parameters will differ from the illustration.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
• Year
• The start/end date are configurable through WJ-
SX150A Administrator Console. (Refer to p. 87.)
• When ON is selected for D. S. T., ∗ is added beside the
time display.
Press the numeric button to enter the correct year.
• TIME
Press the numeric button to enter the correct time.
Example: ∗10: 55 AM
• MINUTE
Press the numeric button to enter the correct minute.
■ SEQUENCE SETUP
• AM/PM
Press the NEXT or PREV button to select the correct time.
After the configuration, press the SETUP button while hold-
ing down the SHIFT button. The configuration will be updat-
ed when closing SETUP MENU.
300 SEQUENCE
TOUR NO.= 1
STEP LCN PRE DWELL STEP LCN PRE DWELL
1 of 4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2S
2S
2S
2S
2S
2S
2S
2S
9
9
2S
2S
2S
2S
2S
2S
2S
2S
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
Notes:
• Adjust the time and date when the clock display is differ-
ent from the current one.
• The clock display pattern is changeable with the setting in
WJ-SX150A Administrator Console. (Refer to p. 93.) The
factory default setting is Month/Day/Year.
LCN:LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
• The clock is automatically adjusted to 0 second of the set-
ting time and date when closing SETUP MENU.
• Hour system (12- hours or 24- hours) is changeable
through WJ-SX150A Administrator Console.
300 SEQUENCE
TOUR NO.= 1
2 of 4
STEP LCN PRE DWELL STEP LCN PRE DWELL
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
■ D. S. T. (Daylight Saving Time)
LCN:LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
WJ-SX150A SETUP MENU
x.xx
300 SEQUENCE
TOUR NO.= 1
3 of 4
100 TIME&DATE
200 D.S.T.
Aug/21/2002 10:55 AM
ON
STEP LCN PRE DWELL STEP LCN PRE DWELL
300 SEQUENCEO
400 ALARMO
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
500 CAMERA TITLEO
600 RECORDERO
700 SYSTEMO
800 OPERATOR REGISTRATIONO
900 MULTIPLEXERO
1000 MUX CAMERA TITLEO
LCN:LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
300 SEQUENCE
TOUR NO = 1
4 of 4
■ How to Display
STEP LCN PRE DWELL STEP LCN PRE DWELL
To display this menu on the monitor, move the cursor to 200
D. S. T. in SETUP MENU by moving the joystick to ■ or ■.
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
■ Parameters
Select ON or OFF by pressing the NEXT or PREV buttons.
LCN:LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
ON: Daylight saving time is activated.
OFF: Daylight saving time is deactivated.
■ How to Display
To display this menu on the monitor, move the cursor to 300
SEQUENCE in SETUP MENU by moving the joystick to ■ or
■.
The factory default setting is ON.
Then, press the CAM (SET) button. The submenu appears
on the monitor.
After the configuration, press the SETUP button while hold-
ing down the SHIFT button. The configuration will be updat-
ed when closing SETUP MENU.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Parameters
■ How to Display
Move the joystick to move the cursor.
Press the NEXT or PREV button to select the desired para-
meters.
To display this menu on the monitor, move the cursor to 400
ALARM in SETUP MENU by moving the joystick to ■ or ■.
Then, press the CAM (SET) button. The submenu appears
on the monitor.
Press the numeric button(s) to enter a number.
TOUR NO: Press the NEXT or PREV button to select the
tour number. Or press the numeric button(s) to
enter a number.
STEP: This stands for a tour sequence step.
LCN: This stands for a logical camera number. 01 to 99
or “- -“ is selectable. * To deactivate a sequence
step, select “- -“. You can set “- -“ by pressing the
button 0.
■ Parameters
Move the joystick to move the cursor.
Press the NEXT or PREV button to select the desired para-
meters.
Press the numeric button(s) to enter a number.
• ALARM MODE
The factory default setting is assigned to each step
in numerical order (STEP 1 = LCN 1, STEP 2 = LCN
2, STEP 3 = LCN 3, STEP 4 = LCN 4, STEP 5 = LCN
5…)
You can select an operation mode when alarm input signals
are accepted by the unit.
PRE: This stands for a camera’s preset position num-
ber. 1 to 64 or "- -" is selectable. When the camera
has no preset position, select "- -". You can set "- -"
by pressing the button 0.
Notes:
• The alarm mode is activated when alarm input signals
are assigned to the same monitor through 420 ALARM
EVENT or the Alarm Event (refer to pp. 67 and 68/
pp. 89 and 90) window.
The factory default setting is "- -".
DWELL: This stands for the dwell time. 1 second to 30
seconds is selectable. To delete the sequence
step, select “- -“. You can set “- -“ by pressing the
button 0.
• While alarm is activated, you cannot operate the func-
tions related to the Multiplexer board.
SEQUENCE: An alarm operation is replaced by anoth-
er one after the dwell time (DWELL) ends.
The factory default setting is 2S for each step.
HOLD: An initial alarm operation is continued even after
another alarm input is accepted.
OFF: Select this when not using the alarm mode.
After the configuration, press the MON (ESC) button. The
monitor display will return to the previous menu.
After all the configurations, press the SETUP button while
holding down the SHIFT button. The configuration will be
updated when closing SETUP MENU.
The factory default setting is SEQUENCE.
• DWELL
This stands for the dwell time of a sequence during an
alarm mode.
1 to 30 seconds are selectable.
Notes:
• A preset position number is available only when a com-
bination camera is selected for CAM.
• The available preset position numbers differ among
cameras. Refer to each camera's operating instruc-
tions.
The factory default setting is 2 seconds.
• ALARM EVENT
This item is configurable in 420 ALARM EVENT.
Move the cursor and press the CAM (SET) button.
420 ALARM EVENT will appear on the monitor.
■ ALARM SETUP
420 ALARM EVENT
ALM MON MODE
1 of 10
REC ALARM PORT
400 ALARM
LCN(PRE)/TOUR
410 ALARM MODE
420 ALARM EVENT
ALARM INPUT
430
440
450
460
SEQUENCE
DWELL 2sec
/
1 1
2 1
3 1
4 1
5 1
6 1
7 1
8 1
9 1
10 1
LCN 01
PRE01 R0 MASTER
1
2
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
LCN 02
LCN 03
LCN 04
LCN 05
LCN 06
LCN 07
LCN 08
LCN 09
LCN 10
PRE01 R0 MASTER
PRE01 R0 MASTER
PRE01 R0 MASTER
PRE01 R0 MASTER
PRE01 R0 MASTER
PRE01 R0 MASTER
PRE01 R0 MASTER
PRE01 R0 MASTER
PRE01 R0 MASTER
3
CAMERA
OFF
4
ALARM PORT
SERIAL PORT
ONO
5
ON
6
MUX MOTION DET OFFO
7
8
9
10
LCN:LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
420 ALARM EVENT
ALM MON MODE
2 of 10
REC ALARM PORT
• MODE and LCN(PRE/TOUR) cannot be selected by
pressing the numeric buttons. Press the NEXT or PREV
button for selection.
• PRE doesn’t appear when TOUR 1 to 16 is selected for
MODE.
LCN(PRE)/TOUR
11 1
12 1
13 1
14 1
15 1
16 1
17 1
18 1
19 1
20 1
LCN 11
PRE01 R0 MASTER
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
LCN 12
LCN 13
LCN 14
LCN 15
LCN 16
LCN 17
LCN 18
LCN 19
LCN 20
PRE01 R0 MASTER
PRE01 R0 MASTER
PRE01 R0 MASTER
PRE01 R0 MASTER
PRE01 R0 MASTER
PRE01 R2 SLAVE1
PRE01 R2 SLAVE1
PRE01 R2 SLAVE1
PRE01 R2 SLAVE1
• When selecting a camera without the preset position
function, select "- -" for PRE.
2
3
4
• When moving the joystick to ■ at the bottom of ALARM
EVENT 1 of 10, the monitor will display 2 of 10 (the next
page).
• When moving the joystick to ■ at the top of ALARM
EVENT 2 of 10, the monitor will display 1 of 10 (the pre-
vious page).
• Each ALARM PORT can be assigned to only one alarm
number. If you enter the same ALARM PORT more than
one time, the newer will be activated and the older will
be changed to a space.
• An alarm event will be activated even if the selected
logical camera number is not assigned to any camera
channel.
In this case, black image and “NOT ASSIGN” will be
displayed on the monitor.
• Set the parameter of a port number area by pressing
the numeric button(s).
• If you press the NEXT or PREV button at a port pin num-
ber area, the parameter will be switched among a
space and ALARM PORT not assigned to other alarm
events.
LCN:LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
420 ALARM EVENT
ALM MON MODE
10 of 10
REC ALARM PORT
LCN(PRE)/TOUR
91 1
92 1
93 1
94 1
95 1
96 1
97 1
98 1
99 1
LCN 91
LCN 92
LCN 93
LCN 94
LCN 95
LCN 96
LCN 97
LCN 98
LCN 99
PRE01
PRE01
PRE01
PRE01
PRE01
PRE01
PRE01
PRE01
PRE01
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
LCN:LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
ALM: This stands for the alarm event number.
MON: This stands for the monitor number.
MODE: This stands for the preset position of a camera
or tour sequence number activated with an alarm
input signal.
• LCN(PRE)/TOUR: Activates a spot camera or tour
sequence with an alarm input. To activate a spot
camera, select LCN nn (nn is a logical camera num-
ber: 01 to 99). To activate a tour sequence, select
TUR nn (nn is a tour number: 01 to 32).
When you selected a combination camera for LCN
nn, enter the desired preset position number. PRE
01 to 64 is available. When you selected another
type of camera, select “-“.
After the configuration, press the MON (ESC) button. The
monitor display returns to ALARM SETUP.
• ALARM INPUT
REC: This stands for a recorder activated with an alarm
input signal. If no recorder is activated, the parame-
ter will be a space. The REC area displays the num-
ber of recorder which receives images from a cam-
era whose logical camera number is correspondent
with the alarm event number.
430 CAMERA
This stands for that an alarm input is accepted via the
CAMERA IN connectors or the RS-485 ports.
ON: The alarm-associated sequence/spot image is dis-
played on a monitor, and alarm recording will start
(if a recorder is connected to the unit).
REC ONLY: Only alarm recording will start and moni-
tors will keep displaying the current sequence/spot
images.
R0 to R4 shows the following.
Recorder number
Recorder
R0
R1
R2
R3
R4
Master recorder
Slave 1 recorder
Slave 2 recorder
Slave 3 recorder
Slave 4 recorder
Note: You cannot recover alarm-related operations
from system controllers when REC ONLY is
selected.
OFF: An alarm input is accepted neither via the CAM-
ERA IN connectors nor the RS-485 ports.
Note: If a WJ-HD200 Series recorder is connected to
CAM 1 to 8, recorder number will be displayed
even camera channels (CAM 9 to 16) not connect-
ed to the recorder.
The factory default setting is OFF.
440 ALARM PORT
This stands for that an alarm input is accepted via the
ALARM port (25-pin D-sub connector at the rear panel).
ON: The alarm-associated sequence/spot image is dis-
played on a monitor, and alarm recording will start
(if a recorder is connected to the unit.)
ALARM PORT: When an alarm port pin set here
receives an input signal, the designated event is
activated. MASTER, SLAVE 1 to 4 is available for
the matrix switcher. 1 to 16 is available for the alarm
port number. To deactivate the alarm number,
press the button 0. ALARM PORT will be a space.
The factory default setting is same as the illustrations.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REC ONLY: Only alarm recording will start and moni-
tors will keep displaying the current sequence/spot
images.
Note: You cannot recover alarm-related operations
from system controllers when REC ONLY is
selected.
Note: You cannot recover alarm-related operations
from system controllers when REC ONLY is
selected.
OFF: An alarm input is not accepted via the SERIAL
port.
OFF: An alarm input is not accepted via the ALARM
port.
The factory default setting is ON.
MUX
460 MUX MOTION DET
The factory default setting is ON.
This stands for that the unit’s motion detector is activated
when a camera detects the brightness-level change and
transmit an alarm signal.
Each alarm input's polarity is configurable in the submenu.
Set ALARM PORT to ON or REC ONLY, and press the CAM
(SET) button.
440 ALARM INPUT (ALARM PORT) will appear on the moni-
tor.
ON: The alarm-associated sequence/spot image is dis-
played on a monitor, and alarm recording will start
(if a recorder is connected to the unit.)
REC ONLY: Only alarm recording will start and moni-
tors will keep displaying the current sequence/spot
images.
440 ALARM INPUT(ALARM PORT)
SWITCHER=SLAVE1(1 of 5)
Notes:
1 NORMALLY OPEN
2 NORMALLY CLOSE
3 NORMALLY OPEN
4 NORMALLY OPEN
5 NORMALLY CLOSE
6 NORMALLY OPEN
7 NORMALLY OPEN
8 NORMALLY OPEN
9 NORMALLY OPEN
10 NORMALLY OPEN
11 NORMALLY OPEN
12 NORMALLY OPEN
13 NORMALLY OPEN
14 NORMALLY OPEN
15 NORMALLY OPEN
16 TIME ADJUST
• If the Multiplexer board is not installed in the
unit, you cannot enter the submenu of 460 MUX
MOTION DET.
• You cannot recover alarm-related operations
from system controllers when REC ONLY is
selected.
OFF: An alarm input is not accepted by the motion
detector.
Move the cursor and press the CAM (SET) button to go into
the menu.
To configure where to activate the motion detector, set
MUX MOTION DET to ON or REC ONLY, and press the
CAM (SET) button. The live image will be displayed.
Up to 4 motion-detection areas are configured for each
camera channel.
SWITCHER: Select a unit (SLAVE1 to 4 and MASTER*)
to configure the parameters.
* In normal connection, only MASTER is displayed.
After designating the unit, select the desired polarity for
ALARM 1 to 16.
Note: Black image will be displayed on the monitor if
the currently selected channel has no camera con-
nection.
NORMALLY OPEN: Normally Open contact is activat-
ed for the alarm input signal.
A “+” mark appears at the center of the monitor.
NORMALLY CLOSE: Normally Close contact is activat-
ed for the alarm input signal.
Logical camera number and sensitivity
TIME ADJUST: This polarity enables the input of the
time adjusting signal.
C01 LOW
The factory default setting is N. O.
+
Mark
Note: In the master-slave connection, time setting of
every unit can be synchronized when the time
adjusting signal is input to any unit.
450 SERIAL PORT
This stands for that an alarm input is accepted via the SERI-
AL port.
The following is the setting procedure.
ON: The alarm-associated sequence/spot image is dis-
played on a monitor, and alarm recording will start
(if a recorder is connected to the unit.)
REC ONLY: Only alarm recording will start and moni-
tors will keep displaying the current sequence/spot
images.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Move the cursor with the joystick to the desired area,
and then press the CAM (SET) key. Setting point 1 is
determined.
Notes:
• If you repeat Step 1 after setting 4 motion-detection
areas, “NG” will blink at the center of the monitor for
two seconds.
Note: If you control the joystick while holding down the
• To reset a motion-detection area, move the “+”
mark on the desired area. Then, press the CLEAR
button. The area will be reset.
SHIFT button, the cursor will move by 10 steps.
• If an area overlaps another one, the newer area will
be reset.
C01 LOW
5. To configure the motion-detection areas of another
camera channel, press the NEXT or PREV button.
+
6. Repeat Step 1 to 4.
Notes:
• If you press the CLEAR button while holding down the
SHIFT button, all the motion-detection areas of the cam-
era channel will be cleared.
C01 LOW
• Depending on the sensitivity level, a motion-detection
area needs the following area sizes.
+
Sensitivity
LOW
Area size
Setting point
17 x 17 steps or more
12 x 12 steps or more
5 x 5 steps or more
MID
HIGH
Logical camera number and sensitivity level will move
when a cursor points here. (The default position is
here.)
You can change the sensitivity level in WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console (Refer to p. 89.) The factory default
setting is LOW.
2. Move the “+” mark to the desired area, and then press
the CAM (SET) key. Setting point 2 is determined and
the “+” mark will disappear. Then, the mark will appear
again at the center of the monitor. The square, covered
with Setting point 1 and 2, is showing the motion-detec-
tion area.
After the configuration, press the MON (ESC) button. The
motion-detection setting will be memorized and the monitor
display will return to the previous menu.
After all the configurations, press the SETUP button while
holding down the SHIFT button. The configuration will be
updated when closing SETUP MENU.
Note: White images will be displayed in the square if the
currently selected channel has no camera connection.
C01 LOW
Setting point 2
+
Setting point 1
3. To configure more motion-detection area, repeat Step 1
and 2.
4. To set the motion-detection area of another camera,
press the NEXT or PREV button. Then, select the
desired logical camera number. The live image of the
selected camera will be displayed.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. After the configuration, press the MON (ESC) button.
The monitor display will return to the previous menu.
■ CAMERA TITLE
After all the configurations, press the SETUP button while
holding down the SHIFT button. The configuration will be
updated when closing SETUP MENU.
500 CAMERA TITLE
1 of 2
SWITCHER=MASTER(2 of 2)
CAM LCN TITLE
1 -- ---
2 -- ---
3 -- ---
4 -- ---
5 17
Notes:
• When moving the joystick to ■ at the bottom of CAM-
ERA TITLE 1 of 2, the monitor will display 2 of 2 (the
next page).
• When moving the joystick to ■ at the top of CAMERA
TITLE 2 of 2, the monitor will display 1 of 2 (the previous
page).
6 18
7 19
8 20
LCN:LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
500 CAMERA TITLE
2 of 2
SWITCHER=MASTER(2 of 2)
• Original characters
are configurable through WJ-
CAM LCN TITLE
9 21
SX150A Administrator Console, but they are not dis-
played correctly in SETUP MENU. They are displayed
as ■. (Refer to p. 95 Edit Font window.)
• The titles of the camera channels deactivated by the
master-slave connection are displayed as “- - -“.
10 22
11 23
12 24
13 25
14 26
15 27
16 28
LCN:LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
■ RECORDER
■ How to Display
To display this menu on the monitor, move the cursor to 500
CAMERA TITLE in SETUP MENU by moving the joystick to
■ or ■. Then, press the CAM (SET) button. The submenu
appears on the monitor.
600 RECORDER
CONTROL
610 MASTER ---
620 SLAVE1 HD100
630 SLAVE2 OFF
640 SLAVE3 VCR
650 SLAVE4 HD500
ADR
01
EXT IN
GENLOCK OFF
GENLOCK OFF
01
--COMMUNICATION STATUS--
DATA BIT
PARITY BIT
STOP BIT
BAUD RATE
COMM PORT
7bit
■ How to edit
Move the joystick to move the cursor.
To select parameters, press the PREV or NEXT button.
SWITCHER: Select a unit (SLAVE1 to 4 and MASTER*)
to configure the parameters.
ODD
1bit
9600bps
SERIAL PORT
■ How to Display
* In normal connection, only MASTER is displayed.
CAM: This stands for a camera channel of the unit.
LCN: This stands for a logical camera number. 1 to 99
is selectable.
TITLE: A camera title is composed of up to 20 charac-
ters. Each camera number is fixed and the subse-
quent 20 characters are editable.
To display this menu on the monitor, move the cursor to 600
RECORDER in SETUP MENU by moving the joystick to D
or C. Then, press the CAM (SET) button. The submenu will
appear on the monitor.
■ Parameters
Move the joystick to move the cursor.
Press the NEXT or PREV button to select the desired para-
meters.
The characters available here are the following:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrs
tuvwxyz0123456789!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;=?•_(space)
Press the numeric button(s) to enter a number.
The factory default settings are same as the illustrations.
• 610 MASTER/620 SLAVE1/630 SLAVE 2/640
SLAVE 3/650 SLAVE 4
1. Edit the camera titles by pressing the NEXT or PREV
buttons.
This stands for the type of units connected in the sys-
tem.
The NEXT button toggles these characters in this order.
The PREV button toggles these characters in a reverse
order.
CONTROL: This stands for the recorder connected to
each unit. The selectable parameters will differ
depending on whether a Multiplexer board is
installed in the unit.
Joystick and the CLEAR button are also usable for the
edit. (Refer to p. 63 Displaying SETUP MENU for each
use.)
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Without the Multiplexer board
When a time-lapse VCR is connected
DATA BIT: 7 bit
HD500: Select this when a WJ-HD500 Series recorder
is connected to the unit.
PARITY BIT: ODD
HD200: Select this when a WJ-HD200 Series recorder
is connected to the unit.
OFF: Select this when no recorder is connected to the
unit.
STOP BIT: 1 bit
BAUD RATE: 9600 bps
COMM PORT: SERIAL PORT
Notes:
The factory default setting is HD500.
• 620 SLAVE1, 630 SLAVE 2, 640 SLAVE 3, and 650
SLAVE 4 appear only when they are connected.
• When Slave 1 to 4 are connected in the system, “---“ is
displayed for CONTROL of 610 MASTER.
• If GENLOCK ON is selected, the playback images or
multiscreen display cannot be displayed on Monitor 1
to 4. Confirm the images on the monitor which are con-
nected to the recorder.
With the Multiplexer board
VCR: Select this when a time-lapse VCR (Panasonic
model) is connected to the unit.
HD100: Select this when a WJ-HD100 Series recorder
is connected to the unit.
OFF: Select this when
a
time-lapse VCR (non-
Panasonic model) or no recorder is connected.
• If GENLOCK OFF is selected, the maximum rate
recording becomes unavailable (when a WJ-HD500
Series recorder is connected to the unit).
The factory default setting is OFF.
• Gen-lock is not activated for the Slave 1 to 4 units when
the Multiplexer board is installed in them.
Notes:
• If HD500 or HD200 is selected for the unit with the Mul-
tiplexer board, the parameter will be set to OFF.
• If VCR or HD100 is selected for the unit without the Mul-
tiplexer board, the parameter will be set to HD500.
■ SYSTEM SETUP
ADR: This stands for the recorder’s unit address. When
a digital disk recorder is connected to the unit, 1 to
99 is available. When a time-lapse VCR is connect-
ed, this parameter is not displayed.
700 SYSTEM
710 MASTER-SLAVEO
720 LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBERO
730 COMPENSATION/VD2/DATAO
740 CAMERA/DATA1-4 PORTO
750 RS485 CAMERAO
EXT IN:
760 CAMERA CLEANING
OFF
This stands for the setting of the EXT IN connector at
the unit’s rear panel. When the Multiplexer board is
installed in the Master unit, this parameter for MASTER
does not appear.
GENLOCK ON: Select this mode if you gen-lock
the unit with an external device.
GENLOCK OFF: Select this mode if you connect
the video output connector of the recorder to
the EXT IN connector of the unit.
■ How to Display
To display this menu on the monitor, move the cursor to 700
SYSTEM in SETUP MENU by moving the joystick to ■ or ■.
Then, press the CAM (SET) button. The submenu appears
on the monitor.
The factory default setting is OFF.
The factory default setting is same as the illustration.
■ Parameters
Move the joystick to move the cursor.
Press the NEXT or PREV button to select the desired para-
meters.
• COMMUNICATION STATUS
The following are communication parameters of a digi-
tal disk recorder/time-lapse VCR. The parameters will
differ depending on connected devices.
• MASTER-SLAVE
When a digital disk recorder is connected
DATA BIT: 8 bit
This menu links to the submenu.
Move the cursor and press the CAM (SET) button to go into
the menu.
PARITY BIT: NONE
STOP BIT: 1 bit
BAUD RATE: 9600 bps
COMM PORT: DATA HDR PORT
710 MASTER-SLAVE will appear on the monitor.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
710 MASTER-SLAVE
MASTER
720 LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
SWITCHER=SLAVE2(2 of 4)
*.**
*.**
*.**
*.**
*.**
SLAVE1
SLAVE2
SLAVE3
SLAVE4
ON
CAM LCN
CAM LCN
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
OFF
OFF
“CAUTION”
Part of settings are initialized when
the MASTER-SLAVE composition is changed.
Is the MASTER-SLAVE changed? NO
LCN:LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
SLAVE 1 to 4
720 LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
SWITCHER=SLAVE3(3 of 4)
ON: Select this for units connected in the system.
OFF: Select this for units not connected in the system.
CAM LCN
CAM LCN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
The factory default setting is OFF.
Notes:
• For Slave units, you can set ON only when the unit with
the previous number is set to ON.
LCN:LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
• When you change ON/OFF, part of the setting data will
be initialized according to the master-slave composition
• *. ** is the firmware version of a unit. (For Slave units,
the version is displayed only when ON is selected.)
720 LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
SWITCHER=MASTER(4 of 4)
CAM LCN
CAM LCN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
--
--
--
--
49
50
51
52
Is the MASTER-SLAVE changed?
YES: Select this if you agree that the master-slave com-
position will be changed.
NO: Select this if you do not agree that the master-slave
composition will be changed.
LCN:LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
This message appears only when you try to change
ON/OFF of SLAVE1 to 4.
Move the joystick to move the cursor.
• To change the setting, select “YES” and press the SET
button. SETUP MENU will be closed, but the setting will
be activated.
To select parameters, press the PREV or NEXT button.
SWITCHER: Select a unit (SLAVE1 to 4 and MASTER*) to
configure the parameters
• To cancel the setting, select “NO”. The message will
disappear and the cursor moves to the former position.
* In normal connection, only MASTER is displayed.
CAM: This stands for a camera channel of the unit.
LCN: This stands for a logical camera number. 1 to 99 is
selectable.
After the configuration, press the MON (ESC) button. The
monitor display returns to the previous menu.
The factory default settings are shown in the diagrams.
• LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
When only Master is connected
This menu links to the submenu.
Move the cursor and press the CAM (SET) button to go into
the menu. 720 LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER will appear on
the monitor.
CAM
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Master
When Master and Slave 1 are connected
CAM
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
720 LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
SWITCHER=SLAVE1(1 of 4)
Slave 1
Master - - - - - - - - 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
CAM LCN
CAM LCN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
When Master, Slave 1 and 2 are connected
CAM
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Slave 1
Slave 1 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Master - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
LCN:LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When Master, Slave 1 to 3 are connected
SWITCHER: Select a unit (SLAVE1 to 4 and MASTER*) to
configure the parameters.
* In normal connection, only MASTER is displayed.
CAM: This stands for a camera channel of the unit.
LCN: This stands for a logical camera number. 1 to 99 is
selectable.
CAM
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Slave 1
Slave 2 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Slave 3 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Master - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 49 50 51 52
COMP: This stands for cable compensation. Select the
desired setting according to the cable length.
When Master, Slave 1 to 4 are connected
S: Less than 400 m (1 300 ft)
M: 400 m (1 300 ft) to 700 m (2 300 ft)
L: 700 m (2 300 ft) to 900 m (3 000 ft)
CAM
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Slave 1
Slave 2 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Slave 3 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Slave 4 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
Master - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Refer to p. 36 for available cables.
The factory default setting is S.
VD2: To send the VD2 timing pulse with the camera output
signal, select ON. Not to send the VD2 timing pulse with
the camera output signal, select OFF. The factory
default setting is ON.
DATA: To send the control data with the camera output sig-
nal, select ON. Not to send the control data with the
camera output signal, select OFF. The factory default
setting is ON.
Notes:
• When you select logical camera numbers, the setting
will be automatically activated in other menus.
• Camera channels of the Master unit which connect
Slave units are displayed as a space. You cannot con-
figure the parameters.
• You can select a logical camera number for only one
channel. When you enter the same number second
time, the newer is activated, but the older will be
changed to a space.
* The available camera numbers will differ depending on
the total number of matrix switchers.
Notes:
• COMPENSATION/VD2/DATA
• When moving the joystick to ■ at the bottom of COM-
PENSATION/VD2/DATA, the monitor will display 2 of 2.
• When moving the joystick to ■ at the bottom of COM-
PENSATION/VD2/DATA, the monitor will display 1 of 2.
• Camera channels of the Master unit which connect
Slave units are displayed as a space. You cannot con-
figure the parameters.
This menu links to the submenu.
Move the cursor and press the CAM (SET) button to go into
the menu.
730 COMPENSATION/VD2/DATA will appear on the moni-
tor.
730 COMPENSATION/VD2/DATA
SWITCHER=SLAVE1(1 of 4)
CAM LCN COMP VD2 DATA
1 of 2
• CAMERA/DATA1 – 4 PORT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 S
2 S
3 S
4 S
5 S
6 S
7 S
8 S
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
This menu links to the submenu.
Move the cursor and press the CAM (SET) button to go into
the menu.
740 CAMERA/DATA1-4 PORT will appear on the monitor.
LCN:LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
740 CAMERA/DATA1-4PORT
SWITCHER=MASTER(1of1)
PORTMODE
SPEED
CAMERACAMERA
DATA1TERMINAL-K1
DATA2TERMINAL-K2
DATA3TERMINAL-K3
19200bps
9600bps
9600bps
9600bps
730 COMPENSATION/VD2/DATA
SWITCHER=SLAVE1(1 of 4)
CAM LCN COMP VD2 DATA
2 of 2
DATA4PS-DATA9600bps
HDR
HDR
9600bps
38400bps
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
9 S
10 S
11 S
12 S
13 S
14 S
15 S
16 S
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SERIALPC
Setting for normal connection
LCN:LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
740 CAMERA/DATA1-4 PORT
SWITCHER=MASTER(5 of 5)
Master
Slave 1
to 4
Port
Normal connection
Master-slave connection
PORT
MODE
SPEED
TERMINAL-K1/K2/
K3/K4
CAMERA
TERMINAL-K1/K2/
K3/K4
CAMERA
TERMINAL-K1/K2/
K3/K4
CAMERA
CAMERA
DATA1
DATA2
DATA3
DATA4
HDR
TERMINAL-K1
TERMINAL-K2
TERMINAL-K3
MASTER-SLAVE
PS-DATA
9600bps
9600bps
9600bps
38400bps
9600bps
9600bps
CAMERA CAMERA
TERMINAL-K1/K2/
CAMERA
CAMERA
CAMERA
CAMERA
HDR
DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA 3
K3/K4
CAMERA
TERMINAL-K1/K2/
K3/K4
CAMERA
TERMINAL-K1/K2/
K3/K4
CAMERA
SERIAL
PC
38400bps
Master unit setting for Master-Slave connection
MASTER-SLAVE
740 CAMERA/DATA1-4 PORT
SWITCHER=SLAVE1(1 of 5)
TERMINAL-K1/K2/
K3/K4
TERMINAL-K1/K2/
K3/K4
MASTER-
SLAVE
DATA 4
HDR
·
·
PS DATA
PS DATA
PORT
MODE
SPEED
HDR
PC
HDR
PC
HDR
– – –
VCR
CAMERA
DATA1
DATA2
DATA3
DATA4
HDR
CAMERA
CAMERA
CAMERA
CAMERA
MASTER-SLAVE
HDR
19200bps
19200bps
19200bps
19200bps
38400bps
9600bps
SERIAL
VCR
VCR
SERIAL
--
38400bps
The factory default setting is same as the illustration.
SPEED: This stands for the communication speed of a port.
38400 bps*: Select this to set the speed to 38400 bps.
19200 bps: Select this to set the speed to 19200 bps.
9600 bps: Select this to set the speed to 9600 bps.
4800 bps: Select this to set the speed to 4800 bps.
* This parameter is available only for SERIAL.
Slave unit setting for Master-Slave connection
SWITCHER: Select a unit (SLAVE1 to 4 and MASTER*) to
configure the parameters.
* In normal connection, only MASTER is displayed.
The factory default setting is same as the illustration.
The factory default setting is same as the illustration.
Notes:
PORT: This stands for the type of a port.
CAMERA: RS-485 Camera port
DATA 1/2/3/4: DATA 1/2/3/4 ports
HDR: DATA HDR port
• If the DATA 4 is set to PS·DATA, SPEED of PS·DATA will
be changed in conjunction with that of HDR.
• When you change MODE, the default communication
speed is automatically set. The SERIAL port is set to the
default speed when CONTROL is changed in 600
RECORDER. (Refer to p. 71.)
SERIAL: SERIAL port
MODE: This stands for the operation mode of a port.
CAMERA: Select this if a camera is connected.
TERMINAL-K1/K2/K3/K4: Select this if a terminal-mode
system controller is connected.
The default communication speeds are shown in the dia-
gram.
PS·DATA: Select this if a PS·DATA system controller is
connected.
MODE
CAMERA
TERMINAL
PS·DATA
HDR
Factory default setting
19200 bps
MASTER-SLAVE: The port used for the master-slave
connection is fixed to this parameter.
HDR: The HDR port is fixed to this parameter.
PC: WJ-SX150A Administrator Console configuration
and firmware update becomes available with a PC
connection.
9600 bps
9600 bps
9600 bps
38400 bps
PC
VCR (VTR)
9600 bps
VCR: Select this if a time-lapse VCR (Panasonic model)
is connected.
– – –: This port is unusable.
The following are MODE parameters assigned to
each port.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• RS485 CAMERA
■ OPERATOR REGISTRATION
This menu links to the submenu.
Move the cursor and press the CAM (SET) button to go into
the menu. 750 RS485 CAMERA will appear on the monitor.
800 OPERATOR REGISTRATION
OPERATOR NO.=1
ID
=150
PRIORITY= 1
LEVEL = 1
PASSWORD
=∗∗∗∗∗
750 RS485 CAMERA
SWITCHER=SLAVE(1 of 5)
CAM LCN CAM LCN
1 21 VIEW&CONTROL 9 51 VIEW&CONTROL
2 22 VIEW ONLY 10 52 VIEW&CONTROL
3 23 VIEW&CONTROL 11 53 VIEW ONLY
4 24 VIEW ONLY 12 54 VIEW&CONTROL
5 25 VIEW&CONTROL 13 55 VIEW&CONTROL
6 26 VIEW&CONTROL 14 56 VIEW&CONTROL
7 27 VIEW&CONTROL 15 57 PROHIBITED
8 28 VIEW&CONTROL 16 58 PROHIBITED
SWITCHER=SLAVE1(1 of 5)
CAM LCN PORT
1 21
CAM LCN PORT
9 51
2 22
10 52
11 53
12 54
13 55
14 56
15 57
16 58
3 23
4 24
5 25
6 26
7 27
8 28
LCN:LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
■ How to Display
To display this menu on the monitor, move the cursor to
800 OPERATOR REGISTRATION in SETUP MENU by mov-
ing the joystick to ■.Then, press the CAM (SET) button. The
submenu appears on the monitor.
SWITCHER: Select a unit (SLAVE1 to 4 and MASTER*)
to configure the parameters.
* In normal connection, only MASTER is displayed.
CAM: This stands for a camera channel of the unit.
LCN: This stands for a logical camera number.
PORT: This stands for a port which connects the cam-
era.
■ Parameters
Move the joystick to move the cursor.
Press the NEXT or PREV button to select the desired para-
meters.
RS485: Select this when the camera is connected
to the RS-485 camera port.
Press the numeric button(s) to enter a number.
DATA1/2/3: Select this when the camera is con-
nected to the DATA 1/2/3 port.
• OPERATOR NO.
This stands for an operator number. When you enter the
number by pressing the NEXT, PREV or numeric button(s),
this menu will display the associated operator's information.
1 to 16 is available.
You can select the parameters only for the ports whose
mode is set to “CAMERA” in 740 CAMERA/DATA1-4 PORT.
(Refer to pp.74 and 75.) If the mode is set to others, a
space will be displayed for PORT.
• ID
Notes:
This stands for an operator ID. 1 to 99999 is available.
• If five (Master and Slave 1 to 4) units are connected in
the system, you can configure no parameters for MAS-
TER.
• If the mode is changed to “TERMINAL-K1/2/3/4” in 740
CAMERA/DATA1-4 PORT, the PORT parameters will be
deactivated even after set to RS485 or DATA1/2/3.
• PASSWORD
This stands for an operator's password. 1 to 99999 is avail-
able. The password will be displayed as "∗∗∗∗∗" on the
monitor.
• PRIORITY
• CAMERA CLEANING
This stands for an operator's priority. 1 to 16 is available.
(Refer to p. 15 for details on Priority Lock.)
ON: Activates the manual cleaning for the cameras.
OFF: Deactivates the manual cleaning.
When you set CAMERA CLEANING to ON and exit from the
SETUP MENU, camera cleaning will start.
The factory default setting is OFF.
• LEVEL
This stands for an operator's restrict level. It is configurable
through Level Table (refer to p. 91) of WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console what kind of restriction is given to the
operator. 1 to 3 is available.
Notes:
• When the camera cleaning is active, cleaning will begin
from CAM 1 in numerical order.
SWITCHER: Select a unit (SLAVE1 to 4 and MASTER*)
to configure the parameters.
* In normal connection, only MASTER is displayed.
CAM: This stands for a camera channel of the unit.
LCN: This stands for a logical camera number. 1 to 99
is selectable.
• Surveillance is impossible during the cleaning.
• The cleaning cannot be stopped after it is started.
• Refer to pp. 37 and 38 for details on RS-485 connec-
tions.
• The camera address needs to be corresponding with
the camera number.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• CAM 01 to 16:
MUX
■ MULTIPLEXER
These stand for an operator's camera operation coverage.
The following are the parameters.
900 MULTIPLEXER
SWITCHER=SLAVE1(1 of 5)
Ver.∗.∗∗
VIEW & CONTROL: The operator can display the cam-
era image on the monitor and control panning/tilt-
ing.
VIEW ONLY: The operator can display the camera
image on the monitor, but cannot control the pan-
ning/tilting.
VCR REC MODE
910
920
ALARM
EXT.
EXT.
OFF
ON
NORMAL
930 DYNAMIC REC
940 DUMMY BLACK
950 CAM SW LOSS
ON
PROHIBITED: The operator can neither display the
camera image on the monitor nor control the pan-
ning/tilting.
900 MULTIPLEXER
The following is the factory default setting of this menu.
SWITCHER=MASTER(5 of 5)
Ver.∗.∗∗
VCR REC MODE
910
920
ALARM
---
OPERATOR NO.
ID
150
1
100
101
102
103
PASSWORD
150
LEVEL PRIORITY
NORMAL
---
---
---
---
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
930 DYNAMIC REC
940 DUMMY BLACK
950 CAM SW LOSS
12345
100
101
102
103
CAM 1 to 16 = VIEW & CONTROL (for OPERATOR NO. 1 to
6)
■ How to Display
To display this menu on the monitor, move the cursor to 900
MULTIPLEXER in SETUP MENU by moving the joystick to
D or C. Then, press the CAM (SET) button. The submenu
appears on the monitor.
Note: When you enter an invalid number, the parameter will
return to the state before your numerical entry.
■ Parameters
Move the joystick to move the cursor.
Press the NEXT or PREV button to select the desired para-
meters.
SWITCHER: Select a unit (SLAVE1 to 4 and MASTER*) to
configure the parameters.
* In normal connection, only MASTER is displayed.
Ver. ∗. ∗∗: Firmware version of a Multiplexer board
• ALARM
EXT.: Select this to gen-lock the unit with the recorder
when an alarm is input to the unit.
002,004 to 128 (field): Select one of these alarm
recording rates if the asynchronous unit is connect-
ed to the unit.
The factory default setting is EXT.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• NORMAL
MUX
■ MUX CAMERA TITLE
EXT.: Select this to gen-lock the unit during the normal
operation.
1000 MUX CAMERA TITLE
SWITCHER=SLAVE1(1 of 3)
002,004 to 255 (field): Select one of these normal
recording rates if the asynchronous unit is connect-
ed to the unit.
CAM LCN TITLE
CAM LCN TITLE
9 09 C09
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 C01
2 C02
3 C03
4 C04
5 C05
6 C06
7 C07
8 C08
10 10 C10
11 11 C11
12 12 C12
13 13 C13
14 14 C14
15 15 C15
16 16 C16
The factory default setting is EXT.
• DYNAMIC REC
LCN:LOGICAL CAMERA NUMBER
PRI.: Select this to give recording priority to the camera
channel with the alarm input.
ONLY: Select this to record the images from the alarm-
associated camera channel.
GROUP: Select this to give recording priority to a group
of up to 4 camera channels associated to the alarm
input.
■ How to Display
To display this menu on the monitor, move the cursor to
1000 MUX CAMERA TITLE in SETUP MENU by moving the
joystick to D or C. Then, press the CAM (SET) button. The
submenu appears on the monitor.
OFF: Select this to deactivate the alarm priority mode.
The factory default setting is OFF.
• DUMMY BLACK
■ How to edit
The factory default settings are same as the illustration.
The editing procedure is the same as 500 CAMERA TITLE.
(Refer to p. 71.)
ON: Select this to display the black picture for a camera
channel that is not connected to the camera.
OFF: Select this to skip the camera channels that are
not connected to the camera in the sequence/spot
mode.
Notes:
The factory default setting is ON.
• Up to 8 alphanumeric characters are available for
each Multiplexer board camera title.
• When moving the joystick to D at the last text box
of CAM 8 TITLE, the cursor will move to the first text
box of CAM 9 TITLE.
• When moving the joystick to C at the first text box
of CAM 9 TITLE, the cursor will move to the last text
box of CAM 8 TITLE.
• If five units are connected in the system, you can
configure no parameters for MASTER.
• CAM SW LOSS
ON: Select this to make “CAMSW LOSS R∗” light up on
the associated monitor when loss of the camera
switching pulse is detected.
OFF: Select this not to make “CAMSW LOSS R∗”
appear on the associated monitor when loss of the
camera switching pulse is detected.
The factory default setting is ON.
Note: If EXT. is selected for 910 ALARM/920 NORMAL,
the playback images cannot be displayed on the
monitors which are not connected to the EXT IN
connector. Confirm the images on those which are
connected to the recorder.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WJ-SX150A ADMINISTRATOR CONSOLE
Trademarks
■ Description of WJ-SX150A
• IBM is a trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation.
Administrator Console
• Intel and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation.
• Microsoft® Windows® are either registered trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
• VD2 is the original synchronization system of
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
WJ-SX150A Administrator Console is a utility software
which can configure the system settings and control data of
this surveillance system.
WJ-SX150A Administrator Console can configure the follow-
ing settings.
• Other company names and product names appearing
in the manual are registered trademarks or trademarks
of the company concerned.
■ MASTER-SLAVE
• Master-Slave (p. 81)
• Logical Camera Number (p. 82)
Platform
To install WJ-SX150A Administrator Console, the PC should
meet the following requirements.
• Hardware requirements
IBM PC or 100 % compatible, Pentium 3 - equivalent
or higher, 128 MB RAM, 5 MB hard drive space with
additional space for configuration database (.sdt) and
log.
In addition, the PC must be equipped with a serial port.
• Operating system requirements
Microsoft® Windows® 98, 98 SE, 2000, XP Professional
• Video display setting requirements
* High color (16 bit) or higher
* 800 x 600 resolution
When installing in the default system setting, the software is
installed in the following directory:
■ MANAGEMENT
• Put a file to SX150A (p. 83)
• Get a Configuration Data from SX150A (p. 83)
■ SETUP
Sequence Settings
• Tour Sequence (p. 84)
• Group Sequence (p. 85)
Schedule Settings
• Timer Event (p. 85)
• Camera Cleaning (p. 86)
• Daylight Saving Time/Summer Time (p. 87)
C: \Program Files\Panasonic\SX150A
Alarm Settings
• Alarm Mode (p. 88)
• Alarm Event (p. 89)
• Alarm Port (p. 90)
■ Installation/Uninstallation
■ Installation
Insert the CD-ROM program disk into the CD-ROM drive on
the PC. The file is located in the following directory.
E: \Admin\Setup.exe
Operator Settings
• Operator Registration (p. 90)
• Level Table (p. 91)
• Monitor Selection (p. 92)
• Auto Login/Logout (Auto Log-in/Log-out) (p. 92)
Double-click "Setup.exe" to begin the installation. Respond
to the dialog boxes by following the directions given.
System Settings
• Time & Date (p. 93)
• Cable Compensation/VD2/DATA (p. 94)
• Camera Title (p. 94)
• Data Port (p. 96)
■ Uninstallation
1. Select "Start" – "Settings" – "Control Panel".
2. Click on the "Add/Remove Hardware" button.
3. Select WJ-SX150A Administrator Console and click on
"Add/Remove".
• Recorder (p. 97)
• Multiplexer Mode (p. 98)
• Multiplexer Title (p. 100)
MUX
MUX
4. Operate according to the direction in the window.
WJ-SX150A Administrator Console
• New (p. 101)
• Select Setup Data File (p. 101)
• Account Manager (p. 101)
• Communication Port (p. 102)
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Before Using WJ-SX150A
EXIT button
Minimizing button
Administrator Console
1. Select "Start" – "Program" – "Panasonic" – "WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console x.xx*" or double-click the "WJ-
SX150A Administrator Console x.x" icon on the desktop.
*x.xx is a version number.
2. When you launch WJ-SX150A Administrator Console for
the first time, the following window will appear on the
PC screen.
Select “Yes”.
3. When terminating the software, click on the EXIT button
or press the ESC button on the PC keyboard. The main
window will close and WJ-SX150A Administrator
Console will be terminated.
→The selection will be memorized to WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console while launching it.
Note: To change the selection you have done in the
"Startup Menu" window, restart the WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console while holding down the SHIFT
key on the PC keyboard.
Note: The operator name and password are changeable.
Operator addition is also available. The configuration of
each operator name, password and level are neces-
sary. (Refer to p. 101 Account Manager.)
■ Startup/Termination
1. Select "Start" – "Program" – "Panasonic" – "WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console x.xx*" or double-click the "WJ-
SX150A Administrator Console x.x" icon on the desktop.
* x.x: Software version
■ The Main Window
This window appears when starting up WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console.
Clicking on each button in the window will display the asso-
ciated configuration window.
Refer to the description of each window for details.
→The User ID and Password Required window will
appear on the PC screen.
2. Enter "admin" and "sx150" in the boxes "Name" and
"Password" respectively.
Then, click on the OK button.
→WJ-SX150A Administrator Console starts up and the
main window will appear on the PC screen.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MASTER-SLAVE
(Master-Slave):
MUX
(Multiplexer Mode):
Multiplexer Mode window (p. 98)
MUX
Master-Slave window (p. 81)
(Logical Camera Number)
Logical Camera Number window (p. 82)
(Multiplexer Title):
Multiplexer Title window (p. 100)
In addition, the main window has the following buttons.
MANAGEMENT
(New):
New window (p. 101)
(Put to SX150A):
Put a file to SX150A window (p. 83)
(Get from SX150A):
(File Open):
Select Setup Data File window (p. 101)
Get a Configuration Data from SX150A window
(p. 83)
(Account Manager):
Account Manager window (p. 101)
(Communication Port):
Communication Port window (p. 102)
(Panasonic):
Opens the version information window of WJ-
SX150A Administrator Console. Clicking on "OK"
button will close the window.
SEQUENCE
(Tour Sequence): Tour Sequence window
(p. 84)
(Group Sequence): Group Sequence window
(p. 85)
SCHEDULE
Note: To reflect each configuration to the system, save the
file by pressing the SAVE button before closing the win-
dow. After that, be sure to put the file from the PC to the
unit.
(Timer Event):
Timer Event window (p. 85)
(Camera Cleaning):
Camera Cleaning window (p. 86)
(Daylight Saving Time/Summer Time):
Daylight Saving Time/Summer Time window
(p. 87)
■ Master-Slave
ALARM
This window configures the composition of master-slave
connection. Recorders selected in the Recorder window (p.
97) are activated/deactivated in the Master-Slave window.
(Alarm Mode):
Alarm Mode window (p. 88)
(Alarm Event):
Alarm Event window (p. 89)
(Alarm Port):
Alarm Port window (p. 90)
OPERATOR
(Operator Registration):
Operator Registration window (p. 90)
(Level Table):
Level Table window (p. 91)
(Monitor Selection):
Monitor Selection window (p. 92)
(Auto Login/Logout):
Auto Login/Logout window (p. 92)
SYSTEM
(Time & Date):
Time & Date window (p. 93)
(Cable Compensation/VD2/DATA):
Cable Compensation/VD2/DATA window (p. 94)
(Camera Title):
■ How to Display
To display this window, click on the
button in the main window (p. 80).
(Master-Slave)
Camera Title window (p. 94)
(Data Port):
Data Port window (p. 96)
(Recorder Control):
Recorder window (p. 97)
■ How to Display
• Master
The Master unit and the connected recorder are displayed.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Slave
■ How to Display
Slave units and connected recorders are displayed. To
activate/deactivate Slave units, click the ON/OFF button of
a desired Slave unit. When Slave units are set to ON, their
unit names become selectable in SETUP MENU to config-
ure the parameters.
• CAM 1 to 16
This stands for a camera channel of the unit.
• Logical Camera Number
Click on each drop-down menu to select a desired logical
camera number. 1 to 99 is selectable. For camera channels
without camera connections, select “- -“.
(Save Exit) button
Saves the configuration and closes the Master-Slave win-
dow.
(Save Exit) button
Saves the configuration and closes the Logical Camera
Number window.
(Cancel Exit) button
Cancels the configuration and closes the Master-Slave win-
dow.
(Cancel Exit) button
Cancels the configuration and closes the Logical Camera
Number window.
Notes:
• If you configure the master-slave composition, settings
concerning LCN (logical camera number) and
Multiplexer Title (refer to p. 100) will be changed. When
you click on the Save Exit button, a message window
will appear to confirm you the change.
• In WJ-SX150A Administrator Console, camera channels
of the Master unit which are connected to MONITOR
OUT 1/2/3/4 of Slave units are displayed in gray. You
cannot configure the parameters.
Notes:
• If logical camera numbers are not selected, the cam-
eras’ LCNs are not displayed in each window of SETUP
MENU and WJ-SX150A Administrator Console.
• You can select a logical camera number for only one
channel. When you select the same number more than
one time, a message will appear. The message will noti-
fy you that the number has been already used. If you
click on “Yes”, the newer will be activated and the older
will be changed to “- -“. If you click on “No”, the
changed parameters will return to the former state.
• If five units (Master and Slave 1 to 5) are connected in
the system, you cannot select logical camera numbers
for Master.
■ Logical Camera Number
This window configures logical camera numbers assigned
to camera channels of each unit. During operation, logical
camera numbers are used for camera control and monitor
display.
To display this window, click on the
(Logical Camera
Number) button in the main window (p. 80).
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Put a file to SX150A
Pressing this button will start the putting of the configuration
■Get a Configuration Data from
SX150A
file from the PC to the unit.
Pressing this button will start the getting of the configuration
data from the unit to the PC.
■ How to Display
■ How to Display
To display this window, click on the
To display this window, click on the
SX150A) button in the main window (p. 80).
(Put to
(Get from
SX150A) button in the main window (p. 80).
■ Parameters
■ Parameters
The file name of the configuration data appears.
The file name of the configuration data appears.
(OK) button
To put the configuration file from the PC to the unit, click on
this button.
(OK) button
To get the configuration data from the unit to the PC, click
on this button.
(Cancel Exit) button
To cancel the putting of the configuration file from the PC to
the unit, click on this button.
(Cancel Exit) button
To cancel the getting of the configuration data from the unit
to the PC, click on this button.
Notes:
• The setup file has been configured at the factory, and
the file names appear on the main window's title bar.
• Put the file from the PC to the unit when the time with no
necessary to the continuous system operation, such as
after-hours. After the file putting, the system will auto-
matically restart. Then, the system controllers will tem-
porarily log out.
• To change a file, select a file again. (Refer to p. 101
Select Setup Data File.)
• The configuration file cannot be put to the unit while
opening SETUP MENU.
• It takes a few seconds to put a file to SX150A, and you
might assume the PC has been freezing.
Wait until the message “Completed!” appears on the
screen. If the message “Connection error” appears, the
PC is incorrectly connected to the unit. Confirm the set-
tings of WJ-SX150A Administrator Console and retry the
file putting.
Notes:
• The configuration data getting is also possible during
the surveillance, for it will not interfere with the system
operation.
• The past data will be overwritten when getting a new
configuration data.
• To change the getting directory, select it. (Refer to p.
101 Select Setup Data File.)
• When the file getting has been successfully executed,
“Completed!” will appear. If “Connection Error”
appears, confirm the connection and the serial port set-
ting of the PC and the unit. (Refer to p. 74
CAMERA/DATA 1-4 PORT and p. 102 Communication
Port.) If “Failed!” appear, retry the file getting.
(Refer to p. 74 CAMERA/DATA 1-4 PORT and p. 102
Communication Port.)
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preset
■ Tour Sequence
Selects the preset position of the operating camera.
The preset position is selectable from Preset 1 to 64.
Note: Refer to p. 109 Program Preset Position for details of
how to program preset positions.
This window configures the parameters of tour sequences:
the operating camera, dwell time*, preset position** in each
step.
Each sequence has up to 64 steps, and up to 32
sequences are configurable.
The configuration of a tour sequence can be copied to
another one.
* the display time of a camera image
** the panning/tilting position which has been preset in
advance
Dwell
Selects the dwell time of the operating camera.
The dwell time is selectable from 1 to 30 seconds (by a
second). Set "--" for Dwell when you have selected "--" for
Cam.
Notes:
(DELETE) button
Deletes the configuration of all the steps of the selected
tour sequence.
• Enter the parameters from Step 1 in a sequential order.
If you skip a step, it will result in an error.
• After selecting a camera number, be sure to select the
dwell time, too. If you skip either of them, the message
requesting the parameter entry will appear.
(COPY) button
Copies the configuration of all the steps of the selected tour
sequence to the another tour.
(PASTE) button
Pastes the cut or copied configuration to another tour
sequence.
(Save Exit) button
Saves the configuration and closes the Tour Sequence win-
dow.
(Cancel Exit) button
Cancels the configuration and closes the Tour Sequence
window.
■ How to Display
1. To display this window, click on the
Sequence) button in the main window (p. 80). Or click
on the (Tour Sequence) button in the Group
(Tour
Sequence window.
2. To select Tour 1 to 32, click on a desired drop-down
menu in the Tour Sequence window.
3. After configuring 16 steps, click on a tab followed by
next 16 steps.
■ Parameters
LCN
Selects the operating camera in each step.
The camera is selectable from LCN 1 to 99. After selecting
LCN, select the time for Dwell.
Note: Configure Step 1 to the last step in a sequential
order. If there is a skipped step whose LCN and/or
Dwell is “- -“, that may cause an error. Then, the mes-
sage will appear to ask you to select both LCN and
Dwell.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Group Sequence
■ Timer Event
This window configures the parameters of group
sequences.
Each group sequence has up to 4 tour sequences which
are assigned to the monitors.
This window configures the parameters of timer events: the
schedule (daily, weekly or monthly) and action.
Up to 50 events are configurable.
tour sequence or spot mode is selectable.
■ How to Display
■ How to Display
To display this window, click on the
Sequence) button in the main window (p. 80).
(Group
To display this window, click on the
ton in the main window (p. 80).
(Timer Event) but-
■ Parameters
■ Parameters
Mon 1 - Mon 4
• Enable
Selects the tour sequence displayed on each monitor.
Checking on the box will enable the configuration.
(Tour Sequence) button
Displays the Tour Sequence window for the tour sequence
configuration.
• Schedule Mode Group
Check on the desired box for the timer event configuration.
Daily: To execute the event at a desired time every
day, check on this boxes.
(Save Exit) button
Saves the configuration and closes the Group Sequence
window.
To determine the time, click on the Hour and Minute
boxes.
Weekly: To execute the event at a desired time and
day(s) of the week, check on this box.
To determine the time, click on the Hour and Minute
boxes.
(Cancel Exit) button
Cancels the configuration and closes the Group Sequence
window.
Multiple selection is available for days of the week.
Monthly: To execute the event at a desired time and
day(s) of the month, check on this box.
To determine the time, click on the Hour and Minute
boxes.
• Action Group
Check on the desired action to execute.
Tour Sequence: Configures and executes the tour
sequence according to the schedule in the
Scheduled Mode group. When you have selected
Tour Sequence, select the number of monitor (Mon
1 to 4) and tour (Tour 1 to 32).
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Spot Camera: Executes the spot mode according to
the schedule in the Scheduled Mode group. When
you have selected Spot Camera, select the number
of monitor (Mon 1 to 4), camera (LCN 1 to 99) and
preset position (Pre 1 to 64).
■ Camera Cleaning
This window configures the parameters of camera cleaning
function: the schedule (daily, weekly or monthly) and cam-
eras to be cleaned.
(Save Exit) button
Saves the configuration and closes the Timer Event win-
dow.
(Cancel Exit) button
Cancels the configuration and closes the Timer Event win-
dow.
Notes:
• In order to stop a scheduled event on a monitor, you
need to program another event or manually select
another activity. (For example, you need to select a
camera or run a tour.)
• If you set more than one event with the same schedule,
the event with the smallest number will be activated.
■ How to Display
To display this window, click on the
Cleaning) button in the main window (p. 80).
(Camera
■ Parameters
• Camera Auto Cleaning
Checking on the box will enable the configuration.
• Schedule Mode Group
Check on the desired box for the auto cleaning configura-
tion.
Daily: To execute the cleaning at a desired time every
day, check on this box.
To determine the time, click on the Hour and Minute
boxes.
Weekly: To execute the cleaning at a desired time and
day(s) of the week, check on this box.
To determine the time, click on the Hour and Minute
boxes.
Monthly: To execute the cleaning at a desired time and
day of the month, check on this box.
To determine the time, click on the Hour and Minute
boxes.
• Auto Cleaning Camera
Check on the desired camera to execute the cleaning.
(Save Exit) button
Saves the configuration and closes the Camera Cleaning
window.
(Cancel Exit) button
Cancels the configuration and closes the Camera Cleaning
window.
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
• When the camera cleaning is active, cleaning will begin
from LCN 1 in numerical order.
• Surveillance is impossible during the cleaning.
• The cleaning cannot be stopped after it is started.
■ Daylight Saving Time/Summer
Time
(Save Exit) button:
Saves the configuration and closes the Daylight Saving
Time/Summer Time window.
This window configures the parameters of daylight saving
time.
(Cancel Exit) button:
Cancels the configuration and closes the Daylight Saving
Time/Summer Time window.
■ How to Display
To display this window, click on the
(Daylight Saving
Time/Summer Time) button in the main window (p. 80).
■ Parameters
• Enable
Checking on the box will enable the configuration.
• Date Group
1. Select the start date of the daylight saving time in the
Start drop-down menu.
2. Select the end date of the daylight saving time in the
End drop-down menu. Select a later date than the Start
date. When selecting an earlier date, a message will
appear.
Note: When clicking on the C button beside a drop-down
menu, a calendar will pop up. To determine the start
and end dates, click on the desired date on the calen-
dar. To go to the next or previous month, click on the
[A] or [B] button and select the dates when the day-
light saving time starts and ends.
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ON: The alarm-associated sequence/spot image is dis-
played on a monitor, and alarm recording will start
(if a recorder is connected to the unit).
REC ONLY: Only an alarm recording will start and
monitors will keep displaying the current sequence/
spot images.
■ Alarm Mode
This window configures the operation parameters when an
alarm signal is input: an alarm mode, auto reset time and
alarm input.
Note: You cannot recover alarm-related operations
from system controllers when REC ONLY is
selected.
OFF: An alarm input is accepted neither via the CAM-
ERA IN connectors nor the RS-485 ports.
The factory default setting is OFF.
Alarm Port
This stands for that an alarm input is accepted via the
ALARM port (25-pin D-sub connector) at the rear panel.
ON: The alarm-associated sequence/spot image is dis-
played on a monitor, and alarm recording will start
(if a recorder is connected to the unit).
■ How to Display
To display this window, click on the
ton in the main window (p. 80).
(Alarm Mode) but-
REC ONLY: Only an alarm recording will start and
monitors will keep displaying the current sequence/
spot images.
■ Parameters
Note: You cannot recover alarm-related operations
from system controllers when REC ONLY is
selected.
• Alarm Mode
Checking on the box of the desired alarm mode.
OFF: The system operation does not change into any
other mode.
OFF: An alarm input is not accepted via the ALARM
port.
Sequence Mode: Camera images are displayed on the
monitor in either the spot mode or tour sequence.
When more than one alarm are input, the image
associated to each alarm is displayed in the
sequence mode.
The factory default setting is ON.
Serial Port
This stands for that an alarm input is accepted via the
SERIAL port.
Note: Click on the Dwell drop-down menu to select
the dwell time.
Hold Mode: Camera images are displayed on the mon-
itor in either the spot mode or tour sequence. Even
more than one alarm are input, the image associat-
ed to the initial alarm is continuously displayed.
ON: The alarm-associated sequence/spot image is dis-
played on a monitor, and alarm recording will start
(if a recorder is connected to the unit).
REC ONLY: Only an alarm recording will start and
monitors will keep displaying the current sequence/
spot images.
Notes:
• The alarm mode is activated when alarm input signals
are assigned to the same monitor through 420 ALARM
EVENT or the Alarm Event (refer to pp. 67 and 68/ p.
89) window.
• While alarm is activated, you cannot operate the func-
tions related to the Multiplexer board.
Note: You cannot recover alarm-related operations
from system controllers when REC ONLY is
selected.
OFF: An alarm input is not accepted via the SERIAL
port.
• Alarm Input Group
Select the alarm input to be accepted. Multiple Selection is
available.
The factory default setting is ON.
Camera
This stands for that an alarm input is accepted via the
CAMERA IN connectors or the RS-485 ports.
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MUX
• Auto Reset Time
MUX MOTION DET
: This stands for that the
Select the time to reset the alarm input.
The selectable time: OFF (not resetting the alarm), 10, 20,
30, 40, 50, 60, 120 or 180 (seconds)
The factory default setting is 30 sec.
unit’s motion detector is activated. When a camera
detects the brightness-level change and transmit an
alarm signal, the alarm-associated sequence/spot
image is displayed on a monitor, and alarm record-
ing will start (if a recorder is connected to the unit).
(Save Exit) button
Saves the configuration and closes the Alarm Mode win-
dow.
ON: The alarm-associated sequence/spot image is dis-
played on a monitor, and alarm recording will start
(if a recorder is connected to the unit.)
(Cancel Exit) button
Cancels the configuration and closes the Alarm Mode win-
dow.
REC ONLY: Only an alarm recording will start and
monitors will keep displaying the current
sequence/spot images.
Note: You cannot recover alarm-related operations
from system controllers when REC ONLY is
selected.
■ Alarm Event
This window configures the details of operation parameters
when an alarm signal is input: the monitor and mode to dis-
play the alarm image, and the preset position of the cam-
era. Up to 99 alarm inputs are configurable.
OFF: An alarm input is not accepted by the motion
detector.
The factory default setting is OFF.
Sensitivity: When you click this button, the Sensitivity
window will appear.
MUX
■ Sensitivity
When you press this button, the Sensitivity window will
appear. In this window, you can configure the sensitivity
level of the Multiplexer motion detector on each camera
channel.
■ How to Display
To display this window, click on the
ton in the main window (p. 80).
(Alarm Event) but-
■ Parameters
Mon (Monitor)
Select the monitor to display the alarm image.
LCN/Tour
Select the spot camera number or the tour sequence num-
ber.
LCN: Select this to display a spot picture.
Tour: Select this to execute a tour sequence.
Num: Select a LCN or Tour number. For LCN, 1 to 99 is
selectable. For Tour, 1 to 32 is selectable.
OFF: The motion detector is not activated on the cam-
era channel.
LOW: The sensitivity level is low.
MID: The sensitivity level is medium.
HIGH: The sensitivity level is high.
Pre (Preset Position Number)
Select the preset position of the camera when selecting the
spot camera number in Spot/Tour. Position 1 to 64 is selec-
table for Pre. When the camera is not equipped with the
preset position function, select "--".
The factory default setting of all the channels is LOW.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REC
■ Parameters
Select the desired alarm input parameter to assign in each
alarm port's drop-down menu.
This stands for a recorder activated with an alarm signal.
(Refer to the diagram in p. 68.)
Normally Open: Normally Open contact.
Normally Close: Normally Close contact
Time Adjust: Time adjustment signal
Alarm Port
Select the unit whose alarm port is activated with an alarm
signal. Master or Slave 1/2/3/4 is selectable.
(Save Exit) button
Saves the configuration and closes the Alarm Input window.
Num
Select the alarm port number. 1 to 16 is selectable. To
deactivate the alarm event, select “- -”.
(Cancel Exit) button
Cancels the configuration and closes the Alarm Input win-
dow.
Notes:
• If having selected a tour sequence for a monitor, anoth-
er tour number or spot camera will not be available
when selecting the monitor for another alarm event.
That will result in an error.
• Each Alarm Port and Num can be assigned to only one
ALM. When you enter the same Alarm Port and Num
more than one time, a message will appear. If you click
on “Yes”, the newer will be activated and the older will
be changed to “- -“. If you click on “No”, the changed
parameters will return to the former state.
■ Operator Registration
This window configures the parameters of each operator:
the ID, password, level, priority and camera access.
Note: Before configuring this window, check on the
restrict level of each operation in the Level Table
window.
(Save Exit) button
Saves the configuration and closes the Alarm Event win-
dow.
(Cancel Exit) button
Cancels the configuration and closes the Alarm Event win-
dow.
■ Alarm Port
This window configures the parameters of alarm inputs.
■ How to Display
To display this window, click on the
(Operator
Registration) button in the main window (p. 80).
■ How to Display
To display this window, click on the
ton in the main window (p. 80).
(Alarm Port) but-
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Parameters
■ Level Table
• Operator Number
This window configures the restrict level of each operation.
The restrict level is classified in Level 1, 2, and 3.
This box displays a list of registered operators.
1-6: These are operator numbers who are registered as
the factory default setting. Operator Number 1 can-
not be deleted.
Timer: This operator is used for the priority change of a
timer event. When the timer event's priority is higher
than that of an operator, the event is valid. When an
operator's priority is higher than that of a timer
event, the event is invalid. This operator cannot be
deleted.
• Add Operator Number
This drop-down menu is used for the new operator number
selection. 7 to 16 can be added.
• Operator Group
This group configures each operator's password, level and
priority.
■ How to Display
ID: Enter an operator's ID. From 1 to 99999 are avail-
To display this window, click on the
ton in the main window (p. 80).
(Level Table) but-
able.
Password: Enter a password. From 1 to 99999 are
available.
Level: Select 1, 2 or 3. Refer to Level Table for details
on level setting.
Priority: Select the operator's priority from 1 (highest)
to 16 (lowest).
■ Parameters
• Permission
Click on each checkbox to classify the following operations
by three levels.
• Camera Access Group
This group configures the camera operation coverage of
each operator.
Click on each camera's checkboxes and determine the
available operation.
SX150A Setup: Setting up this matrix switcher system
Camera Setup: Setting up the cameras
Program Preset Position: Registering a camera's pre-
set position
1 (View & Control): The operator can display the cam-
era image on the monitor and control panning/tilt-
ing.
2 (View Only): The operator can display the camera
image on the monitor, but cannot control the pan-
ning/tilting.
3 (Prohibited): The operator can neither display the
camera image on the monitor nor control the pan-
ning/tilting.
Camera Control: Controlling a camera
Camera Selection: Selecting a camera
Recorder Setup: Displaying the recorder's setup menu
Recorder Control: Controlling the recorder
All Alarm Reset: Resetting all the alarms
Single Alarm Reset: Resetting an alarm
Alarm Suspend: Suspending an alarm
Call Sequence: Activating a tour or group sequence
Alarm History Display: Displaying the alarm history
Video Loss History Display: Displaying the video loss
history
(Add) button
Adds a new operator to WJ-SX150A.
System Status Display: Displaying the system status
OSD Control: Controlling on-screen display (Time and
date, monitor status, camera title, and event)
(Edit) button
The registered parameters become editable by clicking on
this button after selecting the operator number.
(Save Exit) button:
Saves the configuration and closes the Level Table window.
(Delete) button
Deletes an operator from WJ-SX150A after you select the
operator.
(EXIT) button
Cancels the configuration and closes the Level Table win-
dow.
(OK) button
Saves the configuration and closes the Operator
Registration window.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Monitor Selection
This window determines whether a system controller or PC
■ Auto Login/Logout (Auto Log-
in/Log-out)
This window configures the auto log-in/log-out parameter of
each data port.
can select a monitor.
An operator is selectable for auto log-in function.
■ How to Display
The log-out time is selectable for auto log-out function.
To display this window, click on the
Selection) button in the main window (p. 80).
(Monitor
■ How to Display
To display this window, click on the
Logout) button in the main window (p. 80).
(Auto Login/
■ Parameters
Select OK to permit each controller and the PC to control
Monitor 1 to 4.
■ Parameters
Select NG to restrict each controller and the PC to control
Monitor 1 to 4.
• Auto Login Box
Click on the checkboxes Terminal_K1 to K4 to select an
operator for auto log-in. Then, select an operator ID. It will
be the log-in ID of the system controller connected to the
data port.
(Save Exit) button
Saves the configuration and closes the Monitor Select win-
dow.
(Cancel Exit) button
Cancels the configuration and closes the Monitor Select
window.
• Auto Logout Box
Click on the checkbox of the data port connecting the sys-
tem controller for auto log-out. Then, select the elapsed
time for auto log-out.
(Save Exit) button
Saves the configuration and closes the Auto Login/Logout
window.
(Cancel Exit) button
Cancels the configuration and closes the Auto Login/
Logout window.
Note: Both of auto log-in and auto log-out cannot be
assigned to the same data port.
Either of them is selectable.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Clock
■ Time & Date
This window configures the unit's clock.
This window configures the unit's clock display pattern. The
The pattern of the Time & Date box depends on the setting
through the Time & Date window.
unit's clock time is also adjustable.
This picture is the example for U. S. model.
This picture is the example for U. S. model.
Out of the U. S., the display pattern is Date/Month/Year.
• How to display
To display this window, click on the
the Time & Date window.
(Clock) button in
■ How to Display
To display this window, click on the
the main window (p. 80).
(Clock) button in
• Parameters
Time & Date Box: To adjust the clock, click on the ■ or
■ buttons of Year, Month, Day, Hour and/or Minute
■ Parameters
• Display Format
(Put to SX150A) button: Changes the unit's
clock time into the one which has been configured
in this window.
The current date & time is displayed.
Click on the drop-down menu and select the display pat-
tern format.
The date display is selectable from 5 patterns.
The time display is selectable from 2 patterns (12H or 24H).
The following are the display patterns:
DD/MM/YYYY…21/08/2001
(Cancel Exit) button: Cancels the configuration
and closes the Clock window.
Note: The clock display pattern is not updated by click-
ing the
(Put to SX150A) button in this win-
MM/DD/YYYY…08/21/2001
DD/Mmm/YYYY…21/Aug/2001
YYYY/MM/DD…2001/08/21
dow. The setup file update will be necessary. (Refer
to p. 83 Put a File to SX150A.)
Mmm/DD/YYYY…Aug/21/2001
The factory default setting is Mmm/DD/YYYY pattern.
(Out of the U. S., the factory default setting is
DD/MM/YYY.)
(Clock) button
Displays the Clock window.
(Save Exit) button
Saves the configuration and closes the Time & Date, win-
dow.
(Cancel Exit) button
Cancels the configuration and closes the Clock Disp win-
dow.
Note: The display pattern will be updated when the setting
file has been put from the PC to the unit.
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■
Cable Compensation/VD2/DATA
■ Camera Title
This window configures the following parameters of each
camera: the cable length for transmission loss compensa-
tion and whether to send the VD2 timing pulse or control
data with the camera output signals.
This window configures the title for each camera.
Up to 20 characters (camera title + alphanumeric charac-
ters) are available for the title.
WJ-SX150A Administrator Console has the following built-in
characters:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrs
t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , – . / : ;
,=/?•_ÄÜÖÆÑÂØäüöæñâøÁÇÉÌÒÙßàáâçèéêëìíîïòóôùúû
In addition, symbols, special characters and original char-
acters are editable in the bitmap font.
Camera
title input
area
■ How to Display
To display this window, click on the
(Cable
Compensation/VD2) button in the main window (p. 80).
■ Parameters
■ How to Display
To display this window, click on the
button in the main window (p. 80).
Cable Comp: Select the cable length for each camera.
S: Less than 400 m (1 300 ft)
M: 400 m (1 300 ft) to 700 m (2 300 ft)
L: 700 m (2 300 ft) to 900 m (3 000 ft)
VD2: To send the VD2 timing pulse with the camera
output signal, select ON.
Not send the VD2 timing pulse with the camera out-
put signal, select OFF.
DATA: To send the control data with the camera output
signal, select ON.
(Camera Title)
■ Parameters
• Drop-down menu
Camera channel and logical camera number are displayed
here. Select a desired camera.
Not send the control data with the camera output
signal, select OFF.
• Fixed Font Box
The fixed-font characters are displayed here.
SPACE: To make a space in the text-box area, click on
this button.
(Save Exit) button
Saves the configuration and closes the Cable
Compensation/VD2/DATA window.
• User Font Box
(Cancel Exit) button
The character displayed here is editable by users.
Edit Font: To display the Edit Font window, click on this
button.
Cancels the configuration and closes the Cable
Compensation/VD2/DATA window.
• Insert / Revise Radio button
To insert a character in the text-box area, click on the Insert
button. To revise the character there, click on the Revise
button.
(Save Exit) button
Saves the configuration and closes the Camera Title win-
dow.
Note: Be sure to click on this button after editing user font
characters. Otherwise, the edited characters will be
canceled.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(Cancel Exit) button
Cancels the configuration and closes the Camera Title win-
dow.
■ Edit Font Window
The Window Soon after Opening
■ Edit Camera Title
1. Select the desired camera in the drop-down menu to
edit its camera title. The cursor blinks at the first block
in the text box.
2. Click on the <– or –> button to move the cursor to the
desired position.
3. Click on the desired character button in the Fixed Font
or User Font box. The character will be entered in the
text box.
The Window during the Edit
4. Repeat Step 2 and 3 to enter the camera title.
5. After the entry, click on the
The camera title will be saved.
(Save Exit) button.
To Enter a Space in the Text Box
1. Click on the <– or –> button to move the cursor to the
desired position.
2. Click on the SPACE button.
• How to Display
To Delete a Character in the Text Box
1. Click on the Revise button.
2. Click on the <– or –> button and move the cursor to the
character for deletion.
To display this window, click on the Edit Font button in the
Camera title window.
3. Click on the DEL button.
• Parameters
The character will be deleted from the text box.
User Font Box: The registered user font characters are
displayed here. Up to 1600 characters (20 for each
camera x 80) are registerable.
Edit Font Box: The selected user font characters are
displayed here in 12 x 13 dots.
To Revise a Character in the Text Box
1. Click on the Revise button.
2. Click on the <– or –> button and move the cursor to the
character for revision.
(Delete) button: Deletes an user font character.
1. Click on the desired character in the User Font
box.
3. Click on the desired character.
The character will be entered in the text box.
2. Click on the Delete button.
To Insert a Character in the Text Box
1. Click on the Insert button.
2. Click on the <– or –> button and move the cursor to the
block to enter a character.
3. Click on the SPACE button to enter a space.
4. Click on the Revise button.
(Copy) button /
(Past) button: A user font
character can be copied by clicking these buttons.
Save –> button: The edited or deleted character is reg-
istered in the User Font box.
(OK) button: Closes the Edit Font window.
5. Click on the desired character in the text box.
The character will be inserted in the text box.
• To Edit a User Font Character
1. Click on the desired characters in the User Font box.
When making a new character, click on a blank.
The selected user font character are displayed here in
12 x 13 dots.
To Cancel the Entry
Click on the
(Cancel Exit) button.
The entry will be canceled and the Camera Title window will
close.
2. Click on
and
or
to make a character.
will appear alternately by clicking.
will change into black after the character is regis-
tered in the User Font box.
3. When finishing the edit, click on the Save –> button.
The edited character will be registered in the User Font
box.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note: The new character has not been saved in the
configuration data at this point. After closing the
Edit Font window, be sure to return to the Camera
Notes:
• The baud rate of DATA HDR is the same as that of PSD.
When you select PSD for DATA 4, DATA HDR and its
baud rate are displayed in gray and not configurable.
When you select CU360C for DATA 4, DATA HDR and
its baud rate are configurable.
Title window and click on the
ton.
(Save Exit) but-
• Terminal_K1 to 4 can be assigned to only one port.
• To Copy a Character
1. Click on the desired character in the User Font box.
2. Click on the Copy button.
• Baud Rate
3. Click on the blank in the User Font box to copy the
character.
Select the desired baud rate (communication speed). 4800,
9600 or 19200 bps is selectable.
4. Click the Paste button.
• Cam 1 to 16
• To Delete a Character
Select the camera(s) connected to the RS-485 daisy chain.
Data 1 to 3 are connectable to either of cameras and sys-
tem controllers.
1. Click on the desired character in the User Font box.
2. Click on the Delete button.
3. Click on the Save –> button.
When connecting cameras to these ports, select the con-
nected camera number(s).
• PS·Data mode
This stands for the PS·Data parameters of the DATA 4 port.
Logout Time: Select the desired operable time before
logout. OFF, 30, 60, 90 or 120 sec is available.
The factory default setting is 30 sec.
■ Data Port
This window configures the parameters of each data port
(RS485, DATA 1 to 4 and DATA HDR port): the protocol, the
baud rate (communication speed), and the connected
cameras.
Note: Select OFF when only PS·Data system
controllers are connected.
Alarm Data: Select the desired time to accept an alarm
input signal. OFF, 0, 1 or 5 sec is available.
The factory default setting is 1 sec.
Wait Time: Select the desired wait time to transmit an
alarm output signal. OFF, 100msec, 200m sec,
400m sec or 1 sec is available.
The factory default setting is OFF.
Group Address: This parameter is only for confirma-
tion. Leave as it is.
• Fixed Common Parameter Group
The data bit (8 bit), parity (none), and stop bit (1 bit) are
displayed. These parameters are fixed.
■ Parameters (Master)
■ How to Display
To display this window, click on the
in the main window (p. 80).
(Data Port) button
■ Parameters (Normal Connection)
• Protocol
Select “Camera” when an RS-485 camera is connected to
the data port. Select “Terminal_K1 to 4” when the system
controller is connected to the data port.
Select PS·Data when the system controller is connected to
the DATA 4 port via the PS·Data protocol. PS·Data mode
will appear in the window.
DATA 3 is used for master-slave connection. Protocol is
fixed to Master-Slave and Baud Rate is fixed to 38400.
Note: Other parameters are same as normal connection.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Parameters (Slave 1 to 4)
■ Recorder
This window configures the recorder setting parameters:
whether the multiplexer board is installed in the unit, what is
the type of the recorder, what is the recorder unit address,
and whether the gen-lock is activated.
The following are different from normal connection and
Master.
• RS485, DATA1 to 3 is fixed to Camera.
• DATA 4 is used for master-slave connection. Protocol is
fixed to Master-Slave and Baud Rate is fixed to 38400.
• When VCR is selected for 600 RECORDER in SETUP
MENU (refer to p. 71), the Protocol of SERIAL is fixed to
VCR. This parameter is activated when using a
Pananonic time-lapse VCR.
• When Protocol of SERIAL is displayed as “– – –“, Baud
Rate is set to the baud rate for firmware update.
Refer to p. 58 for details.
■ How to Display
To display this window, click on the
button in the main window (p. 80).
(Recorder Mode)
■ Parameters
• Recorder Control
Click on the desired radio button to determine the recorder
type.
OFF: Select this when no recorder is connected to the
unit.
(Save Exit) button
Saves the configuration and closes the Data Port window.
HD500: Select this when a WJ-HD500 Series recorder
is connected to the unit.
(Cancel Exit) button
HD100: Select this when a WJ-HD100 Series recorder
Cancels the configuration and closes the Data Port window.
MUX
is connected to the unit.
HD200: Select this when a WJ-HD200 Series recorder
is connected to the unit.
VCR/VTR: Select this when a time-lapse VCR is con-
MUX
nected to the unit.
Note: VCR/VTR is selectable only in the Slave tabs.
The factory default setting is HD500.
• Unit Address
This parameter is configurable only when HD100, HD200 or
HD500 is selected in the Recorder window. When OFF is
selected there, this parameter is displayed in gray and not
configurable. 1 to 99 is selectable. The factory default set-
ting is 1.
Note: If you connect a time-lapse VCR to the Master unit,
do the recorder setting in SETUP MENU. (Refer to
RECORDER in p. 71.) If you connect a time-lapse VCR
to Slave units, recorder setting is available in WJ-
SX150A Administrator Console.
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• EXT IN
MUX
■ Multiplexer Mode
This stands for the setting of the EXT IN connector at the
unit's rear panel.
GEN LOCK ON: Select this mode to gen-lock the unit
with the recorder.
GEN LOCK OFF: Select this mode if the asynchronous
unit is connected to the recorder.
Notes:
• If GENLOCK ON is selected, the playback images can-
not be displayed on the monitors which are connected
to the connectors MONITOR OUT 1 to 4. Confirm the
images on those which are connected to the recorder.
• If GENLOCK OFF is selected, the maximum rate
recording becomes unavailable for WJ-HD500 Series.
• To use WJ-HD100 Series or a time-lapse VCR, the
Multiplexer board should be installed inside the unit.
• When the master-slave connection is applied, the Slave
tab will appear in the Recorder window. VCR/VTR will
be selectable besides other parameters.
■ How to Display
To display this window, click on the
Mode) button in the main window (p. 80.)
(Multiplexer
■ Parameters
• Multi Monitor Out Group
Still Display: Select the desired setting by clicking on
the drop-down menu.
ON: Still picture is available during the multiscreen
display.
OFF: Still picture is not available during the multi-
screen display.
The factory default setting is ON.
Border Color: Select the desired setting by clicking on
the drop-down menu. This setting will determine the
color of the border which separates each multi-
screen segment.
WHITE: The border will be displayed in white.
GRAY: The border will be displayed in gray.
BLACK: The border will be displayed in black.
OFF: No border will be displayed.
The factory default setting is WHITE.
Quad Shift: Select the desired setting by clicking on
the drop-down menu.
ON: Camera images are displayed in 4 multiscreen
segments (quad) and switched as follows:
4A = Page 1 of the quad (Camera 1, 2, 3 and 4)
4B = Page 2 of the quad (Camera 5, 6, 7 and 8)
4C = Page 3 of the quad (Camera 9, 10, 11 and
12)
4D = Page 4 of the quad (Camera 13, 14, 15
and 16)
OFF: Quad is unavailable.
The factory default setting is OFF.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Secret View: Select the desired setting by clicking on
the drop-down menu.
INT: Select this if the asynchronous unit is connect-
ed to the unit. When it is activated, the drop-
down menu becomes also active so that you
can select the desired normal recording rate.
002, 004 to 255 (field) are selectable.
ON: The adjoining drop-down menu becomes also
active so that you can designate the desired
monitor (MON 1 to 4) for the secret view func-
tion. If you designate MON 1 in the drop-down
menu, black image will be displayed in a seg-
ment of multiscreen monitor, instead of the spot
image of camera channel activated in MON 1.
OFF: Secret view function is unavailable.
The factory default setting is EXT.
Alarm Group
REC Mode: Select the desired setting by clicking on
the radio button.
The factory default setting is OFF.
EXT: Select this to gen-lock the unit during the
alarm recording.
Sequence Mode: Select the sequence type by clicking
on the radio button.
INT: Select this if the asynchronous unit is connect-
ed to the unit. When it is activated, the drop-
down menu becomes also active so that you
can select the desired normal recording rate.
002, 004 to 128 (field) are selectable.
Quad: Multiplexer sequence is activated. The moni-
tor display will be changed as 4A → 4B → 4C
→ 4D.
3+1: Images are displayed in 4 multiscreens, and
the images of Camera 4 to 16 are displayed in
the sequence mode, at the right bottom of the
monitor. The images of Camera 1 to 3 are fixed.
(Refer to the left-side illustration in p. 20.)
8+1: Images are displayed in 9 multiscreens, and
the images of Camera 9 to 16 are displayed in
the sequence mode, at the right bottom of the
monitor. The images of Camera 1 to 8 are fixed.
(Refer to the right-side illustration in p. 20.)
The factory default setting is EXT.
DYNAMIC REC: Select the desired setting by clicking
on the drop-down menu.
ALM-PRI: Select this to give recording priority to
the camera channel with the alarm input.
ALM-ONLY: Select this to record the images from
the alarm-associated camera channel.
GROUP: Select this to give recording priority to a
group of up to 4 camera channels associated to
the alarm input. When you select this, the Group
Setting button becomes active. By pressing the
button, the Mux Alarm Group window will be
displayed so that you can configure the Group
1 to 16 parameters. (Refer to p. 100 Mux Alarm
Group.)
The factory default setting is Quad.
Dwell: The dwell time of the selected sequence
mode is selectable. 2S to 30S is available.
The factory default setting is 2S.
OFF: Select this to deactivate the alarm priority
mode.
• REC OUT Group
Title Display: Select the desired setting by clicking on
the drop-down menu.
The factory default setting is OFF.
ON: The camera title is displayed on the recorded
image.
OFF: The camera title is not displayed on the
recorded image.
• System Group
Camera SW Loss: Select the desired setting by click-
ing on the drop-down menu.
The factory default setting is ON.
ON: “CAM SW LOSS” will blink on the associated
monitor when loss of the camera switching
pulse is detected.
OFF: “CAM SW LOSS will not appear on the moni-
tor.
Clock Display: Select the desired setting by clicking on
the drop-down menu.
ON: The date and time are displayed on the record-
ed image.
OFF: The date and time are not displayed on the
recorded image.
The factory default setting is ON.
Dummy Black: Select the desired setting by clicking
on the drop-down menu.
The factory default setting is ON.
ON: The black image will be displayed for a camera
channel that is not connected to the camera.
OFF: The camera channel will be skipped in the
sequence/spot mode.
Normal Group
REC Mode: Select the desired setting by clicking on
the radio button.
EXT: Select this to gen-lock the unit during the nor-
mal recording.
The factory default setting is ON.
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MUX
(Save Exit) button
Saves the configuration and closes the Multiplexer Mode
■ Multiplexer Title
window.
(Cancel Exit) button
Cancels the configuration and closes the Multiplexer Mode
window.
■ Mux Alarm Group
■ How to Display
To display this window, click on the
button in the main window (p. 80.)
(Multiplexer Title)
■ Parameters
The factory default settings are same as the illustration.
To edit the desired camera’s title, click on the associated
button (Cam 1 to Cam 16).
The subsequent editing procedure is the same as Camera
Title. (Refer to p.94.)
This is a submenu of the Multiplexer window. In this win-
dow, up to 4 cameras are given recording priority for each
alarm input.
• Click a drop-down menu to assign the camera numbers
(1 to 16) to each alarm group (Group1 to 16). The facto-
ry default setting is same as the illustration.
• To configure Group 9 to 16, click on the Group 9 –
Group 16 tab.
Notes:
The characters available here are the following:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrs
t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , -
./:;¨=Æ?oÄÜÖÆÑÃØäüöæñãø
(Save Exit) button
Saves the configuration and closes the Mux Alarm Group
window.
(Cancel Exit) button
Cancels the configuration and closes the Mux Alarm Group
window.
• Up to 8 alphanumeric characters are available for the
Multiplexer board camera title.
• You cannot edit a user font character.
(Save Exit) button
Saves the configuration and closes the Multiplexer Title win-
dow.
(Cancel Exit) button
Cancels the configuration and closes the Multiplexer Title
window.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ New
■ Account Manager
This window configures the parameters of the operators
who can control WJ-SX150A Administrator Console: the
registration, edit and deletion of an operator.
The window soon after opening
■ How to Display
To display this window, click on the
main window (p. 80).
(New) button in the
The window during the edit
■ Parameters
This window is used for new file creation.
File Name: Enter a desired name for a new file.
Files of type: The file extension is displayed here.
(OK) button
Saves the configuration and closes the New window.
(Cancel Exit) button
Saves the configuration and closes the New window.
■ Select Setup Data File
The setup file is selectable by pressing this button.
Refer to the operating instructions of Windows® for details
on how to copy a data.
■ How to Display
To display this window, click on the
Manager) button in the main window (p. 80).
(Account
Note: Register at least one operator with level 1. If there is
no level 1 operator, the configuration of WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console will become impossible.
■ How to Display
To display this window, click on the
in the main window (p. 80).
(File Open) button
■ Parameters
■ Parameters
The location, name and type of the setup file appear in this
window.
• Accounts Group
The registered operator names appears. To display the
operator information in the Account Record group, click on
the name.
File Name Input Area: Displays the selected file's
name.
You can configure up to 16 account records.
Open button: Opens the selected file.
Cancel button: Cancels the operation and closes the
Select Setup Data File dialog box.
• Account Record Group
Name: The operator name is displayed.
Password: The password is displayed as "*****". The
entered password is displayed here during the edit.
Level: Select the operator level.
(OK) button
Saves the configuration and closes the New window.
(Cancel Exit) button
Saves the configuration and closes the New window.
(OK) button
Closes the Account Manager window.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(Add Account) button
To register a new operator, click on this button. The
Registration window will appear.
■ Communication Port
This window configures the PC's usable communication
port number and its baud rate (communication speed).
(EDIT) button: To configure the operator information,
click on this button.
(DELETE) button
To delete the operator selected in the Accounts group,
click on this button.
(Save Exit) button
Saves the configuration and closes the Account Manager
window.
(Cancel Exit) button
Cancels the configuration and closes the Account Manager
window.
■ How to Display
To display this window, click on the
port) button in the main window (p. 80).
(Communication
■ Edit Account Manager
Add a Registration Operator
■ Parameters
1. Click on the
button.
• Parameter Group
2. Enter the name in the Name box and the password in
the Password box.
Name: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
Password: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
3. Click on the ■ button to select the level.
Com: Select the PC's communication port for the con-
nection to the unit.
Baud Rate: Select the desired baud rate (communica-
tion speed). 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bps is
selectable.
4. Click on the
(Save exit) button.
The configuration will be saved and the Registration
window will close.
The factory default setting is 38400 bps.
To cancel the configuration, click on the
exit) button.
Note: You can register up to 16 accounts (operators).
(Cancel
• Fixed Parameter Group
The data bit (8 bit), parity (none), and stop bit (1 bit) are
displayed.
Note: These parameters are fixed.
Edit a Registration Operator
1. Click on the registration operator's name in the
Accounts group.
(Save Exit) button
Saves the configuration and closes the Communication Port
window.
2. Click on the
(EDIT) button.
3. Edit the desired parameters.
4. Click on the
(Save exit) button.
(Cancel Exit) button
Cancels the configuration and closes the Communication
Port window.
The configuration will be saved and the Registration
window will close.
To cancel the configuration, click on the
exit) button.
(Cancel
Delete a Registration Operator
1. Click on the registration operator's name in the
Accounts group.
2. Click on the
3. Click on the
(Delete) button.
(Save exit) button.
Note: If deleting all level 1 operators, the configuration of
WJ-SX150A Administrator Console will become impos-
sible.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATING PROCEDURES
(TERMINAL MODE)
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOG-IN AND LOG-OUT
Before starting the following procedures, all system compo-
nents must be turned on.
The following procedures are applicable when the system
controller is connected to the unit.
Note: If an operator ID or password error occurs, the
PROHIBITED indicator on the controller will blink
and "NO ACC" will blink on the LED display for
about 3 seconds. Then "NO USER" appears on the
LED display. Return to Step 3 and select your oper-
ator ID.
■ Log-in
This operation is skipped when the auto log-in is set to ON.
(Refer to p. 92.)
1. Turn on the power switches of all system components.
The OPERATE indicator will light up.
2. To turn on the power of the system controller, connect
the AC adapter to the AC outlet.
The LINK indicator lights up and "NO USER" appears
on the LED display of the system controller.
Note: If the auto log-in is set to ON, any operator can login
automatically. After the controller is turned on, "AUTO"
appears on the LED display for approximately 2 sec-
onds, then "READY" automatically appears.
3. To select your registered operator ID number (1 to 16,
up to 2 digits), press the numeric buttons, then press
the CAM (SET) button.
The underline appears on the LED display of the con-
troller.
The factory default setting is 150.
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
AUX1 OFF
ALL
STILL
MON STATUS
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
EL-ZOOM
ALM H
DEF OFF
DEF ON
SEQUENCE
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
MON LOCK
WIPER
MULTI SCREEN SEL
4. To select your registered password (up to 5 digits),
press the numeric buttons, then press the CAM (SET)
button.
The factory default setting is 150.
If the operator ID and password are correct, "READY"
will appear on the LED display.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Log-out
■ Auto Log-in
This operation is skipped when the auto log-out is set to
ON.
This function is used when an operator leaves the controller
or no longer requires access to the system.
If the auto log-in is set to ON, any operator can login auto-
matically. After the controller is turned on, "AUTO" appears
on the LED display for approximately 2 seconds, then
"READY" automatically appears.
Auto log-in is configurable through WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console. [Refer to p. 92 Auto Login/Logout
(Auto Log-in/Log-out).]
1. To logout from the system press the CLEAR button
while holding down the SHIFT button.
"NO USER" appears on the LED display of the con-
troller.
CALL
TOUR SEQ
NEXT
PRESET
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
■ Auto Log-out
PROGRAM
PRESET
AUX1 OFF
ALL
STILL
If the auto log-out is set to ON and no operation takes place
for a specific time, any operator can logout automatically.
"NO USER" automatically appears on the LED display.
MON STATUS
AUTO PAN
CAM FUNC
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
EL-ZOOM
PAUSE
ALM H
DEF OFF
DEF ON
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
CLEAR
LOG OUT
MON LOCK
WIPER
SHIFT
MULTI SCREEN SEL
Auto log-out and the time to logout are configurable
through WJ-SX150A Administrator Console. [Refer to p. 92
Auto Login/Logout (Auto Log-in/Log-out).]
Notes:
• If you want to save the power consumption, discon-
nect the PC plug from the controller, and remove
the AC adapter from the AC outlet.
• If the auto log-out is set to ON, any operator can
logout automatically if no operation takes place for
a specific time. "NO USER" automatically appears
on the LED display.
• The time to logout is configurable through WJ-
SX150A Administrator Console. [Refer to p. 92 Auto
Login/Logout (Auto Log-in/Log-out).]
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MONITOR SELECTION AND CAMERA SELECTION
After the log-in procedure, the following operations are
available to control the system.
■ Priority Lock
The operation begins with selecting a monitor, then the
selected camera appears the active monitor.
■ Applying Priority Lock
1. Select the desired monitor. (Refer to Monitor Selection).
■ Monitor Selection
1. To select the desired monitor number (1 to 4), press the
2. Press the MON (ESC) button while holding down the
SHIFT button to toggle the priority lock mode on and off
on the active monitor.
numeric button.
If the priority lock mode is selected, the monitor number
will inversely appear on the active monitor as shown in
the figure.
2. Press the MON (ESC) button to execute the selection.
The MONITOR indicator on the controller will light up
and the selected monitor number will appear on the
LED display of the controller.
Note: This function will prevent operators with lower priority
from gaining control of a monitor.
However, higher or equal priority operators may still
gain control of the monitor.
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
TOUR SEQ
NEXT
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
AUX1 OFF
ALL
STILL
AUX1 OFF
ALL
STILL
MON STATUS
MON STATUS
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
EL-ZOOM
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
EL-ZOOM
ALM H
PAUSE
ALM H
M04
DEF OFF
DEF ON
SEQUENCE
DEF OFF
DEF ON
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
MON LOCK
WIPER
MULTI SCREEN SEL
MON LOCK
WIPER
SHIFT
MULTI SCREEN SEL
3. If the selected monitor number is not valid, the PROHIB-
ITED indicator lights up and the number on the LED dis-
play will blink for approximately 3 seconds.
■ Releasing Priority Lock
1. Select the desired monitor. (Refer to Monitor Selection.)
Return to Step 1 and select a new monitor number.
Note: The PROHIBITED indicator will blink if an opera-
tor with higher priority is controlling the
monitor.Control of the same monitor is denied to an
operator with lower priority.
2. Press the MON (ESC) button while holding down the
SHIFT button to release the priority lock mode.
The monitor number returns to the normal display on
the active monitor.
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Camera Selection
1. Select the desired monitor. (Refer to p. 106 Monitor
Selection.)
2. Press the numeric buttons to select the desired camera
number (1 to 99).
3. Press the CAM (SET) button.
The selected camera's image will appear on the active
monitor. The CAMERA indicator will light up and the
selected camera number will appear on the LED dis-
play on the controller.
Note: If you select a wrong number, press the CLEAR
button to clear the input.
4. If the selected camera number is not valid, the PRO-
HIBITED indicator and the number on the LED display
will blink for about 3 seconds.
Return to Step 2 and select a new camera number.
5. To replace the currently selected camera with the next
higher-numbered camera , press the NEXT button.
6. To replace the currently selected camera with the next
lower-numbered camera, press the PREV button.
F1
ACK
RESET
CAM SETUP
SUSPEND
ALL RESET
TOUR SEQ
F2
GROUP SEQ
REW/FF
INDEX
PREV
NEXT
STEP
RECORDER
STOP
PAUSE
STOP
PLAY
PAUSE
OSD
SETUP
SHIFT
Note: The PROHIBITED indicator will light up, if the
camera is selected by an operator with higher prior-
ity. Control of the same camera is denied to an
operator with lower priority.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAMERA CONTROL
Buttons and control for cameras or camera site accessories
are located on the right side of the front panel of the system
controller.
Moving the zoom wheel controller of WV-CU360CJ can
also adjust the lens zoom.
WIDE
TELE
Included are zoom control, focus control, iris control, preset
and pan/tilt controls.
Normally, combination cameras equipped with the specific
feature or a WV-RC100 or WV-RC150 Receiver are required
to utilize these functions.
Zoom wheel controller
Note: Refer to the cameras' operating instructions whether
to confirm that each function is available.
4. Press the IRIS CLOSE/OPEN buttons to close/open the
lens iris. The lens iris is adjusted by these buttons to
obtain the proper image exposure.
■ Lens Control
This function is available when specified lens, with motor-
ized zoom/ focus functions, is mounted on the camera, and
the lens selection (DC/VIDEO) on the camera is set to DC.
IRIS
CLOSE
OPEN
AUTO IRIS
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 106
Monitor Selection and p. 107 Camera Selection.)
To reset to the factory default setting, press these but-
tons simultaneously.
2. Press the FOCUS NEAR/FAR buttons while watching
the monitor. The lens focus is adjusted to obtain a
sharply focused image.
To set the lens focus automatically, press these buttons
simultaneously.
■ Pan/Tilt Control
■ Manual Operation
FOCUS
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 106
Monitor Selection and p. 107 Camera Selection.)
FAR
NEAR
AUTO FOCUS
2. Move the joystick to move the pan/tilt head towards the
desired direction.
Pressing the top button of WV-CU360CJ can also set
the lens focus automatically.
UP
L
R
DOWN
Top button
3. Press the ZOOM WIDE/TELE buttons while watching the
monitor. The lens iris is adjusted to obtain the desired
image.
■ Auto Panning
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 106
Monitor Selection and p. 107 Camera Selection.)
Press the TELE button to bring an object optically clos-
er. Press the WIDE button to widen the scene optically.
2. To activate the auto panning function of the selected
camera, press the AUTO PAN button.
ZOOM
WIDE
TELE
AUTO PAN
REC
CAM FUNC
3. To cancel the auto panning function, move the joystick.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Program Preset Position
■ Call Preset Position
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 106
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 106
Monitor Selection and p. 107 Camera Selection.)
Monitor Selection and p. 107 Camera Selection.)
2. To move the camera to the position to be preset, move
the joystick and press the lens control buttons.
2. To select the desired preset position number, press the
numeric buttons. (1 to 64)
3. To select the desired preset position number, press the
numeric buttons. (1 to 64)
3. When you have selected a wrong number, press the
CLEAR button to clear the numeric input.
4. When you have selected a wrong number, press the
CLEAR button to clear the numeric input.
4. Press the CALL PRESET button to move to the preset
position of the selected camera on the active monitor.
5. Press the CALL PRESET button while holding down the
SHIFT button to save a preset position of the selected
camera.
CALL
PRESET
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
PROGRAM
PRESET
AUX1 OFF
ALL
STILL
MON STATUS
AUTO PAN
CAM FUNC
CALL
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
EL-ZOOM
TOUR SEQ
NEXT
PRESET
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
ALM H
PROGRAM
PRESET
AUX1 OFF
ALL
STILL
DEF OFF
DEF ON
SEQUENCE
MON STATUS
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
CLEAR
AUTO PAN
CAM FUNC
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
EL-ZOOM
LOG OUT
MON LOCK
WIPER
MULTI SCREEN SEL
PAUSE
ALM H
DEF OFF
DEF ON
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
CLEAR
Notes:
LOG OUT
MON LOCK
WIPER
SHIFT
MULTI SCREEN SEL
• To use the above function, you must set the preset
position number for the camera.
• If you press no numeric buttons or the button 0 in
Step 2, the camera will move to the home position.
Notes:
• If the entered position number has stored the previ-
ous preset position, it will be overwritten by the new
one.
• SETUP MENU and WJ-SX150A Administrator
Console can configure each operator's pan/tilt con-
trol. (Refer to p. 76 OPERATOR REGISTRATION or
p. 90 Operator Registration.)
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAMERA FUNCTION CONTROL
■ Camera Setup
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 106
■ Camera Function (Shortcut
Function)
Monitor Selection and p. 107 Camera Selection.)
The following function is available only when specified cam-
eras with the camera function feature are used.
This function enables executing camera functions via a
shortcut.
2. Press the F1 button while holding down the SHIFT but-
ton.
The CAM SETUP indicator on the controller will light up
and the camera's SETUP MENU will appear on the
active monitor.
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 106
Monitor Selection and p. 107 Camera Selection.)
2. Press the AUTO PAN button while holding down the
SHIFT button.
F1
ACK
RESET
"F_ _ _ _" will appear on the LED display of the con-
troller as shown in the figure.
CAM SETUP
SUSPEND
ALL RESET
TOUR SEQ
CALL
F2
GROUP SEQ
PRESET
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
PROGRAM
PRESET
AUX1 OFF
ALL
REW/FF
INDEX
STILL
PREV
NEXT
MON STATUS
AUTO PAN
CAM FUNC
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
STEP
EL-ZOOM
RECORDER
STOP
PAUSE
ALM H
DEF OFF
DEF ON
STOP
PLAY
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
F1
ACK
RESET
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
CLEAR
OSD
CAM SETUP
SUSPEND
ALL RESET
TOUR SEQ
LOG OUT
MON LOCK
WIPER
CALL
SETUP
SHIFT
MULTI SCREEN SEL
F2
GROUP SEQ
PRESET
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
PROGRAM
PRESET
AUX1 OFF
ALL
REW/FF
INDEX
STILL
PREV
NEXT
MON STATUS
AUTO PAN
CAM FUNC
3. To select the desired item in the menu, move the joy-
stick to ■ or ■. To select the desired parameter (or
mode) in the menu, move the joystick to t or s.
4. To execute the currently highlighted selection and to
enter a submenu of SETUP MENU, press the CAM
(SET) button.
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
STEP
EL-ZOOM
RECORDER
STOP
PAUSE
ALM H
DEF OFF
DEF ON
STOP
PLAY
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
CLEAR
OSD
LOG OUT
MON LOCK
WIPER
SETUP
SHIFT
MULTI SCREEN SEL
5. To leave from the currently selected menu and to return
to the previous page of the menu, press the MON (ESC)
button.
6. Move the cursor to SPECIAL on the camera’s setup
menu, and press numeric buttons 4 and 6 simultane-
ously for 2 seconds or more to display the special
menu.
3. Press the numeric buttons to select an assigned func-
tion number, then press the CAM (SET) button.
For example, enter 175 for AGC ON.
The selected function will be executed on the active
monitor.
7. Move the cursor to CAMERA RESET on the camera’s
setup menu, and press buttons 4, 5 and 6 simultane-
ously to reset all the functions to the defaults.
Notes:
• When you select a wrong number, press the CLEAR
button to clear the numeric input.
• Refer to the cameras' operating instructions for
details on available shortcuts.
Notes:
• Refer to the operating instructions of the selected
camera for details.
• Move the joystick while holding down the SHIFT
button to move the camera smoothly for presetting
the positions in the camera's SETUP MENU.
4. To exit from the mode, press the MON (ESC) button
then press the AUTO PAN button while pressing the
SHIFT button.
8. To close the camera's SETUP MENU, press the F1 but-
ton while holding down the SHIFT button.
The CAM SETUP indicator goes off.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Changing to Black and White
■ Patrol Learn and Play
Images
A routine of manual operations can be stored for a specific
time and later reproduced repetitively.
This function gets the clear camera images on the monitor
while shooting the objects under low light conditions.
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 106
Monitor Selection and p. 107 Camera Selection.)
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 106
Monitor Selection and p. 107 Camera Selection.)
2. Press the AUTO PAN button three times while holding
down the SHIFT button.
2. Press the AUTO PAN button two times while holding
down the SHIFT button.
"LEARN" will appear on the LED display of the controller
as shown in the figure.
"BLACK (black)" will appear on the LED display of the
controller as shown in the figure.
F1
ACK
RESET
F1
ACK
RESET
CAM SETUP
SUSPEND
ALL RESET
TOUR SEQ
CALL
F2
GROUP SEQ
PRESET
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
CAM SETUP
SUSPEND
ALL RESET
TOUR SEQ
CALL
F2
GROUP SEQ
PRESET
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
PROGRAM
PRESET
AUX1 OFF
ALL
REW/FF
INDEX
STILL
PREV
NEXT
MON STATUS
PROGRAM
PRESET
AUX1 OFF
ALL
REW/FF
INDEX
STILL
AUTO PAN
CAM FUNC
PREV
NEXT
MON STATUS
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
STEP
EL-ZOOM
RECORDER
STOP
PAUSE
ALM H
AUTO PAN
CAM FUNC
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
STEP
EL-ZOOM
RECORDER
STOP
PAUSE
ALM H
DEF OFF
DEF ON
STOP
PLAY
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
CLEAR
OSD
DEF OFF
DEF ON
STOP
PLAY
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
CLEAR
OSD
LOG OUT
MON LOCK
WIPER
SETUP
SHIFT
MULTI SCREEN SEL
LOG OUT
MON LOCK
WIPER
SETUP
SHIFT
MULTI SCREEN SEL
3. Press the button 1 to change the image from the color
mode to the black and white mode on the active moni-
tor.
3. To save the patrol sequence, follow the procedure
below.
"BL ON (BLACK ON)" appears on the LED display to
indicate the selected mode.
q Press the button 2, then press the CAM (SET) but-
ton.
"LE r" appears on the LED display.
w Operate the camera manually.
e Press the button 3.
4. Press the button 2 to change the black and white image
to the color image on the active monitor.
"BL OF (BLACK OFF)" appears on the LED display to
indicate the selected mode.
The operation data is saved and "LE S" appears on
the LED display.
5. Press the MON (ESC) button to exit from the mode.
4. To reproduce the operation data, follow the procedure
below.
Note: When the black and white parameter is set to
AUTO in the camera's SETUP MENU, this function
is disabled.
q Press the button 1.
"LE P" appears on the LED display.
w Press the button 3.
The reproduction is ended.
5. To exit from the mode, press the MON (ESC) button.
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. To exit from the mode, press the MON (ESC) button,
then press the AUTO PAN button while holding down
the SHIFT button.
■ Camera Panning Function
There are three panning modes available as follows: auto
pan, sort mode and sequence mode. Refer to p. 16
Camera-related Functions for details on each mode.
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 106
Monitor Selection and p. 107 Camera Selection.)
2. Press the AUTO PAN button four times while holding
down the SHIFT button.
"PAN" will appear on the LED display of the controller as
shown in the figure.
F1
ACK
RESET
CAM SETUP
SUSPEND
ALL RESET
TOUR SEQ
CALL
F2
GROUP SEQ
PRESET
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
PROGRAM
PRESET
AUX1 OFF
ALL
REW/FF
INDEX
STILL
PREV
NEXT
MON STATUS
AUTO PAN
CAM FUNC
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
STEP
EL-ZOOM
RECORDER
STOP
PAUSE
ALM H
DEF OFF
DEF ON
STOP
PLAY
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
CLEAR
OSD
LOG OUT
MON LOCK
WIPER
SETUP
SHIFT
MULTI SCREEN SEL
3. Press the assigned numeric button shown below to acti-
vate the panning function of the selected camera.
The LED display indicates the selected mode as fol-
lows.
1: Activates AUTO PAN "PA PA".
2: Activates SORT PAN "PA SO".
3: Activates SEQUENCE PAN "PA SE".
Note: The AUTO MODE parameter previously set in the
camera's SETUP MENU will be automatically
replaced to the activated function parameter.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAMERA SITE ACCESSORIES CONTROL
■ Auxiliary Control
■ Receiver Control
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 106
Monitor Selection and p. 107 Camera Selection.)
The following functions are available only when the
receivers are included in the system and the specified
camera housing is installed.
2. Press the button 3 while holding down the SHIFT button
to turn on the user's auxiliary switch 1 of the receiver.
Press the button 2 while holding down the SHIFT but-
ton to turn off the user's auxiliary switch 1 of the receiv-
er.
■ Camera Housing Control
Wiper Control
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 106
Monitor Selection and p. 107 Camera Selection.)
3. Press the button 6 while holding down the SHIFT button
to turn on the user's auxiliary switch 2 of the receiver.
Press the button 5 while holding down the SHIFT button
to turn off the user's auxiliary switch 2 of the receiver.
2. Press the CAM (SET) button while holding down the
SHIFT button to turn on the housing wiper of the camera
until buttons are released.
TOUR SEQ
NEXT
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
TOUR SEQ
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
AUX1 OFF
ALL
STILL
AUX1 OFF
ALL
STILL
MON STATUS
NEXT
MON STATUS
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
EL-ZOOM
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
EL-ZOOM
PAUSE
ALM H
PAUSE
ALM H
DEF OFF
DEF ON
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
DEF OFF
DEF ON
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
MON LOCK
WIPER
SHIFT
MULTI SCREEN SEL
MON LOCK
WIPER
SHIFT
MULTI SCREEN SEL
Defroster Control
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 106
Monitor Selection and p. 107 Camera Selection.)
2. Press the button 9 while holding down the SHIFT button
to turn on the housing defroster of the camera.
3. To turn off the defroster, press the button 8 while hold-
ing down the SHIFT button.
TOUR SEQ
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
AUX1 OFF
ALL
STILL
NEXT
MON STATUS
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
EL-ZOOM
PAUSE
ALM H
DEF OFF
DEF ON
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
MON LOCK
WIPER
SHIFT
MULTI SCREEN SEL
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RUNNING SEQUENCE
8. Press the PREV button to move the sequence one
frame to the previous step from the step that was previ-
ously paused by pressing the PAUSE button.
9. Press the STOP button to stop a tour sequence on the
active monitor and return to spot monitoring.
■ Tour Sequence
The following functions are available if a tour sequence has
been previously configured through SETUP MENU or WJ-
SX150A Administrator Console. Any tour sequence can be
assigned to any monitors.
■ Group Sequence
The following function is available only if a group sequence
has been previously established in WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console.
As described earlier, a group sequence determines the
assignment of monitors and cameras. Therefore, monitor
selection is not required.
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 106
Monitor Selection and p. 107 Camera Selection.)
2. To select the desired tour sequence number, press the
numeric buttons.
3. When you have selected a wrong number, press the
CLEAR button to clear the numeric input.
1. Press the numeric buttons to select a desired group
sequence number.
4. Press the TOUR SEQ button to run the tour sequence in
the forward direction on the active monitor.
2. When you have selected a wrong number, press the
CLEAR button to clear the numeric input.
3. Press the GROUP SEQ button to run a group sequence
forward on the assigned monitors.
F1
ACK
RESET
CAM SETUP
SUSPEND
ALL RESET
TOUR SEQ
CALL
F2
GROUP SEQ
PRESET
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
PROGRAM
PRESET
AUX1 OFF
ALL
REW/FF
INDEX
STILL
PREV
NEXT
MON STATUS
F1
ACK
RESET
AUTO PAN
CAM FUNC
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
STEP
EL-ZOOM
RECORDER
CAM SETUP
SUSPEND
ALL RESET
TOUR SEQ
CALL
STOP
PAUSE
ALM H
F2
GROUP SEQ
PRESET
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
DEF OFF
DEF ON
STOP
PLAY
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
PROGRAM
PRESET
AUX1 OFF
ALL
REW/FF
INDEX
STILL
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
CLEAR
OSD
PREV
NEXT
MON STATUS
AUTO PAN
CAM FUNC
LOG OUT
MON LOCK
WIPER
SETUP
SHIFT
MULTI SCREEN SEL
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
STEP
EL-ZOOM
RECORDER
STOP
PAUSE
ALM H
DEF OFF
DEF ON
STOP
PLAY
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
CLEAR
OSD
5. Press the PAUSE button to pause a tour sequence on
the active monitor.
LOG OUT
MON LOCK
WIPER
SETUP
SHIFT
MULTI SCREEN SEL
The "P" sign (indicating the pause status) is displayed
at the tour sequence number on the active monitor, and
a camera number currently selected appears on the
LED display.
4. Press the PAUSE, NEXT or PREV button to operate the
group sequence. Refer to Step 5 to 8 of Tour Sequence
in this page for how to use these buttons.
6. Press the PAUSE button to restart a tour sequence for-
ward from the next step that was previously paused by
pressing the PAUSE button.
5. To stop the sequence, select one of the monitors that
are being run on the selected group sequence, then
press the STOP button.
7. Press the NEXT button to move the sequence one
frame to the next step from the step that was previously
paused by pressing the PAUSE button.
Note: If an alarm is activated during a sequence pause, the
sequence runs again after the unit recovers from the
alarm mode.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MONITOR DISPLAY CONTROL
■ Displaying All the Items
■ On-screen Display (OSD)
Toggle the button 5 while holding down the OSD button.
(1), (2), (3) and (4) will appear/disappear on/from the active
monitor.
Control
The procedure described below lets you determine the dis-
play parameters, such as camera title, clock and status, on
and off on the active monitor screen.
Before controlling each item, monitor selection is neces-
sary. (Refer to p. 106 Monitor Selection.)
■ On-screen Display (OSD)
Position Control
08/21/2002 12:50:28 PM
(1)
The procedure described below lets you determine the dis-
play positions, such as camera title, clock and status, on
the active monitor screen.
Clock
(4)
(3)
08/21/2002 12:50:59 PM
M1 K1 T01
C01 camera title
ALARM10*
(2)
F2
GROUP SEQ
TOUR SEQ
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 OFF AUX1 ON
ALL
REW/FF
INDEX
STILL
PREV
NEXT
MON STATUS
AUX2 OFF AUX2 ON
STEP
EL-ZOOM
RECORDER
STOP
PAUSE
ALM H
VLD H
SYS S
M1 K1 T01
C01 camera title
DEF OFF
DEF ON
STOP
PLAY
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
ALARM10*
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
OSD
MON LOCK
WIPER
SET UP
SHIFT
MULTI SCREEN SEL
Camera title
Event
Monitor status
F2
GROUP SEQ
TOUR SEQ
NEXT
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
■ Displaying the Clock
AUX1 OFF AUX1 ON
ALL
REW/FF
INDEX
STILL
PREV
MON STATUS
Toggle the button 1 while holding down the OSD button.
(1) will appear/disappear on/from the active monitor.
AUX2 OFF AUX2 ON
STEP
EL-ZOOM
RECORDER
STOP
PAUSE
ALM H
VLD H
SYS S
DEF OFF
DEF ON
STOP
PLAY
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
OSD
■ Displaying the Camera Title
Toggle the button 2 while holding down the OSD button.
(2) will appear/disappear on/from the active monitor.
MON LOCK
WIPER
SET UP
SHIFT
UP
MULTI SCREEN SEL
■ Displaying the Event
L
R
Toggle the button 3 while holding down the OSD button.
(3) will appear/disappear on/from the active monitor.
DOWN
■ Displaying the Monitor Status*
Toggle the button 4 while holding down the OSD button.
(4)* will appear/disappear on/from the active monitor.
* Monitor number, system controller name, tour number and
recorder number
■ Moving the Clock Display
Move the joystick while holding down the OSD, SHIFT and
1 buttons. (1) will move to the desired direction.
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The columns in the table indicate the states as shown in the
figure.
■ Moving the Camera Title Display
Move the joystick while holding down the OSD, SHIFT and
2 buttons. (2) will move to the desired direction.
MON:
CAM:
Monitor number
Logical camera number (01 to 99)
Recorder number (R0 to R4)*
No number indicates no camera is
selected.
■ Moving the Event Display
Move the joystick while holding down the OSD, SHIFT and
3 buttons. (3) will move to the desired direction.
MODE:
Lists the display mode on the
monitors.
SPOT:
Tnn:
Spot mode
Tour Sequence mode (nn is the
tour sequence number.)
Camera Setup mode
WJ-SX150A Setup mode
Alarm Active mode
■ Moving the Monitor Status*
Move the joystick while holding down the OSD, SHIFT and
4 buttons. (4) will move to the desired direction.
CAM:
SET:
ALARM:
ACK:
Alarm ACK mode
* Monitor number, controller number and monitor mode
VLD H:
ALM H:
SYS S:
Video Loss History Table
Alarm History Table
System Status Table
■ Moving All the Items
Move the joystick while holding down the OSD, SHIFT and
5 buttons. (1), (2), (3), and (4) will move to the desired
direction.
RECORDER: Recorder mode**
Lists the system controller name
KB:
(K1 to K4) or PSD.
Lists the operator number
Lists the priority number
OPE:
PRI:
* R0 to R4 shows the following.
■ System Status Table
The table shows the current system status.
Recorder number
Recorder
R0
R1
R2
R3
R4
Master recorder
Slave 1 recorder
Slave 2 recorder
Slave 3 recorder
Slave 4 recorder
1. Select the desired monitor. (Refer to p. 106 Monitor
Selection.)
2. Press the button 9 while holding down the OSD button.
"OSD" will appear on the LED display, and the SYSTEM
STATUS table will appear on the active monitor as
shown in the figure.
** When this parameter is selected, a recorder number is
displayed in the CAM area.
3. To exit from the mode, press the CLEAR button.
SYSTEM STATUS
MON
1
CAM MODE
KB
K1
K2
K4
OPE
12345
2
PRI
30
2
01
99
04
R1
T01
2
SPOT
ALARM
RECORDER PC
3
4
4
1
30
1
F1
ACK
RESET
CAM SETUP
SUSPEND
ALL RESET
CALL
F2
GROUP SEQ
TOUR SEQ
NEXT
PRESET
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
PROGRAM
PRESET
AUX1 OFF
ALL
REW/FF
INDEX
STILL
PREV
MON STATUS
AUTO PAN
CAM FUNC
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
STEP
EL-ZOOM
RECORDER
STOP
PAUSE
ALM H
DEF OFF
DEF ON
STOP
PLAY
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
CLEAR
OSD
LOG OUT
MON LOCK
WIPER
SETUP
SHIFT
MULTI SCREEN SEL
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Alarm History Table
■ Video Loss History Table
There are 100 alarm records stored in chronological order
There are 100 video loss detection records stored in
in 10 pages of tables.
chronological order in 10 pages of table.
1. Select the desired monitor. (Refer to p. 106 Monitor
Selection.)
1. Select the desired monitor. (Refer to p. 106 Monitor
Selection.)
2. Press the button 7 while holding down the OSD button.
"OSD" will appear on the LED display, and the ALARM
HISTORY table will appear on the active monitor as
shown in the figure.
2. Press the button 8 while holding down the OSD button.
"OSD" will appear on the LED display, and the VIDEO
LOSS HISTORY table will appear on the active monitor
as shown in the figure below.
ALARM HISTORY
1 of 2
VIDEO LOSS HISTORY
1 of 2
NO YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS ALARM EVENT
NO YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS CH EVENT
016 2002/08/21 18:59:08 80
015 2002/08/21 18:58:08 80
014 2002/08/21 18:57:08 80
013 2002/08/21 18:55:08 07
012 2002/08/21 18:54:08 07
011 2002/08/21 18:53:08 07
010 2002/08/21 18:53:00 09
009 2002/08/21 18:52:08 09
008 2002/08/21 18:51:08 06
007 2002/08/21 18:50:08 06
ALARM
ACK
012 2002/08/21 18:59:08 99 VIDEO RECOVER
011 2002/08/21 18:58:08 14 VIDEO RECOVER
010 2002/08/21 18:57:08 99 VIDEO LOSS
009 2002/08/21 18:55:08 07 VIDEO LOSS
008 2002/08/21 18:54:08 R0 SW RECOVER
007 2002/08/21 18:53:08 16 VIDEO LOSS
006 2002/08/21 18:53:00 09 VIDEO LOSS
005 2002/08/21 18:52:08 R0 SW LOSS
004 2002/08/21 18:51:08 S1 SLAVE DOWN
003 2002/08/21 18:50:08 S1 SLAVE RECOVER
RESET
ALARM
ACK
RESET
ALARM
RESET
ALARM
ACK
F1
ACK
RESET
F1
ACK
RESET
CAM SETUP
SUSPEND
ALL RESET
TOUR SEQ
CAM SETUP
SUSPEND
ALL RESET
TOUR SEQ
CALL
CALL
F2
GROUP SEQ
PRESET
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
F2
GROUP SEQ
PRESET
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
PROGRAM
PRESET
AUX1 OFF
ALL
REW/FF
INDEX
STILL
PROGRAM
PRESET
AUX1 OFF
ALL
REW/FF
INDEX
STILL
PREV
NEXT
MON STATUS
PREV
NEXT
MON STATUS
AUTO PAN
CAM FUNC
AUTO PAN
CAM FUNC
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
STEP
EL-ZOOM
RECORDER
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
STEP
EL-ZOOM
RECORDER
STOP
PAUSE
ALM H
STOP
PAUSE
ALM H
DEF OFF
DEF ON
STOP
PLAY
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
DEF OFF
DEF ON
STOP
PLAY
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
CLEAR
OSD
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
CLEAR
OSD
LOG OUT
MON LOCK
WIPER
SETUP
SHIFT
MULTI SCREEN SEL
LOG OUT
MON LOCK
WIPER
SETUP
SHIFT
MULTI SCREEN SEL
The columns in the table indicate the states as follows:
The columns in the table indicate the states as follows:
DATE: Lists the date and time when the alarm state
changes.
DATE: Lists the date and time when the video loss
state changes.
ALARM: Lists the alarm number (01 - 99).
EVENT: Lists the event when the alarm state changes.
CH:
Lists logical camera number, slave unit num-
ber or recorder number that is connected to
the system.
3. Press the NEXT button to select the next page of the
history, and press the PREV button to back up to the
previous page.
EVENT: Lists the event when the video loss state
changes.
4. To exit from the mode, press the CLEAR button.
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ALARM CONTROL
■ Alarm Mode
■ Operation during an Alarm Mode
When alarm (sensor) is accepted, the matrix switcher's
operation mode changes to the alarm mode. Then, the sys-
tem operates as follows:
• The camera image (alarm image) appears on the moni-
tor.
While an alarm mode is active, the following are available
from the system controller:
• Operating the camera with the alarm input (ACK)
• Resetting the alarm (RESET/ALL RESET)
• Suspending the alarm (ALM SUSPENDED)
In the factory default setting, the alarm inputs 1 to 16
are associated with the same-numbered camera input
connectors. All the video output signals are sent to
Monitor 1. For example, when the alarm (sensor) con-
nected to the alarm input 1 becomes active, the camera
input connector 1’s image appears on Monitor 1.
• "ALARMnn" appears on the monitor.
■ Operation of an Alarm-related
Camera (ACK)
You can operate the camera with the alarm input as follows:
(nn is the alarm number).
ACK
RESET
SUSPEND
ALL RESET
TOUR SEQ
ALARM01
GROUP SEQ
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
AUX1 OFF
ALL
REW/FF
STILL
PREV
NEXT
MON STATUS
• Alarm output signals are supplied from Alarm Output 1
to 4 (#10, 11, 23 and 24) of the ALARM port (25-pin D-
sub connector) at the rear panel. Alarm Output 1 to 4 is
associated with MONITOR OUT 1 to 4. For example,
when an alarm input signal is activated on MONITOR
OUT 1, the unit supplies an alarm output signal from
Alarm Output 1.
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
STEP
EL-ZOOM
ACK
PAUSE
ALM H
DEF OFF
DEF ON
PLAY
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
OSD
MON LOCK
WIPER
SHIFT
MULTI SCREEN SEL
• The monitor and alarm number will appear on the LED
display of system controllers. At the same time, the
alarm indicator will blink, the monitor indicator will light
up, and the camera indicator will go out.
1. Select a monitor which displays "ALARM".
2. Press the ACK button.
"ACK" will appear on the monitor with an alarm input.
The camera with an alarm input will become operable.
3. Operate camera with the system controller.
Pan/Tilt, zoom, focus, and iris are available.
When selecting another monitor, "ACK" will disappear
from the display. The matrix switcher system will return
to the alarm mode.
There are two operation mode when more than one
alarm signal has been accepted by the unit that is
assigned to the same monitor.
• Sequence mode: An alarm operation is replaced by
another one after the dwell time ends.
• Hold mode: An initial alarm operation is continued
even after another alarm input is accepted.
Notes:
• The association of the alarm inputs with cameras and
monitors are changeable in SETUP MENU or WJ-
SX150A Administrator Console. (Refer to pp. 67 and 68/
p. 89.)
• Alarm input will be automatically reset in 30 seconds.
The auto-recovery time is configurable through SETUP
MENU or WJ-SX150A Administrator Console.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Resetting the Alarm Inputs
■ Suspending the Alarm Inputs
There are two alarm reset functions:
Use this function when you do not want to be disturbed by
• Alarm reset (resetting the alarm inputs per monitor)
• Alarm all reset (resetting all the alarm inputs)
an alarm input, for example, during the setup procedures.
ACK
RESET
SUSPEND
ALL RESET
TOUR SEQ
■ Alarm Reset
GROUP SEQ
REW/FF
RESET
PREV
NEXT
ALM SUSPENDED
ALL RESET
STEP
TOUR SEQ
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
PAUSE
AUX1 OFF
STILL
PLAY
PAUSE
OSD
1. Select a monitor which displays "ALARM".
2. To reset the alarms, press the RESET button.
"ALARMnn" will disappear from the selected moni-
tor.
SHIFT
1. Press the ACK/SUSPEND button while holding down
the SHIFT button.
"ALM SUSPENDED" will appear on the monitor.
2. To cancel alarm suspension, press the ACK/SUSPEND
button while holding down the SHIFT button again.
"ALM SUSPENDED" will disappear from the monitor.
When alarms have been reset from all the monitors,
the LED display and indicators of system controllers
will work as follows for recovery.
• The LED display will return to the state before
the alarm input.
• The alarm indicator will go out.
• The CAM indicator will return to the state before
the alarm input.
Notes:
• An alarm continues to operate even after it is suspend-
ed.
•
If you suspend an alarm while an alarm image is dis-
played, "ALM SUSPENDED" will not appear on the moni-
tor. Reset the alarm, and then suspend it again.
Note: When more than one alarm is input and they are
associated with the same monitor, they cannot be reset
one by one.
■ Alarm All Reset
1. Press the RESET button while holding down the SHIFT
button.
RESET
ALL RESET
TOUR SEQ
NEXT
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
AUX1 OFF
ALL
STILL
MON STATUS
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
EL-ZOOM
PAUSE
ALM H
DEF OFF
DEF ON
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
MON LOCK
WIPER
SHIFT
MULTI SCREEN SEL
2. The monitor, the LED display and the indicator will
change as follows:
"ALARMnn" will disappear from all the monitor.
The LED display will return to the state before the
alarm input.
The alarm indicator will go out.
The CAM indicator will return to the state before the
alarm input.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MUX
MULTIPLEXER OPERATIONS
Multiplexer board WJ-SXB151 is an optional board.
It enables multiscreen display, electronic zooming, still pic-
ture and multiscreen sequence.
■ Multiscreen Sequence
Camera images are switched automatically in a sequence
mode.
The sequence mode (QUAD, 3+1, 8+1) is configurable
through WJ-SX150A Administrator Console.
(Refer to p. 99 Sequence Mode of the Multiplexer Mode
window for details.)
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to Multiscreen
Segment Switching.)
It also enables the operation of Digital Disk Recorder WJ-
HD100 Series or time-lapse VCR, when connected to them.
Note: Before the use, it is necessary to install the
Multiplexer board in the matrix switcher and config-
ure the system through SETUP MENU and WJ-
SX150A Administrator Console. [Refer to p. 32
Installing the Multiplexer Board, p. 63 WJ-SX150A
SETUP MENU (OSD), and p. 79 WJ-SX150A
ADMINISTRATOR CONSOLE.]
2. Press the button 7 while holding down the SHIFT but-
ton.
A sequence of multiscreen pictures is displayed
according to the WJ-SX150A Administrator Console's
configuration.
■ Monitoring the Camera Picture
3. To cancel the sequence, press the button 0 while hold-
ing down the SHIFT button.
■ Multiscreen Segment Switching
Note: The sequence can also be cancelled by selecting
the desired camera. (In this case, you can automatically
exit from the recorder mode.)
1. Select the desired monitor. (Refer to p. 106 Monitor
Selection.)
2. To select a Multiplexer, press the corresponding
numeric button.
■ Still Multiscreen Picture
Still pictures can also be displayed in a multiscreen.
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to Multiscreen
Segment Switching.)
Multiplexer board
Master Multiplexer board 0 (You can skip pressing this button.)
Slave 1 Multiplexer board
Slave 2 Multiplexer board
Slave 3 Multiplexer board
Slave 4 Multiplexer board
Numeric button
1
2
3
4
2. Press the numeric button corresponding to the camera
number.
3. Press the RECORDER button. The system will enter the
recorder mode. The indicator beside the RECORDER
button will light up, and the images from the recorder
are displayed on the active monitor in multiscreen seg-
ments.
3. Press the button 1 while holding down the SHIFT but-
ton.
The selected camera image will change into the still
picture.
"STILL" and the camera title alternately blinks on the
monitor.
4. Press the button 0 while holding down the SHIFT but-
ton. Every time you press the button, the multiscreen
segment patterns are switched. (The following is the
factory default setting.)
4. To cancel the still picture, press the button 1 while hold-
ing down the SHIFT button again.
Notes:
4 (segments) → 9 → 16 → 4
• “STILL” does not appear when the still display is set to
OFF.
• When you skip Step 2 and do Step 3, all the channels
displayed in the multiscreen segments will be changed
into the still pictures.
5. To return to the spot display, select the desired camera.
Note: If you activate Quad Shift in Multiplexer Mode (refer
to p. 98) window of WJ-SX150A Administrator Console,
the multiscreen segment patterns can be switched as
follows.
4A (Page 1 of the quad – Camera 1, 2, 3, and 4) → 4B
(Page 2 - Camera 5, 6, 7 and 8) → 4C (Page 3 -
Camera 9, 10, 11 and 12) → 4D (Page 4 - Camera 13,
14, 15 and 16) → 9 (segments) → 16 → 4A
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. To cancel the zooming, press the button 4 while holding
down the SHIFT button again.
■ Still Playback Spot Picture
The playback spot picture can be changed into the still pic-
ture.
Note: To use this function, you need to connect a WJ-
HD100 Series recorder or time-lapse VCR to the unit.
Note: Still picture is not available while zooming is acti-
vated.
Note: When a WJ-HD100 Series recorder or a Panasonic
time-lapse VCR is connected to the unit, recording sta-
tus will appear on the monitor in the recorder mode.
When the normal recording is activated, “REC” will
appear on the monitor. When the alarm recording is
activated, “REC ALM” will appear.
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to Multiscreen
Segment Switching.)
2. Press the PLAY button. (Refer to p. 131 Normal
Playback.) The system will enter the playback mode.
3. Select a camera channel by pressing a numeric button
and then pressing the CAM (SET) button. The selected
camera image will be displayed in a spot picture.
REC
REC ALM
4. Press the button 1 while holding the SHIFT button. The
selected camera image will change into the still picture.
5. To cancel the still picture, press the button 1 while hold-
ing down the SHIFT button again.
Notes:
• Still picture is not available while zooming is activat-
ed.
• Even when still picture is displayed, the playback of
the recorder/time-lapse VCR continues.
■ Electronic Zooming (EL-ZOOM)
The playback spot picture can be electrically zoomed.
Note: To use this function, you need to connect a WJ-
HD100 Series recorder or time-lapse VCR to the unit.
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 120 Multiscreen
Segment Switching.)
2. Press the PLAY button. (Refer to p. 131 Normal
Playback.) The system will enter the playback mode.
3. Select a camera channel by pressing a numeric button
and then pressing the CAM (SET) button. The selected
camera image will be displayed in a playback spot pic-
ture.
4. Press the button 4 while holding down the SHIFT but-
ton.
“+” sings will appear on the image.
5. To move the “+” signs within the picture, move the joy-
stick.
6. Press the button 4 while holding down the SHIFT but-
ton. The area surrounded by the “+” signs will be
zoomed up.
7. To move the zoom area, move the joystick.
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATING PROCEDURES
(PS·DATA)
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHEN USING A PS·DATA SYSTEM CONTROLLER
This manual describes the operating procedures which are specifically related to WJ-SX150A.
For the basic operating procedures such as log-in/log-out, camera selection, and camera control, etc., refer to the system con-
troller's operating instructions.
The following are different from the terminal mode when you use the system controller via the PS·Data protocol.
• Camera selection, camera control, camera site accessories control are in accordance with the PS·Data System operating
procedures. Refer to the system controller's operating instructions.
• You cannot reset an alarm one by one per monitor. However, you can reset all the alarms at a time (ALL RESET).
• You cannot acknowledge an alarm.
• You cannot use the auto log-in function of the unit. To use this function, use a terminal-mode system controller.
• You cannot use the auto log-out function of the unit.
• You cannot move the clock, camera title, event, and/or monitor status display with a PS·Data controller. Use a terminal-
mode system controller.
• Operators using the PS·Data system controller have the highest priority to all those using the terminal-mode system con-
trollers.
• PS·Data doesn’t support user-management, and you cannot configure the PS·Data operator registration neither through
SETUP MENU nor WJ-SX150A Administrator Console.
Notes:
• When you select a monitor with a PS·Data system controller, you might enter its number as you do in the terminal mode.
However, the matrix switcher regards a monitor as a unit, you need to select it by the unit number. (Refer to p. 125.)
• This unit is counted as 4 PS·Data units. Confirm the total number of the PS·Data units in your system.
(Up to 16 PS·Data units are available.)
• If you carry out an operation not designated, the PROHIBITED indicator on the system controller will light up and your oper-
ation is prohibited. To cancel the prohibition, press the MON(ESC) button.
• If you activate/cancel alarm suspension with a terminal-mode system controller, the system will return to the state con-
trolled by PS·Data system controllers after given time.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MONITOR CONTROL
Refer to the system controller’s operating instructions
before you login the system. After the log-in procedure, the
following operations are available to control the system.
The operation begins with selecting a monitor, then the
selected camera appears the active monitor.
■ Priority Lock
You can apply or release priority lock by entering the func-
tion code. Monitor display is the same as those of terminal
mode. (Refer to p. 106 for the illustrations.)
1. Select the desired monitor. (Refer to Monitor Selection.)
2. Press the SHIFT button, and enter 101 by pressing the
numeric buttons.
■ Monitor Selection
Unit addresses are given to each monitor.
3. Press the FUNCTION button. The function will be exe-
cuted.
Mon 1
1
Mon 2
2
Mon 3
3
Mon 4
4
If the priority lock mode is selected, the monitor number
will inversely appear on the active monitor.
The following is how to select a monitor.
4. To release the priority lock, do Step 2 and 3 again.
1. Press the numeric button(s) to select the desired moni-
tor's unit address.
Note: This function will prevent operators in the terminal
mode from gaining control of a monitor. However, oper-
ators via the PS·Data protocol can still gain control.
2. Press the UNIT button.
The selected monitor will be activated.
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RUNNING SEQUENCE
■ Tour Sequence
■ Group Sequence
The following functions are available if a tour sequence has
been previously configured through SETUP MENU or WJ-
SX150A Administrator Console. Any tour sequence can be
assigned to any monitors.
The following function is available only if a group sequence
has been previously established in WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console. The group sequence has ID num-
bers. Group 1 is 91, Group 2 is 92, Group 3 is 93, and
Group 4 is 94.
1. Select the desired monitor. (Refer to p. 125 Monitor
Selection.)
As described earlier, a group sequence determines the
assignment of monitors and cameras. Therefore, monitor
selection is not required.
2. To select the desired tour sequence number, press the
numeric buttons.
1. Press the numeric buttons to select a desired group
sequence ID number.
3. Press the SEQ button to run the tour sequence in the
forward direction on the active monitor.
2. Press the SEQ button to run a group sequence forward
on the assigned monitors.
4. Press the SEQ PAUSE button to pause a tour sequence
on the active monitor.
3. Press the SEQ PAUSE button to pause a tour sequence
on the active monitor.
A series of camera picture appear in pause on the mon-
itor screen.
A series of camera picture appear in pause on the mon-
itor screen.
5. Press the SEQ PAUSE button again to restart a tour
sequence forward from the next step that was previous-
ly paused by pressing the SEQ PAUSE button.
4. Press the SEQ PAUSE button again to restart a group
sequence forward from the next step that was previous-
ly paused by pressing the SEQ PAUSE button.
6. Press the SHIFT button, and then press the + button to
move the sequence one frame to the next step from the
step that was previously paused by pressing the SEQ
PAUSE button.
5. Press the SHIFT button, and then press the + button to
move the sequence one frame to the next step from the
step that was previously paused by pressing the SEQ
PAUSE button.
Press the SHIFT button, and then press the - button to
move the sequence one frame to the previous step from
the step that was previously paused by pressing the
SEQ PAUSE button.
Press the SHIFT button, and then press the – button to
move the sequence one frame to the previous step from
the step that was previously paused by pressing the
SEQ PAUSE button.
7. Select a camera (refer to the system controller's operat-
ing instructions) to stop the sequence. The monitor will
return to the spot mode.
6. Select a camera (refer to the system controller’s operat-
ing instructions) to stop the sequence. The assigned
monitors will return to the spot mode.
Note: If an alarm is activated during a sequence pause, the
sequence runs again after the unit recovers from the
alarm mode.
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MONITOR DISPLAY CONTROL
The procedure described below lets you determine on-screen display (OSD) items, such as camera title, clock and status, on
and off on the active monitor screen.
Before controlling each item, monitor selection is necessary. (Refer to p. 125 Monitor Selection.)
1. Press the SHIFT button, and then press the numeric buttons corresponding to the function code.
(Refer to the table.)
2. Press the FUNCTION button. The function will be executed.
Function
Code
104
105
106
107
19
Controller Status
Note
Displaying the clock
Pressing again will hide the display.
Pressing again will hide the display.
Pressing again will hide the display.
Pressing again will hide the display.
Pressing again will hide the display.
Pressing again will return to the normal display.
Pressing again will return to the normal display.
Displaying the camera title
Displaying the event
Displaying the monitor status
Displaying all the items
Displaying System Status
Displaying Video Loss History
102
103
108
Displaying the next page of
Video Loss History
Displaying the previous page of 109
Video Loss History
Notes:
• Alarm History Table doesn't have a function code. When displaying the table, press the ALM RECALL button instead of
Step 1 and 2 above. The ALARM HISTORY table will appear on the active monitor.
• You cannot control OSD display position.
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ALARM CONTROL
■ Alarm Mode
■ Resetting All the Alarm Inputs
When alarm (sensor) is accepted, the matrix switcher's
operation mode changes into the alarm mode. Then, the
system operates as follows:
• The camera image (alarm image) appears on the moni-
tor.
You can reset all the alarm input signals at a time.
1. Select a monitor which displays "ALARM".
(Refer to the figure on p. 118.)
In the factory default setting, the alarm inputs 1 to 16
are associated with the same-numbered camera input
connectors. All the video output signals are sent to
Monitor 1. For example, when the alarm (sensor) con-
nected to the alarm input 1 becomes active, the camera
input connector 1’s image appears on Monitor 1.
• "ALARMnn" appears on the monitor.
2. Press the ALM RESET button.
All the alarms will be reset.
Then, the LED display and indicators will return to the
state before the alarm input.
Note: You cannot reset the alarm input signals one by one.
(nn is the alarm number).
• Alarm output signals are supplied from Alarm Output 1
to 4 (#10, 11, 23 and 24) of the ALARM port (25-pin D-
sub connector) at the rear panel. Alarm Output 1 to 4 is
associated with MONITOR OUT 1 to 4. For example,
when an alarm input signal is activated on MONITOR
OUT 1, the unit supplies an alarm output signal from
Alarm Output 1.
• The monitor and alarm number will appear on the LED
display of system controllers. At the same time, the
alarm indicator will blink, the monitor indicator will light
up, and the camera indicator will go out.
■ Suspending All the Alarm Inputs
Use this function when you do not want to be disturbed by
an alarm input, for example, during the setup procedures.
1. To suspend all the alarm input signals, press the ALM
SUSPEND button.
The indicator beside the button will light up and "ALM
SUSPENDED" will appear on the monitor.
(Refer to the figure on p. 119.)
2. To cancel alarm suspension, do Step 1 again.
Notes:
• The association of the alarm inputs with cameras and
monitors are changeable in SETUP MENU or WJ-
SX150A Administrator Console. (Refer to pp. 67 and 68/
p. 89.)
• Alarm input will be automatically reset in 30 seconds.
The auto-recovery time is configurable through SETUP
MENU or WJ-SX150A Administrator Console.
Notes:
• The alarm suspension is applied to all system units,
not to a selected one.
• An alarm which was input before the suspension
will continue to operate.
■ Operation during an Alarm Mode
While an alarm mode is active, you can do the following:
• Resetting all the alarm inputs (ALM RESET)
• Suspending all the alarm inputs (ALM SUSPENDED)
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXPANDED FUNCTION
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WJ-HD500 SERIES CONTROL (TERMINAL MODE)
Matrix switcher can control Digital Disk Recorder WJ-
HD500 Series. The following is the procedure of WJ-HD500
Series SETUP MENU.
NEXT button: Increments a parameter.
PREV button: Decrements a parameter.
MON (ESC) button: Returns to SETUP MENU or the
previous menu.
Notes:
• The following operating procedures are for the terminal
mode. If you are using a PS·Data system controller,
refer to p. 141.
UP
• When a Multiplexer board is installed in the unit, you
can neither connect nor control a WJ-HD500 Series
recorder. You need to remove the board from the unit.
L
R
DOWN
F1
ACK
RESET
■ Displaying WJ-HD500 Series
SETUP MENU
To display WJ-HD500 Series SETUP MENU, follow the pro-
cedure below.
CAM SETUP
SUSPEND
ALL RESET
TOUR SEQ
CALL
F2
GROUP SEQ
PRESET
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
PROGRAM
PRESET
AUX1 OFF
ALL
REW/FF
INDEX
STILL
PREV
NEXT
MON STATUS
AUTO PAN
CAM FUNC
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
STEP
EL-ZOOM
RECORDER
STOP
PAUSE
ALM H
1. Confirm that WJ-HD500 Series is correctly and securely
connected.
DEF OFF
DEF ON
STOP
PLAY
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
CLEAR
OSD
2. Select the desired monitor. (Refer to p. 106 Monitor
Selection.)
LOG OUT
MON LOCK
WIPER
SETUP
SHIFT
MULTI SCREEN SEL
3. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 131 Recorder
Mode.) Then, the selected monitor number and “–H00”
will appear on the LED display.
5. To end the setting and return to the normal view, press
the SETUP button while holding down the SHIFT button
when SETUP MENU is displayed. The system con-
troller's SETUP indicator will go out.
4. Press the SETUP button while holding down the SHIFT
button on the system controller.
WJ-HD500 Series SETUP MENU will appear on the
active monitor and the system controller's SETUP indi-
cator will light up.
The following functions and buttons are valid in SETUP
MENU.
Joystick to UP (■): Moves the cursor up.
Joystick to DOWN (■): Moves the cursor down.
Joystick to L (t): Moves the cursor to the left.
Joystick to R (s): Moves the cursor to the right.
CAM (SET) button: Executes the selections and dis-
plays a submenu.
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Multiscreen Segment Switching
■ Controlling Digital Disk
Multiscreen segment patterns are configurable through WJ-
HD500 SETUP.
(Refer to the recorder’s operating instructions.)
Recorder WJ-HD500 Series
The following are the operating procedures of WJ-HD500
Series via system controller.
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to Recorder Mode.)
Note: Refer to the operating instructions of Digital Disk
Recorder WJ-HD500 Series for details.
2. Press the button 0 while holding down the SHIFT but-
ton. Every time you press the button, the multiscreen
segment patterns are switched. (The following is the
factory default setting.)
■ Recorder Mode
4A (Page 1 of the quad → Camera 1, 2, 3, and 4) → 4B
(Page 2 - Camera 5, 6, 7 and 8) → 4C (Page 3 -
Camera 9, 10, 11 and 12) → 4D (Page 4 – Camera 13,
14, 15 and 16) → 7 (segments) → 9 →10 → 13 → 16 →
4A
Before operating the recorder, it is necessary to enter the
recorder mode.
1. Select the desired monitor. (Refer to p. 106 Monitor
Selection.)
3. To return to the spot display, exit from the recorder
mode.
2. To select a recorder, press the corresponding numeric
button.
Note: Multiscreen segment patterns are not configurable
Recorder
Numeric button
0 (You can skip pressing this button.)
through WJ-SX150A Administrator Console.
Master recorder
Slave 1 recorder
Slave 2 recorder
Slave 3 recorder
Slave 4 recorder
1
2
3
4
■ Normal Playback
1. Enter the recorder mode (Refer to Recorder Mode.)
3. Press the RECORDER button. The system will enter the
recorder mode.
2. To start the playback, press the PLAY button. The sys-
tem will enter the playback mode. Then, the most
recent recorded image will be played back.
• The indicator beside the RECORDER button will
light up, and the images from the recorder are dis-
played on the active monitor in multiscreen seg-
ments.
• The CAMERA indicator will go out and the monitor
number with "-H00" will appear on the LED display.
• To pause the playback, press the PAUSE button.
• To stop the playback, press the STOP button.
UP
L
R
RECORDER
DOWN
F2
GROUP SEQ
TOUR SEQ
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
AUX1 OFF
ALL
REW/FF
INDEX
STILL
PREV
NEXT
MON STATUS
00: Multiscreen display
01 to 16: Spot display (logical camera number)
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
STEP
EL-ZOOM
RECORDER
STOP
PAUSE
ALM H
DEF OFF
DEF ON
STOP
PLAY
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
4. To exit from the recorder mode, select the camera.
(Refer to p. 107 Camera Selection.) The indicator
beside the button will go out. The monitor number and
camera number will appear on the LED display again.
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
OSD
MON LOCK
WIPER
SETUP
SHIFT
MULTI SCREEN SEL
• To resume the playback, press the PLAY button.
• To move forward/backward search during the play-
back, move the joystick rightward/leftward, or press
REW/FF button.
You can also exit from the recorder mode by pressing
the RECORDER button during the recorder mode.
Note: Only one operator can enter the recorder mode.
Joystick to R (B)/FF ( ): Search forward
Joystick to L (A)/REW ( ): Search backward
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• To move forward/backward field advance during
the pause, move the joystick rightward/leftward, or
press REW/FF button.
To stop the alarm recording, press the ALL RESET button
while holding down the SHIFT button.
Joystick to
R
(B)/STEP
(
): Forward field
advance
■ Search Playback
You can search playback images using the Record List or
Thumbnail Display. Every time you press the INDEX button,
the display will change as follows.
Live image → Date-and-time entry form → Record List →
Thumbnail Display → Live image
Joystick to L (A)/STEP ( ): Backward field
advance
• To skip to the previous/next record during the play-
back, move the joystick upward/downward. (Refer
to the recorder’s operating instructions for the
description of record.)
Joystick to UP (D): Skips to the previous record.
Joystick to DOWN (C): Skips to the next record.
• To display the spot picture, press the numeric but-
ton corresponding to the desired camera number,
then press the CAM (SET) button. Then, the active
monitor number with "-H** (** is the logical camera
number)" will appear on the LED display.
• Date-and-time Search Playback
The recorded images can be searched for through the date
and time.
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 131 Recorder
Mode.)
2. Press the INDEX button. The date-and-time entry form
will appear on the center of the monitor.
F2
INDEX
• To resume the multiscreen display, press the button
0 while holding down the SHIFT button.
• To change the number of multiscreen segments,
press the button 0 while holding down the SHIFT
button again during the multiscreen display.
SEARCH
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM
2002/05/07 19:32
3. To stop the playback, press the STOP button. The mon-
itor display will return to the multiscreen display.
■ Manual Recording
1. Enter the recorder mode (Refer to p. 131 Recorder
Mode.)
Note: The factory default setting is the current date and
2. To start recording, press the WIDE and TELE buttons
simultaneously.
time.
The digital disk recorder will start recording.
3. Press the numeric buttons or NEXT/PREV button to
enter the desired date and time. The cursor can be
adjusted by moving the joystick rightward or leftward.
3. To stop the recording, press the STOP button while
holding down the SHIFT button.
ZOOM
UP
WIDE
TELE
REC
L
R
Note: Refer to WJ-HD500 Series Operating Instructions
for details and other recording modes.
DOWN
■ Stopping REC ONLY Alarm
4. Press the PLAY button. Record List will be displayed
and the cursor will move to the closest date and time.
Recording
You can stop alarm recording activated by “REC ONLY”
setting of 430 CAMERA/440 ALARM PORT/450 SERIAL
PORT/460 MUX MOTION DET in SETUP MENU (refer to pp.
68 and 69) or the Alarm Mode window in WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console (refer to p. 88).
Note: To cancel the entry form, press the CLEAR button.
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press the CAM (SET) button.
The selected camera’s picture is displayed in the spot
mode.
• Record List/Thumbnail Display
You can operate the Record List or Thumbnail Display by
referring to the recorder’s operating instructions. In addi-
tion, the following operations from the system controllers
are also available.
• Record List
DATE MAY29.00
GROUP
000010009 G2
000010008
ALL GROUP
REC-MODE
TIME
NO
5. Each time the button 4 and the SHIFT button are
pressed, the zooming range are changeable as follows:
2x → 4x → 8x → 1x → 2x
23:59:59 T/L
G1
000010007 G3
22:15:40 M/S ALM-TRM12
21:00:07
O/S ALM-VMD3
ALL
ALL
G4
ALL
17:33:05 T/L
7:23:11 T/L EMR
6:59:44 M/S ALM-PC4
8:55:28 T/L MAN
000010006
000010005
000010004
000010003
T/L ALM-TRM1
2343RECORD)
0:01:28
(TOTAL
000010002 G3
UP
SEARCH: MAY29.00
0:01 G1
ALARM # SEARCH:[DISPLAY]
SEL:←→ CHG:+– EXE:SET ESC:FSTOP
Search Editing Area
L
R
• Thumbnail Display
000010009 000010008 000010007 000010006
DOWN
F2
GROUP SEQ
TOUR SEQ
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
000000013 000000012 000000011 000000010
SEARCH MAY29.00
0:01 G1
AUX1 OFF
ALL
REW/FF
INDEX
STILL
PREV
NEXT
000000007
000000008
000000009
000000006
MON STATUS
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
STEP
EL-ZOOM
RECORDER
000000005 000000004 000000003 000000002
STOP
PAUSE
ALM H
Search Editing Area
DEF OFF
DEF ON
STOP
PLAY
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
OSD
MON LOCK
WIPER
SETUP
SHIFT
MULTI SCREEN SEL
Joystick to UP (D): Moves the cursor up.
Joystick to DOWN (C): Moves the cursor down.
Joystick to L (A): Moves the cursor to the left.
Joystick to R (B): Moves the cursor to the right.
CAM(SET) button: Displays the search editing area./Starts
the search after you enter the search condition.
MON(ESC)button: Cancels the search editing area and
returns to the Record List or Thumbnail Display.
NEXT button: Increments a parameter.
6. To return the zooming range to x 1, press the button 4
while holding down the SHIFT button again.
7. To return to the multiscreen display, press the button 0
while holding down the SHIFT button.
Note: You can move the zoomed area on the monitor
with the joystick after Step 5.
PREV button: Decrements a parameter.
PLAY button: Starts the playback of a record pointed by
the cursor.
Note: The PLAY button is deactivated in the search editing
area.
■ Electronic Zooming (EL-ZOOM)
Playback images can be electrically zoomed besides a
camera's optical zooming.
1. Enter the recorder mode (Refer to p. 131 Recorder
Mode.)
2. Press the PLAY button.
3. Press the numeric button corresponding on the desired
camera number to display the spot picture.
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Multiscreen Sequence
Digital disk recorder starts a sequence according to the
setting of WJ-HD500 Series.
1. Enter the recorder mode (Refer to p. 131 Recorder
Mode.)
2. Press the button 7 while holding down the SHIFT but-
ton.
GROUP SEQ
TOUR SEQ
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
AUX1 OFF
ALL
REW/FF
STILL
PREV
NEXT
MON STATUS
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
STEP
EL-ZOOM
PAUSE
ALM H
DEF OFF
DEF ON
PLAY
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
OSD
MON LOCK
WIPER
SHIFT
MULTI SCREEN SEL
3. To cancel the sequence, press the button 0 while hold-
ing down the SHIFT button.
The display will change into the multiscreen display.
■ Other Operations
SHIFT + ZOOM TELE buttons: Selects a group to be
played back.
SHIFT + ZOOM WIDE buttons: Changes the display mode
of the Record List between the alarm search ON and
OFF.
ON: Displays only the Alarm and Emergency Record
List of the selected group.
OFF: Displays all the record lists for the selected
group.
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WJ-HD200 SERIES CONTROL (TERMINAL MODE)
Matrix switcher can control Digital Disk Recorder WJ-
HD200 Series. The following is the procedure of WJ-HD200
Series SETUP MENU.
■ Manual Recording
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. (Refer to
p. 132.)
Notes:
Note: Refer to WJ-HD200 Series Operating Instructions for
• The following operating procedures are for the terminal
mode. If you are using a PS·Data system controller,
refer to p. 143.
details and other recording modes.
• When a Multiplexer board is installed in the unit, you
can neither connect nor control a WJ-HD200 Series
recorder. You need to remove the board from the unit.
■ Stopping REC ONLY Alarm
Recording
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. (Refer to
p. 132.)
■ Displaying WJ-HD200 Series
SETUP MENU
■ Search Playback
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. (Refer to
p. 130.)
You can search playback images using the ALARM
RECALL table or the SEARCH table.
Every time you press the INDEX button, the display will
change as follows.
Live image → Date-and-time entry form → ALARM RECALL
table → Live image
■ Controlling Digital Disk
Recorder WJ-HD200 Series
• Date-and-time Search Playback
The following are the operating procedures of WJ-HD200
Series via system controller.
The recorded images can be searched for through the date
and time.
Note: Refer to the operating instructions of Digital Disk
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 131 Recorder
Mode.)
Recorder WJ-HD200 Series for details.
2. Press the INDEX button. The date-and-time entry form
will appear on the center of the monitor.
■ Recorder Mode
F2
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. (Refer to
p. 131.)
INDEX
■ Multiscreen Segment Switching
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. (Refer to
p. 131.)
SEARCH
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM
2002/05/07 19:32
Note: 4C-, 4D-, 7-, 10-, 13- and 16-segment multiscreen
display are unavailable.
■ Normal Playback
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. (Refer to
p. 131.)
Note: The factory default setting is the current date and
time.
Note: You cannot skip to the previous/next record.
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the numeric buttons or NEXT/PREV button to
enter the desired date and time.
■ Multiscreen Sequence
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. (Refer to
p. 134.)
The cursor can be adjusted by moving the joystick
rightward or leftward.
UP
L
R
DOWN
4. Press the PLAY button. After the search through the
date and time, the recorded image will be played.
5. To return to the multiscreen display, press the STOP
button.
Note: To cancel the entry form, press the CLEAR button.
• ALARM RECALL table
The recorder’s alarm history will be displayed on the
ALARM RECALL table.
Move the cursor with the joystick to the desired alarm num-
ber, and then press the PLAY button. The associated image
will be played back.
ALARM RECALL YEAR03
NO. DATE TIME
ALM
2000 06-14 20:30:00 T1
1999 06-14 15:30:12 T3
1998 06-14 12:15:04 T4
1997 06-14 12:15:02 V8
1996 06-14 10:07:05 V2
1995 06-14 10:07:04 T2
1994 06-14 10:06:55 T6
1993 06-14 09:58:32 V5
(TOTAL 2000EVENTS)
TO SEARCH PUSH T&D KEY
■ Electronic Zooming (EL-ZOOM)
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. (Refer to
p. 133.)
Note: 2 x and 4 x are available zooming range. 8 x is
unavailable.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MUX
WJ-HD100 SERIES CONTROL
(TERMINAL MODE)
Digital Disk Recorder WJ-HD100 Series are operable with
the system controller, when the Multiplexer board is
installed in the unit.
■ Manual Recording
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series.
Refer to p. 132.
Note: Before the use, it is necessary to install the Multi-
plexer board in the matrix switcher, connect the
matrix switcher to the digital disk recorder, and con-
figure the system through WJ-SX150A Administrator
Console, OSD SETUP MENU, and WJ-HD100 Series
SETUP MENU. [Refer to p. 32 Installing the
Multiplexer Board, p. 45 Connection with Digital
Disk Recorder WJ-HD100 Series, p. 63 WJ-SX150A
SETUP MENU (OSD), p. 79 WJ-SX150A ADMINIS-
TRATOR CONSOLE, and Displaying WJ-HD100
Series SETUP MENU in this page.]
■ Stopping REC ONLY Alarm
Recording
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. Refer to
p. 132.
■ Search Playback
You can search playback images using the ALARM
RECALL table or the SEARCH table.
■ Displaying WJ-HD100 Series
Every time you press the INDEX button, the display will
change as follows.
Live image → Date-and-time entry form → ALARM RECALL
table → Live image
SETUP MENU
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series.
Refer to p. 130 Displaying WJ-HD500 Series SETUP MENU.
The following functions and buttons are valid in SETUP
MENU.
• Date-and-time Search Playback
The recorded images can be searched for through the date
and time.
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 131 Recorder
Mode.)
Joystick to R (B): Decrements a parameter
Joystick to L (A): Increments a parameter
2. Press the INDEX button. The date-and-time entry form
will appear on the center of the monitor.
■ Controlling Digital Disk
Recorder WJ-HD100 Series
The following are the operating procedures of WJ-HD100
Series via the system controller.
F2
INDEX
■ Multiscreen Segment Switching
The operating procedure is the same as WJ-HD500 Series.
(Refer to p. 131.)
SEARCH
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM
2002/05/07 19:32
Note: 7-, 10-, or 13-segment multiscreen display is unavail-
able.
Note: The factory default setting is the current date and
time.
■ Normal Playback
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. (Refer to
p. 131.)
Notes:
• You cannot skip to the previous/next record.
• Refer to WJ-HD100 Series Operating Instructions for
details and other playback modes.
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the numeric buttons or NEXT/PREV button to
enter the desired date and time. The cursor can be
adjusted by moving the joystick rightward or leftward.
UP
L
R
DOWN
4. Press the PLAY button. After the search through the
date and time, the recorded image will be played.
5. To return to the multiscreen display, press the STOP
button.
Note: To cancel the entry form, press the CLEAR button.
• ALARM RECALL table
The recorder’s alarm history will be displayed on the
ALARM RECALL table.
Move the cursor with the joystick to the desired alarm num-
ber, and then press the PLAY button. The associated image
will be played back.
ALARM RECALL 1 OF 10
NO DATE
TIME ALM
99 JUN 9.00 00:00:00 * T
98 JUN 1.00 02:34:56 T
97 JUN 1.00 01:10:01 * V
96 MAY31.00 23:34:45 V
95 MAY30.00 02:00:20 * T
94 MAY14.00 05:30:31 * T
93 MAY 7.00 23:00:59 T
92 MAY 6.00 22:05:50 V
91 APR14.00 23:00:59 * T
90 APR14.00 16:06:34 * V
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MUX
TIME-LAPSE VCR CONTROL
[PANASONIC MODELS] (TERMINAL MODE)
A time-lapse VCR (Panasonic Models) is operable with the
system controller, while connecting to the matrix switcher.
■ Rewind
1. During the stop, press the REW button to rewind the
tape.
Note: Before the use, it is necessary to install the
Multiplexer board in the matrix switcher, connect
the matrix switcher to the time-lapse VCR, and con-
figure the system through WJ-SX150A Administrator
Console, OSD SETUP MENU, and time-lapse VCR's
SETUP MENU. [Refer to p. 32 Installing the
Multiplexer Board, p. 46 Connection with the Time-
lapse VCR (Panasonic Models), p. 63 WJ-SX150A
SETUP MENU (OSD), and p. 79 WJ-SX150A
ADMINISTRATOR CONSOLE.]
2. Press the STOP button to stop rewinding.
Note: Pressing the PLAY button during rewind will start
playback.
■ Manual Recording
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series.
Refer to p. 132 Manual Recording.
The following is the procedure of a Panasonic model time-
lapse VCR.
■ Stopping REC ONLY Alarm
Recording
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. Refer to
p. 132.
■ Controlling the Time-lapse VCR
The following are the operating procedures of the time-
lapse VCR via system controllers.
■ Multiscreen Segment Switching
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series.
Refer to p. 131 Multiscreen Display.
Note: 7-, 10-, and 13- segment multiscreen display are
unavailable.
■ Normal Playback
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series.
Refer to p. 131 Normal Playback.
Note: You cannot skip to the previous/next record.
■ Fast-forward
1. Press the FF button to fast-forward the tape during the
stop.
2. To stop fast-forwarding, press the STOP button.
Note: Pressing the FF button during fast-forward will
start playback.
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MUX
TIME-LAPSE VCR CONTROL
[NON-PANASONIC MODELS] (TERMINAL MODE)
A time-lapse VCR is operable with the system controller,
while connecting to the matrix switcher.
■ Other Operations
Refer to the time-lapse VCR’s operating instructions for how
to operate.
Notes:
• Before the use, it is necessary to install the
Multiplexer board in the matrix switcher, connect
the matrix switcher to the digital disk recorder, and
configure the system through WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console, OSD SETUP MENU, and
time-lapse VCR's SETUP MENU. [Refer to p. 32
Installing the Multiplexer Board, p. 47 Connection
with the Time-lapse VCR (Non-Panasonic Models),
p. 63 WJ-SX150A SETUP MENU (OSD), and p. 79
WJ-SX150A ADMINISTRATOR CONSOLE.]
• You cannot control non-Panasonic time-lapse VCRs
from system controllers.
The following is the procedure of a non-Panasonic model
time-lapse VCR.
■ Controlling the Time-lapse VCR
■ Multiscreen Segment Switching
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series.
Refer to p. 131 Multiscreen Segment Switching.
Note: 7-, 10-, and 13- segment multiscreen display are
unavailable.
■ Normal Playback
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 131 Recorder
Mode.)
2. Do the playback procedure using the buttons on the
front panel. (Refer to the time-lapse VCR’s operating
instructions for how to operate.)
3. Press the PLAY button. The playback image will appear
on the monitor.
4. To display the spot picture, press the numeric buttons
corresponding to the desired camera number, then
press the CAM [SET] button. Then, the active monitor
number with “-H**” (** is the logical camera number)”
will appear on the LED display. (Refer to p. 132 Normal
Playback for the illustration.)
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WJ-HD500 SERIES CONTROL (PS·DATA)
This section will describe what you should take notice when using a PS·Data system controller.
The same descriptions as the system controller's operating instructions are not mentioned here. Refer to them.
■ Controlling the Recorder with a PS·Data System Controller
■ Recorder Mode
Before operating the recorder, it is necessary to enter the recorder mode.
1. Select the desired monitor. (Refer to p. 125 Monitor Selection.)
2. In the PS·Data mode, a number is assigned to each recorder. To select a desired recorder, enter the corresponding num-
ber by pressing the numeric buttons.
Recorder
Number
100
101
102
103
Master recorder
Slave 1 recorder
Slave 2 recorder
Slave 3 recorder
Slave 4 recorder
104
3. Press the CAM button.
The recorder image will be displayed on the selected monitor, and you will enter the recorder mode.
■ Operations
1. Press the SHIFT button to activate the FUNCTION buttons.
2. Enter the desired function code, and then press the FUNCTION button. (Refer to the diagram.)
Function
Code
1
Note
Forward field advance
Backward field advance
Pause
Available only during pause
Available only during pause
2
4
Playback
5
Recording
6
Equal to the REC button of the recorder
Stop recording and playback
Stop playback
8
9
Exclusive use to stop playback
Exclusive use to stop recording
Stop recording
10
11
12
19
Search forward
Search backward
Displaying a recorder's OSD
Pressing again will hide the display.
3. To select a camera channel, press the numeric button(s), then CAM button. The system will exit from the recorder mode,
and the selected camera image will be displayed on the monitor.
Notes:
• Only one operator can enter the recording mode.
• The images from the recorder, which are displayed on the monitor, is conformed to the recorder setting.
• You cannot skip to the previous/next record by moving the joystick.
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Stopping REC ONLY Alarm Recording
You can stop alarm recording activated by “REC ONLY” setting of 430 CAMERA/440 ALARM PORT/450 SERIAL PORT/460
MUX MOTION DET in SETUP MENU (refer to pp. 68 and 69) or the Alarm Mode window in WJ-SX150A Administrator Console
(refer to p. 88).
To stop the alarm recording, press the ALM RESET button.
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WJ-HD200 SERIES CONTROL (PS·DATA)
This section will describe what you should take notice when using a PS·Data system controller.
The same descriptions as the system controller's operating instructions are not mentioned here. Refer to them.
■ Controlling the Recorder with a PS·Data System Controller
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 141.)
2. Press the SHIFT button to activate the FUNCTION buttons.
3. Enter the desired function code, and then press the FUNCTION button. (Refer to the diagram.)
Function
Code
1
Note
Forward field advance
Backward field advance
To the last field
Pause
2
3
4
Playback
5
Recording
6
Equal to the REC button of the recorder
To the first field
Stop recording and playback
Stop playback
7
8
9
Exclusive use to stop playback
Stop recording
Search forward
Search backward
Displaying a recorder's OSD
10
11
12
19
Exclusive use to stop recording
Searching will speed up every time you enter the code.
Searching will speed up every time you enter the code.
Pressing again will hide the display.
4. To select a camera channel, press the numeric button(s), then CAM button. The system will exit from the recorder mode,
and the selected camera image will be displayed on the monitor.
Notes:
• Only one operator can enter the recording mode.
• The images from the recorder, which are displayed on the monitor, is conformed to the recorder setting.
■ Stopping REC ONLY Alarm Recording
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. Refer to p. 142.
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MUX
WJ-HD100 SERIES CONTROL
(PS·DATA)
This section will describe what you should take notice when using a PS·Data system controller.
The same descriptions as the system controller's operating instructions are not mentioned here. Refer to them.
Note: Before the use, it is necessary to install the Multiplexer board in the matrix switcher, connect the matrix switcher to the
digital disk recorder, and configure the system through WJ-SX150A Administrator Console, OSD SETUP MENU, and WJ-
HD100 Series SETUP MENU. [Refer to p. 32 Installing the Multiplexer Board, p. 45 Connection with Digital Disk Recorder
WJ-HD100 Series, p. 63 WJ-SX150A SETUP MENU (OSD), p. 79 WJ-SX150A ADMINISTRATOR CONSOLE, and p. 137
Displaying WJ-HD100 Series SETUP MENU.]
■ Controlling the Recorder with a PS·Data System Controller
■ Recorder Mode
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 141.)
2. Press the SHIFT button to activate the FUNCTION buttons.
3. Enter the desired function code, and then press the FUNCTION button. (Refer to the diagram.)
Function
Code
1
Note
Forward field advance
Backward field advance
To the last field
Pause
2
3
4
Playback
5
Recording
6
Equal to the REC button of the recorder
To the first field
Stop recording and playback
Stop playback
Stop recording
Search forward
Search backward
7
8
9
Exclusive use to stop playback
10
11
12
Exclusive use to stop recording
Searching will speed up every time you enter the code.
Searching will speed up every time you enter the code.
4. To select a camera channel, press the numeric button(s), then CAM button. The system will exit from the recorder mode,
and the selected camera image will be displayed on the monitor.
Notes:
• Only one operator can enter the recorder mode.
• The images from the recorder, which are displayed on the monitor, is conformed to the recorder setting.
■ Stopping REC ONLY Alarm Recording
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. Refer to p. 142.
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MUX
TIME-LAPSE VCR CONTROL
[PANASONIC MODELS] (PS·DATA)
This section will describe what you should take notice when using a PS·Data system controller.
The same descriptions as the system controller’s operating instructions are not mentioned here. Refer to them.
Notes:
• Before the use, it is necessary to install the Multiplexer board in the matrix switcher, connect the matrix switcher to the
time-lapse VCR, and configure the system through WJ-SX150A Administrator Console, OSD SETUP MENU, and time-lapse
VCR's SETUP MENU. [Refer to p. 32 Installing the Multiplexer Board, p. 46 Connection with the Time-lapse VCR
(Panasonic Models), p. 63 WJ-SX150A SETUP MENU (OSD), and p. 79 WJ-SX150A ADMINISTRATOR CONSOLE.]
• The time-lapse VCR's SETUP MENU cannot be displayed from a system controller.
■ Controlling the Time-lapse VCR with a PS·Data System Controller
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 141.)
2. Press the SHIFT button to activate the FUNCTION buttons.
3. Enter the desired function code, and then press the FUNCTION button. (Refer to the diagram.)
Function
Code
Note
Forward field advance
Backward field advance
Pause
1
Available only during pause
Available only during pause
2
4
Playback
5
Recording
6
Stop recording/Playback
Fast-forward/Search forward
Rewind/Search backward
8
11
12
Fast-forward during stop/Search forward during playback
Rewind during stop/Search backward during playback
4. To select a camera channel, press the numeric button(s), then CAM button. The system will exit from the recorder mode,
and the selected camera image will be displayed on the monitor.
Notes:
• Only one operator can enter the recorder mode.
• The images from the recorder, which are displayed on the monitor, is conformed to the recorder setting.
■ Stopping REC ONLY Alarm Recording
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. Refer to p. 142.
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MUX
TIME-LAPSE VCR CONTROL
[NON-PANASONIC MODELS] (PS·DATA)
A time-lapse VCR is operable with the system controller,
while connecting to the matrix switcher.
■ Other Operations
Refer to the time-lapse VCR’s operating instructions for how
to operate.
Notes:
• The same descriptions as the system controller’s
operating instructions are not mentioned here. Refer
to them.
• Before the use, it is necessary to install the
Multiplexer board in the matrix switcher, connect
the matrix switcher to the digital disk recorder, and
configure the system through WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console, OSD SETUP MENU, and
time-lapse VCR's SETUP MENU. [Refer to p. 32
Installing the Multiplexer Board, p. 47 Connection
with the Time-lapse VCR (Non-Panasonic Models),
p. 63 WJ-SX150A SETUP MENU (OSD), and p. 79
WJ-SX150A ADMINISTRATOR CONSOLE.]
• You cannot control non-Panasonic time-lapse VCRs
from PS·Data system controllers.
The following is the procedure of a non-Panasonic model
time-lapse VCR.
■ Controlling the Time-lapse VCR
with a PS·Data System
Controller
■ Manual Recording
Refer to the time-lapse VCR’s operating instructions for how
to operate.
■ Normal Playback
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 141.)
2. Do the playback procedure using the buttons on the
front panel of time-lapse VCR. (Refer to the time-lapse
VCR’s operating instructions for how to operate.)
3. Press the VCR/CAM button. The playback image will
appear on the monitor.
4. To display the spot picture, press the numeric buttons
corresponding to the desired camera number, then
press the CAM [SET] button. Then, the active monitor
number with “-H**” (** is logical the camera number)”
will appear on the LED display. (Refer to p. 132 Normal
Playback for the illustration.)
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MONITOR DISPLAY WHEN A VIDEO LOSS OCCURS
■ Video Loss Display
• When video loss of CAMERA IN nn (nn is a number) is
detected, " LOSS CH nn" will blink on the monitor.
• When more than one LOSS CH have occurred, "LOSS
CH nn*" will appear on the monitor.
LOSS CH01
LOSS CH01*
• When the input loss is recovered, "LOSS CH nn" will dis-
appear from the monitor.
• When you press the RESET button while pressing the
"OSD"button, "LOSS CH nn" will disappear from the
monitor.
ACK
RESET
SUSPEND
ALL RESET
TOUR SEQ
GROUP SEQ
T&D
CAM ID
EVENT
AUX1 ON
AUX1 OFF
ALL
REW/FF
STILL
PREV
NEXT
MON STATUS
AUX2 OFF
VLD H
AUX2 ON
SYS S
STEP
EL-ZOOM
PAUSE
ALM H
DEF OFF
DEF ON
PLAY
PAUSE
SEQUENCE
MON (ESC)
CAM (SET)
OSD
MON LOCK
WIPER
SHIFT
MULTI SCREEN SEL
■ Camera Switching Pulse Loss
MUX
Display
• When loss of the camera switching pulse is detected,
“CAMSW LOSS R1” will blink on the monitor.
CAMSW LOSS R1
Note: “R1” is an example of a recorder number.
• When the camera switching pulse is recovered, “CAM
SW LOSS R1” will disappear from the monitor.
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Check to see the following before request for repair.
If a trouble cannot be removed even after checking and trying remedy, contact your dealer.
Problem
Check item
Remedy
Matrix switcher does not power up.
The power cord may be disconnected
either from the unit's power socket or
the AC outlet.
Connect the power cord between the
'
unit s power socket and the AC outlet.
System controller(s) do (does) not log
in.
The unit’s power cord may be discon-
nected from the AC outlet.
Connect the power cord to the AC out-
let.
The cable connection(s) may be wrong
between the unit and the system con-
troller(s).
Confirm the cable connections. (Refer
to p. 39.)
the mode selection switch set-
Confirm
ting. (Refer to p. 24.)
The mode selection switch setting of
controller
the system
may be wrong.
Data port setting may be wrong.
Open the Data Port window of WJ-
SX150 Administrator Console (refer to
p. 96.) to select Terminal_K1 to K4 for
the data port. If Camera is selected for
the port, the log-in will be invalid.
Refer to your Operator Registration
worksheet. Or open the Operator Regis-
tration window (refer to p. 90) and
reconfigure your ID, user number and
password.
Your ID, user number or password may
be wrong.
Monitor is not selectable.
The monitor selection setting may be
wrong.
Open the Monitor Selection window
(refer to p. 92) and confirm the setting.
If NG is assigned to your controller for
the monitor, the selection will be invalid.
Camera image is not displayed even
after selecting the camera.
The camera’s power cord connection
may be wrong.
Confirm the power cord connection.
(Refer to the camera’s operating
instructions.)
The cable connections may be wrong
between the unit and the camera.
Confirm the connections (refer to pp. 36
to 38). If the connections and camera
type are not correspondent, the camera
image will not appear.
The lens cover may not have been
removed from the camera.
Remove the lens cover from the cam-
era.
The monitor's brightness or contrast
setting may not be proper.
Adjust the setting. (Refer to the moni-
tor's operating instructions.)
The lens iris of a camera may be
closed.
Press the IRIS OPEN button.
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Problem
Check item
Remedy
The camera image is dim.
Dust may be sticking on the camera
lens.
Remove the dust from the camera lens.
The camera’s lens focus may not be
proper.
Press the FOCUS NEAR/ FAR buttons to
adjust the lens focus. If the camera sup-
ports auto focus, press these buttons
simultaneously. The lens focus can be
adjusted automatically.
The camera’s cable compensation set-
ting may not be proper.
Open 730 COMPENSATION/VD2/DATA
(refer to p. 74) or the Cable Compensa-
tion/VD2 window (refer to p. 94) to con-
firm the setting.
The camera is not operable.
The camera may not have been select-
ed.
Select the camera again. (Refer to p.
107.)
The camera may not support the function
you try to execute.
Confirm whether the camera supports
the function. (Refer to the camera's oper-
ating instructions.)
The camera's cable setting may wrong.
Open 730 COMPENSATION/VD2/DATA
(refer to p. 74) or the Cable
Compensation/VD2/DATA (refer to p. 94)
window to confirm the setting. If the cam-
era’s DATA is set to OFF, the cameras
will not be operable.
The data port setting may wrong.
Open the Data Port window (refer to p.
96) and confirm the setting.
When the BUSY indicator is lighting on
the system controller, a higher-priority
operator has selected the camera.
• Select another camera.
• Wait until a higher-priority operator fin-
ishes controlling the camera.
While the PROHIBITED indicator is light-
ing on the system controller, you are pro-
hibited to control the camera.
Open the Operator Registration window
(refer to p. 90) and reconfigure the set-
ting.
OSD items (Clock, Camera title, Monitor
status, Event) overlap one another.
• Turn off an overlapping item. (Refer to
p. 115.)
• Move OSD items. (Refer to p. 115.)
• Change the area title display position
through the camera’s setup menu.
(Refer to the camera’s operating
instructions.)
Tour/group sequence is not activated.
The tour/group sequence setting may be
wrong.
Open 300 SEQUENCE (refer to p. 66),
the Tour Sequence (refer to p. 84) or
Group Sequence (refer to p. 85) window
and reconfigure the setting.
The setting has not been put from the PC
to the unit.
Put the file to the unit again after the con-
figuration. (Refer to p. 83 Put a file to
SX150A.)
When the PROHIBITED indicator is light-
ing on the system controller, you are pro-
hibited to control the camera.
Open 800 OPERATOR REGISTRATION
(refer to p. 76) or the Operator
Registration window (refer to p. 90) and
reconfigure the setting.
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Problem
Check item
Remedy
The alarm mode is not activated.
The alarm mode is set to OFF.
Set the alarm mode to SEQUENCE or
HOLD in SETUP MENU or WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console.
SETUP MENU: Refer to p. 67.
Administrator Console: Refer to p. 88.
The port for an alarm input is set to
OFF.
Set the alarm port to ON in SETUP
MENU or WJ-SX150A Administrator
Console.
SETUP MENU: Refer to pp. 68 to 69
Administrator Console: Refer to p. 88.
When "ALM SUSPENDED" is displayed
on the monitor, the alarm is suspended.
Press the ACK/SUSPEND button while
holding down the SHIFT button to can-
cel the alarm suspension.
SETUP MENU may be open.
Press the SETUP button while holding
down the SHIFT button to close SETUP
MENU.
ACK or RESET is not activated.
You may not have selected the alarm-
related monitor.
Select the monitor again. (Refer to pp.
106 or 125.)
Confirm the Monitor Selection window in
WJ-SX150A Administrator Console and
reconfigure the setting if necessary.
(Refer to p. 92.)
The system controller is not authorized
to select the monitor.
You are not authorized to reset an
alarm.
Confirm the Level Table window in WJ-
SX150A Administrator Console and
reconfigure the setting if necessary.
(Refer to p. 91.)
While the PROHIBITED indicator is
lighting on the system controller, you
are prohibited to control the monitor.
Open the Monitor Selection window
(refer to p. 92) and reconfigure the set-
ting if necessary.
Timer event is not activated.
SETUP MENU does not open.
A higher-priority operator may have
selected the event-related monitor.
Select another monitor.
When the PROHIBITED indicator is light-
ing on the system controller, you are pro-
hibited to open SETUP MENU.
Open the Level Table window (refer to
p. 91) and reconfigure the setting.
The system does not enter the recorder
mode.
The recorder connection may be
wrong.
Connect the recommended recorder to
the unit.
The connected recorder may not con-
form to the unit.
Confirm the recorder connection (refer
to pp. 40 to 47.)
You are not authorized to operate the
recorder.
Open the Level Table window (refer to
p. 91) and reconfigure the setting.
“NOT ASSIGN” is displayed beside the
camera number on the monitor.
When you select the LCN (logical cam-
era number) not assigned in the system,
“NOT ASSIGN” will appear.
Select an assigned logical camera num-
ber. (Refer to p. 107.)
“Initializing…” is displayed on monitors.
If connections or settings are wrong, this
message, SLAVE n*, and the firmware
version will be displayed after you turn
on a Slave recorder.
Confirm the connections (refer to pp. 33
to 55) and settings (refer to pp. 57 to
102).
*n is a unit number.
(For WJ-HD500 Series recorders) You
cannot search for records even when car-
rying out the Search Playback procedure.
“Error” or “TIME OUT” may be displayed
after pressing the PLAY button in the
date-and-time entry form.
The date-and-time entry form is unavail-
able. Use Record List or Thumbnail
Display to search for records.
Recording or playback with the recorder
is not correctly carried out.
Camera number settings are wrong.
Conform the LCN (logical camera num-
ber) settings of the unit and camera
number settings of the recorder.
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
The following pages detail the elements for communication between the unit and the PC.
When operating the PC, make sure to conform the serial port's communication speed to that of the unit.
The unit's communication speed is configurable by changing COM. SPEED in SETUP MENU. Data, parity and stop bits have
been set as follows:
Item
Parameter
Data length
Parity bit
Stop bit
8bit(fixed)
NONE(fixed)
1bit(fixed)
Hardware flow control (ER/DR/RS/CS)
Software flow control (Xon/Xoff)
Wait Time
Not supported yet
Not supported yet
Not supported yet
1. Transmission Command
The PC sends messages to the recorder in the following format. Also refer to the command table.
Code
ASCII
[STX] [Transmission Command] : [p1] : [p2] : : [pn] [ETX]
(02H) ( ) – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ( ) (03H)
[p] stands for parameter. Parameters are omitted when the command does not need to specify them.
2. Response Command
The unit returns messages to the PC with the following formats.
(1) Reception Command
When the reception was completed successfully, the unit sends back the "ACK code 06H" to the PC, and then the
response command.
Code
ASCII
[STX] [Response Command] : [p1] : [p2] : : [pn] [ETX]
(02H) ( ) – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ( ) (03H)
Parameters are omitted when the command format includes neither data nor status to send back.
(2) Reception Error
The unit sends back "NAK code 15H", followed by the parameters. The unit then resets the reception buffer and enters the
waiting mode for the next message. Parameter "e" identifies the error status.
Code
ASCII
[NAK] [e]
(15H)
1: Parity error (31H)
4: Overrun error (34H)
5: Timeout error (35H)
2: Overflow error (32H)
3: Framing error (33H)
(3) Parameter Error
The unit returns "ACK code 06H", if the transmission code was not processed properly, followed by an error code.
Code
ASCII
[STX] [Response Command] : [E] [R] [n1] [n2] [n3] [ETX]
(02H) ( )– – – – – – – – – – – – – (45H) (52H) 03H
[n] stands for an error code number. (Refer to p. 161.)
Note: The unit returns [ACK] or [NAK] to the PC within 20 ms after the reception of [ETX] in a transmission.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Command Table
Basic Operation
Transmission Command
(ASCII)
Item
Response (ASCII)
Parameter (ASCII)
Log-in
CMD:Wnnnnn-ppppp
ANS:WOK (When OK)
ANS:WNG (When NG)
nnnnn= Operator number
ppppp= Password
Log-out
CMD:H00LG
ANS:H00LG
mm=Monitor No.
Monitor Selection
CMD:HmmMS
ANS:HmmMS
mm=Monitor No.
cc=Camera No.
+1=To the next camera (Next)
-1=To the previous camera (Prev)
CMD:HmmCScc
CMD:HmmCS+1
CMD:HmmCS-1
ANS:HmmCScc
ANS:HmmCS+1
ANS:HmmCS-1
Camera Selection
mm=Monitor No.
nn=Tour sequence No.
nn=00 Recorder sequence ON when the
recorder is selected.
Starting tour sequence
Starting group sequence
CMD:HmmSTnn
ANS:HmmSTnn
CMD:H00SGn
CMD:HmmSP
ANS:H00SGn
ANS:HmmSPn
n=Group sequence No.
mm=Monitor No.
n=0 (SEQUENCE), 1 (PAUSE)
Pausing sequence
(PAUSE)
mm=Monitor No.
Stopping sequence
(STOP)
CMD:HmmSO
CMD:HmmSI
ANS:HmmSO
ANS:HmmSI
mm=Monitor No.
Available only during sequence pause
Sequence increment
(NEXT)
mm=Monitor No.
Available only during sequence pause
Sequence decrement
(PREV)
CMD:HmmSD
CMD:HmmPR
ANS:HmmSD
ANS:HmmPRn
Priority lock
Transmission command toggles priority lock
ON or OFF.
mm=Monitor No.
n=0 (OFF)
n=1 (ON)
OSD display ON / OFF
or
CMD:Hmmss(o)
ANS:HmmALn
Transmission command toggles OSD display
ON or OFF.
Moving OSD display posi-
tion
Use (o) parameter when moving OSD dis-
play position.
mm=Monitor No.
ss=AL All OSD items ON/OFF
ss=TM Time & date ON/OFF
ss=TL Camera title ON/OFF
ss=TE Event ON/OFF
ss=TO Monitor status ON/OFF
o=U
o=D
o=L
o=R
Moving upward
Moving downward
Moving leftward
Moving rightward
n=0
n=1
Displayed
Not displayed
History or status display
ON/OFF
CMD: Hmmss
ANS: Hmmssn
mm=Monitor No.
ss=DA Alarm history ON/OFF
ss=DV Video loss history ON/OFF
ss=DS System status ON/OFF
n=0
n=1
Displayed
Not displayed
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Control
Item
Transmission Command
(ASCII)
Response (ASCII)
No response
Parameter (ASCII)
cc=Alarm No.
Alarm input
OAIcc
mm=Monitor No.
Alarm ACK
(Each monitor)
CMD:HmmAK
ANS:HmmAK
mm=Monitor No.
Alarm reset
(Each monitor)
CMD:HmmAR
ANS:HmmAR
Alarm all reset
CMD:H00AR
MAD
ANS:H00AR
madn
Alarm suspension
Transmission command toggles alarm sus-
pension ON or OFF.
n=0 OFF
n=1 ON
Setup Control
Item
Transmission Command
(ASCII)
Response (ASCII)
ANS:HmmSS
Parameter (ASCII)
mm=Monitor No.
Display SETUP MENU
Return to normal view*
CMD:HmmSS
CMD:HmmSE
mm=Monitor No.
*Available only in SETUP MENU
ANS:HmmSE
mm=Monitor No.
mm=Monitor No.
mm=Monitor No.
mm=Monitor No.
mm=Monitor No.
mm=Monitor No.
mm=Monitor No.
mm=Monitor No.
mm=Monitor No.
mm=Monitor No.
mm=Monitor No.
mm=Monitor No.
mm=Monitor No.
mm=Monitor No.
mm=Monitor No.
mm=Monitor No.
mm=Monitor No.
mm=Monitor No.
Move the cursor leftward
CMD:AmmJL
CMD:AmmJR
CMD:AmmJU
CMD:AmmJD
CMD:AmmT0
CMD:AmmT1
CMD:AmmT2
CMD:AmmT3
CMD:AmmT4
CMD:AmmT5
CMD:AmmT6
CMD:AmmT7
CMD:AmmT8
CMD:AmmT9
CMD:AmmST
CMD:AmmES
CMD:AmmIN
CMD:AmmDE
CMD:AmmNX
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Move the cursor rightward
Move the cursor upward
Move the cursor downward
Enter "0"
Enter "1"
Enter "2"
Enter "3"
Enter "4"
Enter "5"
Enter "6"
Enter "7"
Enter "8"
Enter "9"
SET
ESC
INC
DEC
mm=Monitor No.
NEXT
Available in SETUP MENU, Alarm History
and Video Loss History
mm=Monitor No.
PRE
CMD:AmmPR
—
Available in SETUP MENU, Alarm History
and Video Loss History
mm=Monitor No.
Same function as pressing the CLEAR button
Reset a motion-detection area CMD:AmmCL
one by one
—
—
mm=Monitor No.
Same function as pressing the CLEAR button
while holding down the SHIFT button
Reset all motion-detection
areas of a camera channel
CMD:AmmCV
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Camera Control
Transmission Command
(ASCII)
Item
Response (ASCII)
Parameter (ASCII)
PAN/TILT
CMD:CmmPTccxxyy
—
mm=Monitor No.
cc=Camera No.
• Panning speed
xx=00 STOP
xx=01 to 40(HEX) + direction panning
(Max is 40 and min is 01)
xx=81 to C0(HEX) - direction panning
(Max is C0 and min is 81)
• Tilting speed
yy=00 STOP
yy=01 to 40(HEX) + direction tilting
(Max is 40 and min is 01)
yy=81 to C0(HEX) - direction tilting
(Max is C0 and min is 81)
Zoom
Focus
CMD:CmmZMccn
CMD:CmmFCccn
—
—
mm=Monitor No.
cc=Camera No.
n=0 STOP
n=1 TELE
n=2 WIDE
mm=Monitor No.
cc=Camera No.
n=0 STOP
1 NEAR
2 FAR
3 AUTO FOCUS
Iris
CMD:CmmIRccn
—
mm=Monitor No.
cc=Camera No.
n=0 STOP
n=1 OPEN
n=2 CLOSE
n=3 AUTO IRIS
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transmission Command
(ASCII)
Item
Response (ASCII)
Parameter (ASCII)
Camera's SETUP MENU
CMD:CmmCMccn
—
mm=Monitor No.
cc=Camera No.
n=0 OFF
n=1 ON
The following commands are available in
SETUP MENU:
CMD:AmmJL (Move the cursor leftward)
CMD:AmmJR (Move the cursor rightward)
CMD:AmmJU (Move the cursor upward)
CMD:AmmJD (Move the cursor downward)
CMD:AmmST (SET)
CMD:AmmES (ESC)
CMD:AmmIN (RESET)
CMD:AmmDE (ALL RESET)
Call Preset Position
CMD:CmmPMccnn
—
mm=Monitor No.
cc=Camera No.
nn=01 to 64 Preset position No.
nn=00 Home position
mm=Monitor No.
cc=Camera No.
nn=01 to 64 Preset position No.
Program Preset Position
Color/BW
CMD:CmmPSccnn
CMD:CmmBWccn
—
—
mm=Monitor No.
cc=Camera No.
n=0 OFF (Color)
n=1 ON (BW)
mm=Monitor No.
cc=Camera No.
n=0 STOP
Patrol
CMD:CmmPAccn
—
n=1 PLAY
n=2 LEARN
mm=Monitor No.
cc=Camera No.
nnn=Camera function No. (001 to 256)
Camera Function
Auto Panning
CMD:CmmCFccnnn
CMD:CmmAPccn
—
—
mm=Monitor No.
cc=Camera No.
n=0 AUTO PAN
n=1 AUTO SORT
n=2 AUTO SEQ
mm=Monitor No.
cc=Camera No.
n=0 OFF
Wiper
CMD:CmmWPccn
CMD:CmmDFccn
—
—
n=1 ON
mm=Monitor No.
cc=Camera No.
n=0 OFF
Defroster
n=1 ON
mm=Monitor No.
cc=Camera No.
n=0 OFF
AUX1
AUX2
CMD:CmmA1ccn
CMD:CmmA2ccn
—
—
n=1 ON
mm=Monitor No.
cc=Camera No.
n=0 OFF
n=1 ON
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recorder Control
Item
Transmission Command
(ASCII)
Response (ASCII)
Parameter (ASCII)
Recorder button
CMD:HmmRSnn
ANS:HmmRSnn
nn=00 Master recorder selected
nn=01 Slave 1 recorder selected
nn=02 Slave 2 recorder selected
nn=03 Slave 3 recorder selected
nn=04 Slave 4 recorder selected
nn=99 Recorder mode cancelled
When nn is not entered, the Master recorder
is selected.
Multiscreen segment switch- CMD:RmmML
ing
ANS:RmmML
ANS:RmmZMn
mm=Monitor No.
Electronic Zoom
CMD:RmmZM
Transmission command toggles zoom.
mm=Monitor No.
n=0 Zoom OFF
n=1 + mark display ON*
n=2 Two-fold zoom
n=4 x4Live image/Playback image
n=8 x8Live image/Playback image
*Available only with the Multiplexer board
Live/Playback image
CMD:RmmVS
ANS:RmmVSn
Necessary when using a non-Panasonic
recorder with the Multiplexer board.
Transmission command changes the monitor
display between live and playback image.
n=0 Live image
n=1 Playback image
Play
CMD:RmmPL
CMD:RmmPA
CMD:RmmSPn
ANS:RmmPL
ANS:RmmPA
ANS:RmmSPn
mm=Monitor No.
mm=Monitor No.
Pause
Stop
mm=Monitor No.
n=0 Stop playback
n=1 Stop recording
157
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transmission Command
(ASCII)
Item
Response (ASCII)
Parameter (ASCII)
Still display
CMD:RmmSTcc
ANS:RmmSTccn
Available only with the Multiplexer board
Transmission command toggles still display
ON or OFF.
mm=Monitor No.
cc=Camera No.
(cc=00 when toggling multiscreen still ON or
OFF)
n=0 OFF
n=1 ON
FF
CMD:RmmFF
CMD:RmmRW
CMD:RmmFA
CMD:RmmRA
CMD:RmmRC
CMD:RmmSC
ANS:RmmFF
ANS:RmmRW
ANS:RmmFA
ANS:RmmRA
ANS:RmmRC
ANS:RmmSC
mm=Monitor No.
mm=Monitor No.
mm=Monitor No.
mm=Monitor No.
mm=Monitor No.
mm=Monitor No.
REW
Forward field advance
Backward field advance
Record
Index
Transmission command changes the monitor
display between index and live image.
Setup control commands (refer to p. 154) are
available while the index is displayed.
Search editing area
CMD:RmmTMn
ANS:RmmTMn
Available only for Record List and
Thumbnail Display of WJ-HD500 Series
Transmission command toggles search edit-
ing area ON/OFF, or starts search.
mm=Monitor No.
n=0 OFF
n=1 ON
n=2 Search start
Group select
Alarm search
CMD:RmmTG
CMD:RmmAS
ANS:RmmTG
ANS:RmmAS
Available only for Record List and
Thumbnail Display of WJ-HD500 Series
Transmission command selects group to be
displayed.
mm=Monitor No.
Available only for Record List and
Thumbnail Display of WJ-HD500 Series
Transmission command toggles alarm search
ON or OFF.
mm=Monitor No.
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inquiry
Transmission Command
(ASCII)
Item
Response (ASCII)
Parameter (ASCII)
Model No
QID
qid:WJ-SX150A
Matrix switcher's model No.
Software version
QRV
qrv:*.**
/*.**
qrv:*.**=Unit firmware version
/*.**= Master unit’s Multiplexer-board
firmware version
/*.**= Slave 1 unit’s Multiplexer-board
firmware version
/*.**
/*.**
/*.**
/*.**
/*.**= Slave 2 unit’s Multiplexer-board
firmware version
/*.**= Slave 3 unit’s Multiplexer-board
firmware version
/*.**= Slave 4 unit’s Multiplexer-board
firmware version
Alarm history
QAD
qad:nnn:YYYYMMDD
hhmmss:cc:ee:s
nnn=alarm-event total number
(000 to 100)
*=Event of alarm n (n is a number).
Display pattern:
YYYYMMDDhhmmss:cc:ee:s
YYYY=Year
MM=Month
DD=Day
hh=Hour
mm= Month
ss=Second
cc=Alarm number (associated with the cam-
era number: 00 when the alarm is suspended)
ee= Event
00=ALARM
01=ACK
02=RESET
03=ALARM SUSPEND
s=Daylight saving time
0=OFF
1=ON
Video loss history
QVD
qvd:nnn: YYYYMMDD
hhmmss:cc:ee:s
nnn=video-loss total number
(000 to 100)
*=Event of video loss n (n is a number).
Display pattern:
YYYYMMDDhhmmss:cc:ee:s
YYYY=Year
MM=Month
DD=Day
hh=Hour
mm= Month
ss=Second
cc=Video loss number (associated with the
camera number: 00 in case of camera
switching pulse loss/recovery)
ee= Event
00=Video loss
01=Video loss recovery
02=Camera switching loss
03=Camera switching recovery
04=SLAVE DOWN
05=SLAVE RECOVER
s=Daylight saving time
0=OFF 1=ON
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Miscellaneous Control
Transmission Command
(ASCII)
Item
Response (ASCII)
Parameter (ASCII)
Alarm display
–
ALM:cc:a:yyyymmdd:hhmm a=Event
ss:b 0=ALARM
1=ACK
2=RESET
yyyy=Year
mm=Month
dd=Day
hh=Hour
ss=Second
b=Daylight saving time
0=OFF
1=ON
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Error Code List
■ Matrix switcher and external devices
Error code(ASCII)
ER000
Error type
Meaning
No error
There is no error.
ER001
No associated command
Parameter invalid
Receiver buffer's overflow
Command invalid
Parameter invalid
There is no associated command.
ER002
The parameter's number, digit and range are invalid.
The receiver buffer has reached overflow capacity.
Invalid operation mode caused the command error.
The parameter's number, digit and range are valid, but the operation mode
is invalid.
ER003
ER301
ER302
ER303
Gateway reception overflow
Reception buffer overflow has occurred on the other device during the
gateway communication.
ER305
ER309
Gateway timeout error
Internal error
Timeout error has occurred during the gateway communication.
The internal processing error has happened.
Example: The command is valid but it cannot be executed.
(1) The unit receives the zoom command while selecting a camera without electronic zoom function.
Transmission Command (ASCII)
Transmission Command (ASCII)
[STX] CMD:R01ZM [ETX]
[STX] ANS:R01ZM:ER301 [ETX]
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WORKSHEETS
Gathering information for the initial configuration and recording on the following worksheets are recommended. Then, if set-
tings need to be modified or updated later because of a change in surveillance needs or changes made in the system's com-
ponents, those worksheets can be used to track revisions to your system.
You should keep all revised worksheets. Be sure to date them, in preparation for new entry or troubleshooting. Regardless of
the system size, the worksheets can track past, current, and future configurations.
■ Instruction
Each worksheet's title is the same as that of WJ-SX150A Administrator Console.
For example, the "Operator Registration" worksheet supports the "Operator Registration" window.
The worksheets' rows, columns, and fields are arranged to match WJ-SX150A Administrator Console configuration require-
ments.
1. Reproduce the worksheets. You may need dozens of copies.
2. Reproduce instructions for the configuration windows . You can attach the portions of instructions to the worksheets.
To keep record of the initial configuration of the system, date the "Data Completed" line on the top left of each sheet.
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Checklist
It is recommended that the worksheets be completed in the following sequence:
Date completed: ___/ ___/ ___
■ Master-Slave
Master
Slave 1
Slave 2
Slave 3
Slave 4
ON
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
■ Logical Camera Number
Normal connection (one unit only)
Master and Slave 1
LCN
Camera
LCN
1
2
Camera
Slave 1
Master
1
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Master, Slave 1 and Slave 2
LCN
Camera
Slave 1
Slave 2
Master
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Master and Slave 1 to 3
LCN
Camera
Slave 1
Slave 2
Slave 3
Master
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Master and Slave 1 to 4
LCN
Camera
Slave 1
Slave 2
Slave 3
Slave 4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Tour Sequence
Tour __ / 32
Remark
Step
1
LCN
Preset position
Dwell time
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tour __ / 32
Remark
Step
LCN
Preset position
Dwell time
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
■ Group Sequence
Group
Monitor 1
Monitor 2
Monitor 3
Monitor 4
1
2
3
4
■ Timer Event
Schdule
Mode
Daily
Weekly
Every Hour
Minute
Every
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Monthly
Every Day#
Action
Monitor#
Logical Camera Number
Tour Sequence
Spot Camera
Tour#
Preset Position#
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Camera Auto Cleaning
Daily
Weekly
Every Hour
Every Sunday
Monday
Minute
Schdule
Mode
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Every Day#
Monthly
Cam #1
Cam #2
Cam #3
Cam #4
Auto Cleaning
Camera
Cam #5
Cam #6
Cam #7
Cam #8
Cam #9
Cam #13
Cam #14
Cam #15
Cam #16
Cam #10
Cam #11
Cam #12
■ Daylight Saving Time
Start
End
Start
End
■ Alarm Mode
Alarm Mode
Dwell
Alarm Input
Camera Site Alarm
Alarm Port
Serial Port
OFF / ON / REC only
OFF
Sequence Mode
Hold Mode
sec.
OFF / ON / REC only
OFF / ON / REC only
OFF / ON / REC only
Mux Motion Det
Auto Reset Time
sec.
■ Sensitivity
Camera
LCN
Level
OFF/LOW/MID/HIGH
OFF/LOW/MID/HIGH
OFF/LOW/MID/HIGH
OFF/LOW/MID/HIGH
OFF/LOW/MID/HIGH
OFF/LOW/MID/HIGH
OFF/LOW/MID/HIGH
OFF/LOW/MID/HIGH
OFF/LOW/MID/HIGH
OFF/LOW/MID/HIGH
OFF/LOW/MID/HIGH
OFF/LOW/MID/HIGH
OFF/LOW/MID/HIGH
OFF/LOW/MID/HIGH
OFF/LOW/MID/HIGH
OFF/LOW/MID/HIGH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Alarm Event
Alam Event
Num
Alam Port
Master/Slave
ALM#
Monitor#
LCN/Tour
Pre
Num
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alam Event
Num
Alam Port
Master/Slave
ALM#
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
Monitor#
LCN/Tour
Pre
Num
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alam Event
Num
Alam Port
Master/Slave
ALM#
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
Monitor#
LCN/Tour
Pre
Num
■ Alarm Port
Alarm #
Alarm Port
1
2
N.O./N.C./Time
N.O./N.C./Time
N.O./N.C./Time
N.O./N.C./Time
N.O./N.C./Time
N.O./N.C./Time
N.O./N.C./Time
N.O./N.C./Time
N.O./N.C./Time
N.O./N.C./Time
N.O./N.C./Time
N.O./N.C./Time
N.O./N.C./Time
N.O./N.C./Time
N.O./N.C./Time
N.O./N.C./Time
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Operator Registration
Camera Access
Operator#
ID
Password
—
Level
Priority
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
—
—
1
Timer
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Camera Access
1: View & Control 2: View Only 3: Prohibited
■ Level Table
Control
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
SX150A Setup
Camera Setup
Program Preset Position
Camera Control
Camera Selection
Recorder Setup
Recorder Control
All Alarm Reset
Single Alarm Reset
Alarm Suspend
Call Sequence
Alarm History Display
Video Loss History Display
System Status Display
OSD Control
■ Monitor Selection
Monitor 1
Monitor 2
Monitor 3
OK / NG
OK / NG
OK / NG
OK / NG
OK / NG
Monitor 4
OK / NG
OK / NG
OK / NG
OK / NG
OK / NG
Terminal_K1
Terminal_K2
Terminal_K3
Terminal_K4
PC
OK / NG
OK / NG
OK / NG
OK / NG
OK / NG
OK / NG
OK / NG
OK / NG
OK / NG
OK / NG
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Auto Log-in/Log-out
Auto Log-in
Auto Log-out
Terminal_K1
Terminal_K2
Terminal_K3
Terminal_K4
Minute(s)
Terminal_K1
Terminal_K2
Terminal_K3
Terminal_K4
■ Cable Compensation/VD2
Camera #
Cam 1
Cam 2
Cam 3
Cam 4
Cam 5
Cam 6
Cam 7
Cam 8
Cable Compensation
S / M / L
S / M / L
S / M / L
S / M / L
S / M / L
S / M / L
S / M / L
S / M / L
S / M / L
S / M / L
S / M / L
S / M / L
S / M / L
S / M / L
S / M / L
S / M / L
VD2
DATA
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
Cam 9
Cam 10
Cam 11
Cam 12
Cam 13
Cam 14
Cam 15
Cam 16
■ Camera Title
Camera ID (Up to 20 characters)
Cam 1
Cam 2
Cam 3
Cam 4
Cam 5
Cam 6
Cam 7
Cam 8
Cam 9
Cam 10
Cam 11
Cam 12
Cam 13
Cam 14
Cam 15
Cam 16
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Data Port
RS485 Port Protocol
Baud Rate
bps
RS485
Camera
Daisy
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
RS485
Camera
DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA 3
DATA 4
Camera/Terminal_K1/K2/K3/K4
Camera/Terminal_K1/K2/K3/K4
Camera/Terminal_K1/K2/K3/K4
PS·Data/Terminal_K1/K2/K3/K4
bps
bps
bps
bps
•
PS Data mode (for DATA 4)
Logout Time
Alarm Data
Wait Time
sec.
sec.
Group Address
■ Recorder
Recorder Control
Unit Address
EXT IN
OFF/HD100/HD200/HD500/VCR
Genlock off/on
■ Multiplexer
Multi Monitor Out
Still Display
Border Color
Quad Shift
Secret View
WHITE/GRAY/BLACK/OFF
Quad / 3+1 / 8+1
Sequence Mode
s
REC Out (Normal)
REC MODE
EXT
INT
Fields
Title Display
Clock Display
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REC Out (Alarm)
REC MODE
EXT
INT
Fields
Dynamic REC
OFF / ALM-PRI / ALM-ONLY / GROUP
GROUP
Cam
Cam
Cam
Cam
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 8
Group 9
Group 10
Group 11
Group 12
Group 13
Group 14
Group 15
Group 16
System
Camera SW Loss
Dummy Black
Multiplexer Title
Cam1
Cam2
Cam3
Cam4
Cam5
Cam6
Cam7
Cam8
Cam9
Cam10
Cam11
Cam12
Cam13
Cam14
Cam15
Cam16
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Source:
120 V AC, 60 Hz
Power Consumption:
Camera Input (1 to 16):
60 W
1.0 V[p-p]/75 Ω composite video signal
0.5 V[p-p]/75 Ω data signal and 2.5 V[p-p]/75 Ω vertical timing pulse multiplexed
1.0 V[p-p]/75 Ω composite video signal
1.0 V[p-p]/75 Ω composite video signal
1.0 V[p-p]/75 Ω composite video signal
1.0 V[p-p]/75 Ω composite video signal*
RS-485 6-conductor modular jack
RS-485 6-conductor modular jack
25-pin D-sub connector
Camera Output (1 to 16):
Monitor Output (1 to 4):
External Input (PLAY IN):
External Output (REC OUT):
RS-485 (Camera) Port:
Data Port:
Alarm Port:
Serial Port:
9-pin D-sub connector
Camera Switching Input:
Ambient Operating Temperature:
Ambient Operating Humidity:
Dimensions:
RCA pin jack*
–10°C to +50°C (14°F to 122°F)
Less than 90 %
420 mm (W) X 88 mm (H) X 350 mm (D)
[16-9/16" (W) X 3-7/16" (H) X 13-3/4" (D)]
6.0 kg (13.2 lbs.)
Weight:
*Available only when the Multiplexer board is installed
STANDARD ACCESSORIES
Rack Mounting Bracket ................................... 2 pcs.
Screws (M4 x 10) ............................................ 4 pcs.
Power Cable .................................................... 1 pc.
CD-ROM .......................................................... 1 pc.
Crossing modular cable .................................. 1 pc.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Cable kit ................................................... WV-CA48/10K
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PANASONIC CANADA INC.
5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga,
Panasonic Digital Communications & Security Company
Unit of Matsushita Electric Corporation of America
Ontario, L4W 2T3 Canada (905)624-5010
PANASONIC SALES COMPANY
DIVISION OF MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC OF PUERTO RICO INC.
San Gabriel Industrial Park 65th Infantry Ave. KM. 9.5 Carolina,
P.R. 00985 (809)750-4300
Security Systems Group
www.panasonic.com/cctv
Executive Office: One Panasonic Way 3E-7, Secaucus, New Jersey 07094
Zone Office
Eastern: One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, NJ 07094 (201) 348-7303
Central: 1707 N.Randal Road, Elgin, IL 60123 (847) 468-5205
Western: 6550 Katella Ave., Cypress, CA 90630 (714) 373-7840
N0303-1043
V8QA6118BN
Printed in Japan
2003
© Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Addendum for WV-CU650 and WJ-SX150 Series
The descriptions in this document are applicable when WJ-SX150A Administrator Console and the firmware of this unit (matrix
switcher) are Ver. 2.03 or later.
Note: Refer to the operating instructions of matrix switcher for how to check the version.
(1) ADDENDUM FOR SYSTEM CONTROLLER WV-CU650:
MATRIX SWITCHER WJ-SX150 SERIES
OPERATING PROCEDURES
INSTALLATIONS AND CONNECTIONS
■ Basic System Connections
• The connection details are the same as System
Controller WV-CU360C/CJ. Refer to the operating
instructions of matrix switcher .
• To connect System Controller WV-CU650 to Digital Disk
Recorder WJ-HD300 Series or WJ-HD220 Series via the
matrix switcher, refer to pp. 37 to 39.
SETUP PROCEDURES (HARDWARE)
■ MODE Switch Setting
Either of the terminal mode or PS·Data mode are applicable
for connections. Refer to WV-CU650 Operating Instructions
for details on the switch setting for each mode.
■ CONTROLLER NO. Switch
Setting
Normally, set this switch to “1” (default position).
BEFORE OPERATION
Note: This section describes the terminal mode. To operate
2. To turn on the power of the system controller, connect
the AC adapter to the AC outlet.
in the PS·Data mode, refer to the operating instructions.
The OPERATE indicator lights up and "Terminal Mode
No User" appears on the LCD.
Before starting the following procedures, all system compo-
nents must be turned on.
The following procedures are applicable when the system
controller is connected to the matrix switcher.
Terminal Mode
No User
■ Operation Start (Login)
Note: When auto login is set to ON, operators can log into
the system without entering their passwords. (Refer to
p. 2 Operation Start (Auto Login).)
3. To select your registered operator ID number (1 to 16,
up to 2 digits), press the numeric buttons, then press
the CAM (SET) button.
"Password" entry form appears on the LCD.
This operation is skipped when the auto login is set to ON.
(Refer to the operating instructions of matrix switcher.)
User ID
Password
150
_____
1. Turn on the power switches of all system components.
The OPERATE indicator will light up.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note: The factory default setting is 150.
Note: If you want to save the power consumption, discon-
nect the DC 9 V plug from the controller, and remove
the AC adapter from the AC outlet.
4. To select your registered password (up to 5 digits),
press the numeric buttons, then press the CAM (SET)
button.
The factory default setting is "150".
■ Operation End (Auto Logout)
If the operator ID and password are correct, "Login OK"
will blink on the LCD for about 3 seconds. Then, "Mon -"
"Cam - -" will appear on the LED display.
If the auto logout is set to ON and no operation takes place
for a specific time, any operators can logout automatically.
After the logout, "Terminal Mode No User" automatically
appears on the LCD.
User ID
Password
150
__∗ ∗ ∗
Terminal Mode
No User
Mon- Cam--
You can activate auto logout and set up the duration until
logout (configurable by minute) through WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console. (Refer to the operating instructions
of matrix switcher.)
Note: If an operator ID or password error occurs,
"Invalid" will blink on the LCD for about 3 seconds.
Then, return to Step 3 and select your operator ID.
Invalid
Blinking
■ Operation Start (Auto Login)
If the auto login is set to ON, any operators can log into the
system automatically. After the controller is turned on,
"AUTO" appears on the LCD for approximately 2 seconds,
then "Mon -" "Cam - -" automatically appears.
Auto login is configurable through WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console. (Refer to the operating instructions
of matrix switcher.)
Mon- Cam--
■ Operation End (Logout)
This operation is skipped when the auto logout is set to ON.
This function is used when an operator leaves the controller
or no longer requires access to the system.
To log out of the system, press the MON LOCK/LOGOUT
button while holding down the SHIFT button.
"Logout" will blink on the LCD for about 3 seconds. Then,
"Terminal Mode No User" appears on the LCD.
Terminal Mode
No User
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MONITOR SELECTION AND CAMERA SELECTION
Note: This section describes the terminal mode. To operate
● Releasing Priority Lock
1. Select the desired monitor. (Refer to Monitor Selection.)
in the PS·Data mode, refer to the operating instructions.
After the login procedure, the following operations are avail-
able to control the system.
The operation begins with selecting a monitor, then the
selected camera appears the active monitor.
2. Press the MON LOCK/LOGOUT button to release the
priority lock mode.
The monitor number returns to the normal display on
the active monitor.
■ Monitor Selection
1. To select the desired monitor number (1 to 4), press the
numeric button.
■ Camera Selection
1. Select the desired monitor. (Refer to Monitor Selection.)
2. Press the MON (ESC) button to execute the selection.
The selected monitor number will appear on the LCD.
2. Press the numeric buttons to select the desired camera
number (1 to 99).
Mon1 Cam--
3. Press the CAM (SET) button.
The selected camera's image will appear on the active
monitor, and the selected camera number will appear
on the LCD.
3. If the selected monitor number is not valid, or if an oper-
ator with higher priority is controlling the monitor, the
monitor number and "Prohibited" will blink on the LCD
for approximately 3 seconds.
Mon1 Cam03
In this case, return to Step 1 and select another monitor
number.
Note: If you have entered a wrong camera number,
Mon- Cam--
Prohibited
press the CLEAR button to clear the input.
4. If the selected camera number is not valid, "Prohibited"
and the camera number will blink on the LCD for about
3 seconds.
Blinking
In this case, return to Step 2 and select another camera
number.
■ Priority Lock
● Applying Priority Lock
5. To replace the currently selected camera with the next
higher-numbered camera , press the + button.
To replace the currently selected camera with the next
lower-numbered camera, press the – button.
1. Select the desired monitor. (Refer to Monitor Selection).
2. Press the MON LOCK/LOGOUT button to toggle the pri-
ority lock mode on and off on the active monitor.
If the priority lock mode is selected, the monitor number
will inversely appear on the active monitor as shown in
the figure.
Mon1 Cam03
Mon1 Cam04
M04
Note: If the camera is selected by an operator with
Note: This function will prevent operators with lower priority
from gaining control of a monitor.
higher priority, "Prohibited" will blink on the LCD.
However, higher or equal priority operators may still
gain control of the monitor.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAMERA CONTROL
Note: This section describes the terminal mode. To operate
3. To adjust the lens zoom, move the zoom wheel con-
troller to the right (TELE) or left (WIDE).
in the PS·Data mode, refer to the operating instructions.
Buttons and control for cameras or camera site accessories
are located on the 3D joystick unit and the right side of
main unit.
Included are zoom control, focus control, iris control, preset
and pan/tilt controls.
Normally, combination cameras equipped with the specific
feature or a WV-RC100 or WV-RC150 Receiver are required
to utilize these functions.
Note: Refer to the cameras' operating instructions whether
to confirm that each function is available.
4. Press the IRIS OPEN or CLOSE buttons to open/close
the lens iris. The lens iris is adjusted by these buttons to
obtain the proper image exposure.
■ Lens Control
This function is available when specified lens, with motor-
ized zoom/ focus functions, is mounted on the camera, and
the lens selection (DC/VIDEO) on the camera is set to DC.
OPEN
IRIS
CLOSE
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 3
Monitor Selection and p. 3 Camera Selection.)
Note: To set the lens iris automatically, press the A but-
ton of 3D joystick unit.
2. Press the FOCUS FAR or NEAR button while watching
the monitor. The lens focus is adjusted to obtain a
sharply focused image.
■ Pan/Tilt Control
● Manual Operation
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 3
Monitor Selection and p. 3 Camera Selection.)
FAR
FOCUS
NEAR
2. Move the 3D joystick to move the pan/tilt head towards
the desired direction.
Note: Pressing the B button or top button of 3D joystick
unit can also set the lens focus automatically.
Top button
● Auto Panning
Refer to p. 8 Camera Panning Function for how to oper-
ate.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Program Preset Position
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 3
■ Call Preset Position
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 3
Monitor Selection and p. 3 Camera Selection.)
Monitor Selection and p. 3 Camera Selection.)
2. To move the camera to the position to be preset, move
the 3D joystick and press the lens control buttons.
2. To select the desired preset position number, press the
numeric buttons. (1 to 64)
3. To select the desired preset position number, press the
numeric buttons. (1 to 64)
3. When you have selected a wrong number, press the
CLEAR button to clear the numeric input.
4. When you have selected a wrong number, press the
CLEAR button to clear the numeric input.
4. Press the PRESET/PGM PRESET button to move to the
preset position of the selected camera on the active
monitor.
5. Press the PRESET/PGM PRESET button while holding
down the SHIFT button to save a preset position of the
selected camera.
Mon1 Cam03
Pre05
Mon1 Cam03
Memory
Pre48
Notes:
• To use the above function, you must set the preset
position number for the camera.
Notes:
• If you press no numeric buttons or the button 0 in
Step 2, the camera will move to the home position.
• If the entered position number has stored the previ-
ous preset position, it will be overwritten by the new
one.
• SETUP MENU and WJ-SX150A Administrator
Console can configure each operator's pan/tilt con-
trol. (Refer to the operating instructions of matrix
switcher.)
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAMERA FUNCTION CONTROL
Note: This section describes the terminal mode. To operate
■ Camera Function (Shortcut
in the PS·Data mode, refer to the operating instructions.
Function)
The following function is available only when specified cam-
eras with the camera function feature are used.
This function enables executing camera functions via a
shortcut.
■ Camera Setup
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 3
Monitor Selection and p. 3 Camera Selection.)
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 3
Monitor Selection and p. 3 Camera Selection.)
2. Press the numeric buttons to select an assigned func-
tion number, then press the CAM FUNC/SYS FUNC but-
ton.
2. Press the MENU button repeatedly until "Camera Setup"
appears on the LCD.
For example, enter 175 for AGC ON.
The selected function will be executed on the active
monitor.
Camera Setup 006
On Off Rst A.Rst
3. Press the F1 button. The camera's SETUP MENU will
appear on the active monitor.
Notes:
• When you select a wrong number, press the CLEAR
button to clear the numeric input.
• Refer to the cameras' operating instructions for
details on available shortcuts.
Camera Setup 006
5On Off Rst A.Rst
4. To select the desired item in the menu, move the 3D
joystick to ▼ or ▲. To select the desired parameter (or
mode) in the menu, move the 3D joystick to t or s.
5. To execute the currently highlighted selection and to
enter a submenu of SETUP MENU, press the CAM
(SET) button.
6. To leave from the currently selected menu and to return
to the previous page of the menu, press the MON (ESC)
button.
7. Move the cursor to SPECIAL on the camera’s setup
menu, and press the F3 button to display the special
menu.
8. Move the cursor to CAMERA RESET on the camera’s
setup menu, and press the F4 button to reset all the
functions to the defaults.
Note: Refer to the operating instructions of the selected
camera for details.
9. To close the camera's SETUP MENU, press the F2 but-
ton.
10. To exit the mode, press the MON (ESC) button.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Patrol Learn and Play
A routine of manual operations can be stored for a specific
■ Auto Pan Setup and Activation
You will set up and activate the auto pan function. The cam-
time and later reproduced repetitively.
era can pan between the start and end points you will set.
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 3
Monitor Selection and p. 3 Camera Selection.)
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 3
Monitor Selection and p. 3 Camera Selection.)
2. To save the patrol sequence, follow the procedure
below.
2. Press the MENU button repeatedly until "Auto Pan
Setup" appears on the LCD.
q Press the MENU button repeatedly until "Patrol
Learn" will appear on the LCD.
Auto Pan Setup 008
Play Rvrs Start End
Patrol Learn
Start Stop
007
3. To set the start and end point of auto pan, perform the
following.
w Press the F1 button.
e Operate the camera manually.
r Press the F2 button.
q To move the camera to a point you wish to start
auto pan, move the 3D joystick and press the lens
control buttons (IRIS OPEN and CLOSE, FOCUS
FAR and NEAR).
The operation data will be saved.
w Press the F3 button.
3. To reproduce the operation data, follow the procedure
below.
The start point of auto pan will be set.
e To move the camera to a point you wish to end auto
pan, move the 3D joystick.
q Press the MENU button repeatedly until "Auto
Mode" appears on the LCD.
r Press the F4 button.
The end point of auto pan will be set.
Auto Mode 009
Seq Sort Pan Patrol
w Press the F4 button.
e To stop the reproduction, move the 3D joystick.
4. To exit the mode, press the MON (ESC) button.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Camera Panning Function
There are three panning modes available as follows:
sequence mode, sort mode, and auto pan. (Refer to the
operating instructions of matrix switcher.)
■ Changing to Black and White
Images
This function gets the clear camera images on the monitor
while shooting the objects under low light conditions.
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 3
Monitor Selection and p. 3 Camera Selection.)
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 3
Monitor Selection and p. 3 Camera Selection.)
2. Press the MENU button repeatedly until "Auto Mode"
appears on the LCD.
2. Press the MENU button repeatedly until "BW Mode"
appears on the LCD.
Auto Mode 009
Seq Sort Pan Patrol
BW Mode 010
On Off Auto1 Auto2
3. Press the assigned function button to activate the pan-
ning function of the selected camera.
3. Press the F1 button to change the image from the color
mode to the BW (black and white) mode on the active
monitor.
The LCD will indicate the selected mode as follows.
F1: "Seq" (Activates SEQUENCE PAN.)
F2: "Sort" (Activates SORT PAN.)
F3: "Pan" (Activates AUTO PAN.)
4. Press the F2 button to change the BW image to the
color image on the active monitor.
5. Press the MON (ESC) button to exit the mode.
Note: The AUTO MODE parameter, previously set in
the camera's SETUP MENU, will be automatically
replaced to the activated function parameter.
4. To exit the mode, press the MON (ESC) button.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAMERA SITE ACCESSORIES CONTROL
Note: This section describes the terminal mode. To operate
● Auxiliary Control
in the PS·Data mode, refer to the operating instructions.
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 3
Monitor Selection and p. 3 Camera Selection.)
2. Press the AUX1 ON/OFF button to turn on the user's
auxiliary switch 1 of the receiver.
■ Receiver Control
The following functions are available only when the
receivers are included in the system and the specified
camera housing is installed.
Press the AUX1 ON/OFF button while holding down the
SHIFT button to turn off the user's auxiliary switch 1 of
the receiver.
3. Press the AUX2 ON/OFF button to turn on the user's
auxiliary switch 2 of the receiver.
● Camera Housing Control
Wiper Control
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 3
Monitor Selection and p. 3 Camera Selection.)
Press the AUX2 ON/OFF button while holding down the
SHIFT button to turn off the user's auxiliary switch 2 of
the receiver.
2. Press the WIPER button to turn on the housing wiper of
the camera repeatedly until buttons are released.
Defroster Control
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 3
Monitor Selection and p. 3 Camera Selection.)
2. Press the DEF ON/OFF button to turn on the housing
defroster of the camera.
3. To turn off the defroster, press the DEF ON/OFF button
while holding down the SHIFT button.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RUNNING SEQUENCE
Note: This section describes the terminal mode. To operate
■ Group Sequence
in the PS·Data mode, refer to the operating instructions.
The following function is available only if a group sequence
has been previously established in WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console.
As described earlier, a group sequence determines the
assignment of monitors and cameras. Therefore, monitor
selection is not required.
■ Tour Sequence
The following functions are available if a tour sequence has
been previously configured through SETUP MENU or WJ-
SX150A Administrator Console. Any tour sequence can be
assigned to any monitors.
1. Press the numeric buttons to select a desired group
sequence number.
2. When you have selected a wrong number, press the
CLEAR button to clear the numeric input.
1. Select the desired monitor and camera. (Refer to p. 3
Monitor Selection and p. 3 Camera Selection.)
3. Press the TOUR SEQ/GROUP SEQ button while holding
down the SHIFT button to run a group sequence for-
ward on the assigned monitors.
2. To select the desired tour sequence number, press the
numeric buttons.
3. When you have selected a wrong number, press the
CLEAR button to clear the numeric input.
Mon1 Cam01
T01
4. Press the TOUR SEQ/GROUP SEQ button to run the
tour sequence in the forward direction on the active
monitor.
4. Press the SEQ PAUSE/SEQ STOP, + or – button to
operate the group sequence. Refer to Step 5 of Tour
Sequence in this page for how to use these buttons.
Mon1 Cam01
T04
5. To stop the sequence, select one of the monitors that
are being run on the selected group sequence, then
press the SEQ PAUSE/SEQ STOP button while holding
down the SHIFT button
5. Press the SEQ PAUSE/SEQ STOP button to pause a
tour sequence on the active monitor.
The "P" sign (indicating the pause status) is displayed
at the tour sequence number on the active monitor, and
a camera number currently selected appears on the
LCD.
Note: If an alarm is activated during a sequence pause, the
sequence runs again after the matrix switcher recovers
from the alarm mode.
Mon1 Cam07
T04P
• Press the SEQ PAUSE/SEQ STOP button to restart a
tour sequence forward from the next step that was pre-
viously paused.
• Press the + button to move the sequence one frame to
the next step from the step that was previously paused.
• Press the – button to move the sequence one frame to
the previous step from the step that was previously
paused.
6. Press the SEQ PAUSE/SEQ STOP button while holding
down the SHIFT button to stop a tour sequence on the
active monitor and return to spot monitoring.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MONITOR DISPLAY CONTROL
Note: This section describes the terminal mode. To operate
● Displaying All the Items
1. Perform Step 1 of Displaying Each Item.
in the PS·Data mode, refer to p. 35.
2. Hold down the SHIFT button.
The LCD display will become as follows.
■ On-screen Display (OSD)
Control
OSD Position
All
003
The procedure described below lets you determine the dis-
play parameters, such as camera title, clock and status, on
and off on the active monitor screen.
Before controlling each item, monitor selection is neces-
sary. (Refer to p. 3 Monitor Selection.)
3. Press the F1 button.
(1), (2), (3), and (4) will appear/disappear on/from the
active monitor.
08/21/2002 12:50:28 PM
(1)
■ On-screen Display (OSD)
Position Control
The procedure described below lets you determine the dis-
play positions, such as camera title, clock and status, on
the active monitor screen.
(4)
M1 K1 T01
C01 camera title
ALARM10*
(3)
(2)
Clock
08/21/2002 12:50:59 PM
● Displaying Each Item
1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until "OSD On/Off"
appears on the LCD.
OSD On/Off
Clock Cam Event Mon
002
M1 K1 T01
C01 camera title
ALARM10*
2. Perform desired operations.
q Displaying the clock
Camera title
Event
Toggle the F1 button.
Monitor status
(1) will appear/disappear on/from the active moni-
tor.
w Displaying the camera title
Toggle the F2 button.
(2) will appear/disappear on/from the active moni-
tor.
e Displaying the event
● Moving Each Item
1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until "OSD Position"
appears on the LCD.
Toggle the F3 button.
(3) will appear/disappear on/from the active moni-
tor.
r Displaying the monitor status*
Toggle the F4 button.
OSD Position
Clock Cam Event Mon
003
(4)* will appear/disappear on/from the active moni-
tor.
* Monitor number, system controller name, tour num-
ber and recorder number
3. To exit the mode, press the MON (ESC) button.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Perform desired operations.
1. Select the desired monitor. (Refer to p. 3 Monitor
Selection.)
2. Press the MENU button repeatedly until "System Status"
appears on the LCD.
3. Press the F1 button.
The SYSTEM STATUS table will appear on the active
monitor as shown in the figure.
q Moving the clock display
Move the 3D joystick while holding down the F1 but-
ton. (1) will move to the desired direction.
w Moving the Camera Title Display
Move the 3D joystick while holding down the F2 but-
ton. (2) will move to the desired direction.
e Moving the Event Display
SYSTEM STATUS
MON
1
CAM MODE
KB
K1
K2
K4
OPE
12345
2
PRI
30
2
01
99
04
R1
T01
2
SPOT
ALARM
3
4
4
1
RECORDER PC
30
1
Move the 3D joystick while holding down the F3 but-
ton. (3) will move to the desired direction.
r Moving the Monitor Status*
Move the 3D joystick while holding down the F4 but-
ton. (4) will move to the desired direction.
* Monitor number, controller number and monitor
mode
The columns in the table indicate the states as shown in the
figure.
MON:
CAM:
Monitor number
Logical camera number (01 to 99)
Recorder number (R0 to R4)*
"– –" indicates that no camera is being
selected.
MODE:
Lists the display mode on the
monitors.
Spot mode
Tour Sequence mode (nn is the
tour sequence number.)
Camera Setup mode
WJ-SX150A Setup mode
Alarm Active mode
● Moving All the Items
1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until "OSD Position"
appears on the LCD.
SPOT:
Tnn:
CAM:
SET:
OSD Position
Clock Cam Event Mon
003
ALARM:
ACK:
VLD H:
ALM H:
SYS S:
Alarm ACK mode
Video Loss History Table
Alarm History Table
2. Hold down the SHIFT button. The LCD display will
become as follows.
System Status Table
RECORDER: Recorder mode**
Lists the system controller name
OSD Position
All
003
KB:
(K1 to K4) or PSD.
OPE:
PRI:
Lists the operator number
Lists the priority number
3. Move the 3D joystick while holding down the F1 button.
(1), (2), (3), and (4) (refer to p. 11) will move to the
desired position.
* R0 to R4 shows the following.
Recorder number
Recorder
R0
R1
R2
R3
R4
Master recorder
Slave 1 recorder
Slave 2 recorder
Slave 3 recorder
Slave 4 recorder
** When this parameter is selected, a recorder number is
displayed in the CAM area.
4. To close the SYSTEM STATUS table, press the F2 but-
ton.
■ System Status Table
The table shows the current system status.
5. To exit the mode, press the MON (ESC) button.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Alarm History Table
There are 100 alarm records stored in chronological order
■ Video Loss History Table
There are 100 video loss detection records stored in
in 10 pages of tables.
chronological order in 10 pages of table.
1. Select the desired monitor. (Refer to p. 3 Monitor
Selection.)
1. Select the desired monitor. (Refer to p. 3 Monitor
Selection.)
2. Press the ALM RECALL button. "Alarm Recall" will
appear on the LCD. The ALARM HISTORY table will
appear on the active monitor as shown in the figure.
2. Press the MENU button repeatedly until "VLD History"
appears on the LCD.
VLD History
On Off
004
Alarm Recall
3. Press the F1 button.
The VIDEO LOSS HISTORY table will appear on the
active monitor as shown in the figure.
ALARM HISTORY
1 of 2
NO YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS ALARM EVENT
016 2002/08/21 18:59:08 80
015 2002/08/21 18:58:08 80
014 2002/08/21 18:57:08 80
013 2002/08/21 18:55:08 07
012 2002/08/21 18:54:08 07
011 2002/08/21 18:53:08 07
010 2002/08/21 18:53:00 09
009 2002/08/21 18:52:08 09
008 2002/08/21 18:51:08 06
007 2002/08/21 18:50:08 06
ALARM
ACK
RESET
ALARM
ACK
RESET
ALARM
RESET
ALARM
ACK
VIDEO LOSS HISTORY
1 of 2
NO YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS CH EVENT
012 2002/08/21 18:59:08 99 VIDEO RECOVER
011 2002/08/21 18:58:08 14 VIDEO RECOVER
010 2002/08/21 18:57:08 99 VIDEO LOSS
009 2002/08/21 18:55:08 07 VIDEO LOSS
008 2002/08/21 18:54:08 R0 SW RECOVER
007 2002/08/21 18:53:08 16 VIDEO LOSS
006 2002/08/21 18:53:00 09 VIDEO LOSS
005 2002/08/21 18:52:08 R0 SW LOSS
004 2002/08/21 18:51:08 S1 SLAVE DOWN
003 2002/08/21 18:50:08 S1 SLAVE RECOVER
The columns in the table indicate the status as follows:
DATE: Lists the date and time when the alarm status
changes.
The columns in the table indicate the status as follows:
ALARM: Lists the alarm number (01 - 99).
EVENT: Lists the event when the alarm status
changes.
DATE: Lists the date and time when the video loss
status changes.
CH:
Lists logical camera number, slave unit num-
ber or recorder number that is connected to
the system.
3. Press the + button to select the next page of the history,
and press the – button to back up to the previous page.
EVENT: Lists the event when the video loss status
4. To exit the mode, press the MON (ESC) or ALM
RECALL button.
changes.
4. To exit the mode, press the F2 button or MON (ESC)
button.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ALARM CONTROL
Note: This section describes the terminal mode. To operate
■ Operation during an Alarm Mode
While an alarm mode is active, the following are available
in the PS·Data mode, refer to the operating instructions.
from the system controller:
• Operating the camera with the alarm input (ACK)
• Resetting the alarm (ALM RESET/ALM ALL RESET)
• Suspending the alarm (ALM SUSPENDED)
■ Alarm Mode
When alarm (sensor) is accepted, the matrix switcher's
operation mode changes to the alarm mode. Then, the sys-
tem operates as follows:
• The camera image (alarm image) appears on the moni-
tor.
■ Operation of an Alarm-related
Camera (ACK)
In the factory default setting, the alarm inputs 1 to 16
are associated with the same-numbered camera input
connectors. All the video output signals are sent to
Monitor 1. For example, when the alarm (sensor) con-
nected to the alarm input 1 becomes active, the camera
input connector 1’s image appears on Monitor 1.
• "ALARMnn" appears on the monitor.
You can operate the camera with the alarm input as follows:
ACK
(nn is the alarm number).
1. Select a monitor which displays "ALARM".
2. Press the ACK button.
"ACK" will appear on the monitor with an alarm input.
The camera with an alarm input will become operable.
3. Operate camera with the system controller.
Panning, tilting, zoom, focus, and iris are available.
When selecting another monitor, "ACK" will disappear
from the display. The matrix switcher system will return
to the alarm mode.
ALARM01
• Alarm output signals are supplied from Alarm Output 1
to 4 (#10, 11, 23 and 24) of the ALARM port (25-pin D-
sub connector) at the rear panel. Alarm Output 1 to 4 is
associated with MONITOR OUT 1 to 4. For example,
when an alarm input signal is activated on MONITOR
OUT 1, the matrix switcher supplies an alarm output
signal from Alarm Output 1.
• The alarm number and "Alarm" sign will appear on the
LCD. Then, "Alarm" sign and the alarm indicator will
blink.
Mon1 Cam01
Alarm
AL01
There are two operation modes when more than one
alarm signal has been accepted by the matrix switcher
that is assigned to the same monitor.
• Sequence mode: An alarm operation is replaced by
another one after the dwell time ends.
• Hold mode: An initial alarm operation is continued
even after another alarm input is accepted.
Notes:
• The association of the alarm inputs with cameras and
monitors are changeable in SETUP MENU or WJ-
SX150A Administrator Console. (Refer to the operating
instructions of matrix switcher.)
• Alarm input will be automatically reset in 30 seconds.
The auto-recovery time is configurable through SETUP
MENU or WJ-SX150A Administrator Console. (Refer to
the operating instructions of matrix switcher.)
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Resetting the Alarm Inputs
There are two alarm reset functions:
■ Suspending the Alarm Inputs
Use this function when you do not want to be disturbed by
• Alarm reset (resetting the alarm inputs per monitor)
• Alarm all reset (resetting all the alarm inputs)
an alarm input, for example, during the setup procedures.
ALM SUSPENDED
● Alarm Reset
1. Select a monitor which displays "ALARM".
2. To reset the alarms, press the ALM RESET/ALM ALL
RESET button.
1. Press the ALARM/ALM SUSPEND button while holding
down the SHIFT button.
"ALM SUSPENDED" will appear on the monitor, and the
ALM SUSPEND indicator will light up.
"ALARMnn" will disappear from the selected monitor.
When alarms have been reset from all the monitors, the
LCD display and indicators of system controllers will
work as follows for recovery.
• The LCD display will return to the state before the
alarm input.
2. To cancel alarm suspension, press the ALARM/ALM
SUSPEND button while holding down the SHIFT button
again.
"ALM SUSPENDED" will disappear from the monitor,
and the ALM SUSPEND indicator will go out.
• The alarm indicator will go out.
Notes:
• An alarm continues to operate even after it is suspend-
ed.
Note: When more than one alarm is input and they are
associated with the same monitor, they cannot be reset
one by one.
•
If you suspend an alarm while an alarm image is dis-
played, "ALM SUSPENDED" will not appear on the moni-
tor. Reset the alarm, and then suspend it again.
● Alarm All Reset
1. Press the ALM RESET/ALM ALL RESET button while
holding down the SHIFT button.
2. The monitor, the indicator, and the LCD display will
change as follows:
• "ALARMnn" will disappear from all the monitor.
• The LED display will return to the state before the
alarm input.
• The alarm indicator will go out.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MUX
MULTIPLEXER OPERATIONS
Multiplexer board WJ-SXB151 is an optional board.
It enables multiscreen display, electronic zooming, still pic-
ture and multiscreen sequence.
It also enables the operation of Digital Disk Recorder WJ-
HD100 Series or time-lapse VCR, when connected to them.
Note: Before the use, it is necessary to install the
Multiplexer board in the matrix switcher and config-
ure the system through SETUP MENU and WJ-
SX150A Administrator Console. (Refer to the operat-
ing instructions of matrix switcher.)
● Multiscreen Sequence
Camera images are switched automatically in a sequence
mode.
The sequence mode (QUAD, 3+1, 8+1) is configurable
through WJ-SX150A Administrator Console.
(Refer to the operating instructions of matrix switcher.)
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to Step 1 to 3 of
Multiscreen Segment Switching.)
2. Press the TOUR SEQ/GROUP SEQ button.
A sequence of multiscreen pictures is displayed
according to the WJ-SX150A Administrator Console's
configuration.
■ Monitoring the Camera Picture
3. To cancel the sequence, press the TOUR SEQ/GROUP
SEQ button.
● Multiscreen Segment Switching
1. Select the desired monitor. (Refer to p. 3 Monitor
Selection.)
Note: The sequence can also be cancelled by selecting
the desired camera. (In this case, you can automatically
exit the recorder mode.)
2. To select a Multiplexer, press the corresponding
numeric button.
Multiplexer board
Master Multiplexer board 0 (You can skip pressing this button.)
Slave 1 Multiplexer board
Slave 2 Multiplexer board
Slave 3 Multiplexer board
Slave 4 Multiplexer board
Numeric button
● Still Multiscreen Picture
Still pictures can also be displayed in a multiscreen.
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to Step 1 to 3 of
Multiscreen Segment Switching.)
1
2
3
4
2. Press the MENU repeatedly until "Mux Still" appears on
the LCD.
3. Press the RECORDER/UNIT button. The system will
enter the recorder mode. The images from the recorder
are displayed on the active monitor in multiscreen seg-
ments.
Mux Still
"Input Still CH"
052
4. Press the MULTI SCREEN button.
Every time you press the button, the multiscreen seg-
ment patterns are switched. (The following is the factory
default setting.)
3. Press the numeric button corresponding to the camera
number.
4 (segments) → 9 → 16 → 4
4. Press the F1 button.
5. To return to the spot display, select the desired camera.
The selected camera image will change into the still
picture.
Note: If you activate Quad Shift in Multiplexer Mode win-
dow of WJ-SX150A Administrator Console, the multi-
screen segment patterns can be switched as follows.
4A (Page 1 of the quad – Camera 1, 2, 3, and 4) → 4B
(Page 2 - Camera 5, 6, 7 and 8) → 4C (Page 3 -
Camera 9, 10, 11 and 12) → 4D (Page 4 - Camera 13,
14, 15 and 16) → 9 (segments) → 16 → 4A
"STILL" and the camera title alternately blink on the
monitor.
5. To cancel the still picture, press the numeric button cor-
responding to the desired camera number, and then
press the F1 button.
(Refer to the operating instructions of matrix switcher.)
Notes:
• "STILL" does not appear when the still display is set to
OFF.
• When you skip Step 3 and do Step 4, all the channels
displayed in the multiscreen segments will be changed
into the still pictures.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. To move the zoom area, move the 3D joystick.
● Still Playback Spot Picture
The playback spot picture can be changed into the still pic-
ture.
Note: To use this function, you need to connect a WJ-HD100
Series recorder or time-lapse VCR to the matrix switcher.
8. To cancel the zooming, press the EL-ZOOM button.
Note: Still picture is not available while zooming is acti-
vated.
Note: When a WJ-HD100 Series recorder or a Panasonic
time-lapse VCR is connected to the matrix switcher,
recording status will appear on the monitor in the
recorder mode. When the normal recording is activat-
ed, "REC" will appear on the monitor. When the alarm
recording is activated, "REC ALM" will appear.
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to Step 1 to 3 of p. 16
Multiscreen Segment Switching.)
2. Press the PLAY/PAUSE button. The system will enter
the playback mode.
3. Select a camera channel by pressing a numeric button
and then pressing the CAM (SET) button. The selected
camera image will be displayed in a spot picture.
REC
REC ALM
4. Press the MENU repeatedly until "Mux Still" appears on
the LCD.
Mux Still
"Input Still CH"
052
5. Press the F1 button.
The selected camera image will change into the still
picture.
6. To cancel the still picture, press the F1 button again.
Notes:
• Still picture is not available while zooming is activat-
ed.
• Even when still picture is displayed, the playback of
the recorder/time-lapse VCR continues.
● Electronic Zooming (EL-ZOOM)
The playback spot picture can be electrically zoomed.
Note: To use this function, you need to connect a WJ-HD100
Series recorder or time-lapse VCR to the matrix switcher.
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to Step 1 to 3 of p. 16
Multiscreen Segment Switching.)
2. Press the PLAY/PAUSE button. The system will enter
the playback mode.
3. Select a camera channel by pressing a numeric button
and then pressing the CAM (SET) button. The selected
camera image will be displayed in a playback spot pic-
ture.
4. Press the EL-ZOOM button.
"+" signs will appear on the image.
5. To move the "+" signs within the picture, move the 3D
joystick.
6. Press the EL-ZOOM button. The area surrounded by
the "+" signs will be zoomed up.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WJ-HD500 SERIES CONTROL (TERMINAL MODE)
Matrix switcher can control Digital Disk Recorder WJ-
HD500 Series. The following is the procedure of WJ-HD500
Series SETUP MENU.
<Main unit>
JogDial clockwise: Increments a parameter.
JogDial counterclockwise: Decrements a parameter.
CAM (SET) button: Executes the selections and dis-
plays a submenu.
Notes:
•
The following operating procedures are for the terminal mode.
If you are using a PS·Data system controller, refer to p. 36.
When a Multiplexer board is installed in the matrix switch-
er, you can neither connect nor control a WJ-HD500 Series
recorder. You need to remove the board from the matrix
switcher.
+ button: Increments a parameter.
– button: Decrements a parameter.
MON (ESC) button: Returns to SETUP MENU or the
previous menu.
•
<3D joystick unit>
3D joystick upward (D): Moves the cursor up.
3D joystick downward (C): Moves the cursor down.
3D joystick leftward (A): Moves the cursor to the left.
3D joystick rightward (B): Moves the cursor to the
right.
■ Displaying WJ-HD500 Series
SETUP MENU
To display WJ-HD500 Series SETUP MENU, follow the pro-
cedure below.
1. Confirm that WJ-HD500 Series is correctly and securely
connected.
2. Select the desired monitor. (Refer to p. 3 Monitor
Selection.)
6. To end the setting and return to the normal view, press
the F2 button while SETUP MENU is displayed. "B"
mark will disappear from the LCD.
3. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 19 Recorder
Mode.) Then, the selected monitor number, recorder
number, and "/HDnnn" will appear on the LCD.
Mon4 Cam--
R4
/HD500
4. Press the MENU button repeatedly until “System Setup”
appears on the LCD.
System Setup
On Off
501
5. Press the F1 button.
WJ-HD500 Series SETUP MENU will appear on the
active monitor, and “B” mark will light up beside “On”.
System Setup
On Off
501
5
6. Perform the camera setting while watching the setup
menu on the monitor.
The following functions and buttons are valid in SETUP
MENU.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Multiscreen Segment Switching
Multiscreen segment patterns are configurable through WJ-
HD500 SETUP.
■ Controlling Digital Disk
Recorder WJ-HD500 Series
The following are the operating procedures of WJ-HD500
(Refer to the recorder’s operating instructions.)
Series via system controller.
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to Recorder Mode.)
Note: Refer to the operating instructions of Digital Disk
Recorder WJ-HD500 Series for details.
2. Press the MULTI SCREEN button. Every time you press
the button, the multiscreen segment patterns are
switched. (The following is the factory default setting.)
4A (Page 1 of the quad → Camera 1, 2, 3, and 4) → 4B
(Page 2 - Camera 5, 6, 7 and 8) → 4C (Page 3 -
Camera 9, 10, 11 and 12) → 4D (Page 4 – Camera 13,
14, 15 and 16) → 7 (segments) → 9 →10 → 13 → 16 →
4A
● Recorder Mode
Before operating the recorder, it is necessary to enter the
recorder mode.
1. Select the desired monitor. (Refer to p. 3 Monitor
Selection.)
3. To return to the spot display, exit the recorder mode.
2. To select a recorder, press the corresponding numeric
button.
Note: Multiscreen segment patterns are not configurable
through WJ-SX150A Administrator Console.
Recorder
Numeric button
Master recorder
Slave 1 recorder
Slave 2 recorder
Slave 3 recorder
Slave 4 recorder
0 (You can skip pressing this button.)
1
2
3
4
● Normal Playback
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to Recorder Mode.)
2. To start the playback, press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The system will enter the playback mode. Then, the
most recent recorded image will be played back.
• To pause the playback, press the PAUSE button.
• To stop the playback, press the STOP button.
3. Press the RECORDER/UNIT button. The system will
enter the recorder mode.
• The images from the recorder are displayed on the
active monitor in multiscreen segments.
• The camera number will disappear from the LCD.
• The monitor number, recorder number, and
"/ HD500" will appear on the LCD.
Mon4 Cam--
R4
/HD500
•
To resume the playback, press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
4. To exit the recorder mode, select the camera. (Refer to
p. 3 Camera Selection.) The monitor number and cam-
era number will appear on the LCD again.
• To move forward/backward search during the play-
back, move the shuttle ring clockwise or counter-
clockwise.
Shuttle ring clockwise: Fast-forward playback
Shuttle ring counterclockwise: Rewind playback
Shuttle hold button: If you press this button while
rotating the shuttle ring, playback speed will be
maintained even after removing a hand from the
shuttle ring. (The LED indicator on this button
blinks during the fast playback.)
You can also exit the recorder mode by pressing the
RECORDER/UNIT button during the recorder mode.
Note: Only one operator can enter the recorder mode.
• To move forward/backward field advance during
the pause, move the JogDial clockwise or counter-
clockwise.
JogDial clockwise: Forward field advance
JogDial
counterclockwise:
Backward
field
advance
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• To skip to the previous/next record during the play-
back, move the JogDial clockwise or counterclock-
wise. (Refer to the recorder’s operating instructions
for the description of record.)
JogDial clockwise: Skips to the previous record.
JogDial counterclockwise: Skips to the next
record.
• To display the spot picture, press the numeric but-
ton corresponding to the desired camera number,
then press the CAM (SET) button. Then, the active
camera number will appear on the LCD.
● Search Playback
You can search playback images using the Record List or
Thumbnail Display. Every time you press the SEARCH/T&D
SEARCH button, the monitor display will change as follows.
Live image → Date-and-time entry form → Record List →
Thumbnail Display → Live image...
Then, "Search Mode" will appear on the LCD.
• Date-and-time Search Playback
The recorded images can be searched for through the date
and time.
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 19 Recorder
Mode.)
2. Press the SEARCH/T&D SEARCH button. The date-and-
time entry form will appear on the center of the monitor.
Mon4 Cam01
R4
/HD500
• To resume the multiscreen display, press the MULTI
SCREEN button.
• To change the number of multiscreen segments,
press the MULTI SCREEN button again during the
multiscreen display.
Search Mode /HD500
Edit Group Alm
3. To stop the playback, press the STOP button. The mon-
itor display will return to the multiscreen display.
SEARCH
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM
2002/05/07 19:32
● Manual Recording
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 19 Recorder
Mode.)
2. To start recording, press the REC button.
The digital disk recorder will start recording.
3. To stop the recording, hold down the REC button.
Note: The factory default setting is the current date and
Note: Refer to WJ-HD500 Series Operating Instructions
time.
for details and other recording modes.
3. Press the numeric buttons or +/– button to enter the
desired date and time. The cursor can be adjusted by
moving the 3D joystick rightward or leftward.
● Stopping REC ONLY Alarm
Recording
You can stop alarm recording activated by "REC ONLY"
setting of 430 CAMERA/440 ALARM PORT/450 SERIAL
PORT/460 MUX MOTION DET in SETUP MENU or the Alarm
Mode window in WJ-SX150A Administrator Console. (Refer
to the operating instructions of matrix switcher.)
To stop the alarm recording, press the ALL RESET button
while holding down the SHIFT button.
4. Press the PLAY/PAUSE button. Record List will be dis-
played and the cursor will move to the closest date and
time.
Note: To cancel the entry form, press the MON (ESC) or
EXIT button.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note: The PLAY/PAUSE button is deactivated in the search
• Record List/Thumbnail Display
editing area.
You can operate the Record List or Thumbnail Display by
referring to the recorder’s operating instructions. In addi-
tion, the following operations from the system controllers
are also available.
● Electronic Zooming (EL-ZOOM)
Playback images can be electrically zoomed besides a
camera's optical zooming.
• Record List
DATE MAY29.00
GROUP
000010009 G2
000010008
ALL GROUP
REC-MODE
TIME
23:59:59 T/L
22:15:40 M/S ALM-TRM12
21:00:07
NO
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 19 Recorder
Mode.)
G1
000010007 G3
O/S ALM-VMD3
ALL
ALL
G4
ALL
17:33:05 T/L
7:23:11 T/L EMR
6:59:44 M/S ALM-PC4
8:55:28 T/L MAN
000010006
000010005
000010004
000010003
T/L ALM-TRM1
2343RECORD)
0:01:28
(TOTAL
000010002 G3
2. Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
SEARCH: MAY29.00
0:01 G1
ALARM # SEARCH:[DISPLAY]
SEL:←→ CHG:+– EXE:SET ESC:FSTOP
3. Press the numeric button corresponding on the desired
camera number to display the spot picture.
Search Editing Area
4. Press the CAM (SET) button.
The selected camera’s picture is displayed in the spot
mode.
• Thumbnail Display
000010009 000010008 000010007 000010006
000000013 000000012 000000011 000000010
5. Each time the EL-ZOOM button are pressed, the zoom-
ing range are changeable as follows:
2x → 4x → 8x → 1x → 2x
SEARCH MAY29.00
0:01 G1
000000007
000000008
000000009
000000006
000000005 000000004 000000003 000000002
Note: You can move the zoomed area on the monitor
Search Editing Area
by moving the 3D joystick.
<Main unit>
Shuttle ring clockwise: Moves to the next page.
Shuttle ring counterclockwise: Moves to the previous
page.
JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise: Moves the
cursor.
+ or – button: Moves the cursor.
CAM (SET) button: Displays the search editing area. /
Starts the search after you enter the search condi-
tion.
6. To return the zooming range to x 1, press the EL-ZOOM
button again.
+ button: Increments a parameter.
7. To return to the multiscreen display, press the MULTI
SCREEN button.
– button: Decrements a parameter.
PLAY/PAUSE button: Starts the playback of a record
pointed by the cursor.
MON (ESC) button: Exits the search mode and returns
to the upper menu.
● Multiscreen Sequence
F1 button: Displays/hides the search editing area..
F2 button: Selects a group to be played back.
F3 button: Changes the display mode of the Record
List between the alarm search ON and OFF.
ON: Displays only the Alarm and Emergency
Record List of the selected group.
Digital disk recorder starts a sequence according to the
setting of WJ-HD500 Series.
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 19 Recorder
Mode.)
OFF: Displays all the record lists for the selected
group.
2. Press the TOUR SEQ/GROUP SEQ button.
The sequence will be activated.
<3D joystick unit>
3. To deactivate the sequence, press the MULTI SCREEN
button.
3D joystick upward (D): Moves the cursor up.
3D joystick downward (C): Moves the cursor down.
3D joystick to leftward (A): Moves the cursor to the
left.
The monitor will change into the multiscreen display.
3D joystick to rightward (B): Moves the cursor to the
right.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WJ-HD300 SERIES CONTROL (TERMINAL MODE)
Matrix switcher can control Digital Disk Recorder WJ-
HD300 Series. The following is the procedure of WJ-HD300
Series SETUP MENU.
+ button: Increments a parameter.
– button: Decrements a parameter.
MON (ESC) button: Returns to SETUP MENU or the
previous menu.
Notes:
<3D joystick unit>
• The following operating procedures are for the terminal
mode. If you are using a PS·Data system controller,
refer to p. 36.
3D joystick upward (D): Moves the cursor up.
3D joystick downward (C): Moves the cursor down.
3D joystick to the left (A): Moves the cursor to the left.
3D joystick to the right (B): Moves the cursor to the
right.
•
When a Multiplexer board is installed in the matrix switch-
er, you can neither connect nor control a WJ-HD300 Series
recorder. You need to remove the board from the matrix
switcher.
CLEAR button: Deletes a character when editing a
camera title, user ID, or password, etc.
■ Displaying WJ-HD300 Series
SETUP MENU
To display WJ-HD300 Series SETUP MENU, follow the pro-
cedure below.
6. To end the setting and return to the normal view, press
the F2 button when SETUP MENU is displayed. "B"
mark will disappear from the LCD.
1. Confirm that WJ-HD300 Series is correctly and securely
connected.
2. Select the desired monitor. (Refer to p. 3 Monitor
Selection.)
3. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 19 Recorder
Mode.) Then, the selected monitor number, recorder
number, and "/HD300" will appear on the LCD.
■ Controlling Digital Disk
Recorder WJ-HD300 Series
The following are the operating procedures of WJ-HD300
Series via the system controller.
Mon4 Cam--
R4
/HD300
● Recorder Mode
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. (Refer to
p. 19.)
4. Press the MENU button repeatedly until "System Setup"
appears on the LCD.
System Setup
On Off
301
301
● Multiscreen Segment Switching
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. (Refer to
p. 19.)
5. Press the F1 button.
Note: The multiscreen segment patterns can be switched
as follows. (Applicable for WJ-HD316)
System Setup
On Off
5
4 segments (1 - 4 CH) → 4 segments (5 - 8 CH) → 4
segments (9 - 12 CH) → 4 segments (13 - 16 CH) → 7
segments (1 - 7 CH) → 9 segments (1 - 9 CH) → 9 seg-
ments (10 -16 CH) → 10 segments (1 - 10 CH) → 13
segments (1 - 13 CH) → 16 segments (1 - 16 CH)
WJ-HD300 Series SETUP MENU will appear on the
active monitor, and “B” mark will light up beside “On”.
The following functions and buttons are valid in SETUP
MENU.
<Main unit>
JogDial clockwise: Increments a parameter.
JogDial counterclockwise: Decrements a parameter.
CAM (SET) button: Executes the selections and dis-
plays a submenu.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Available buttons and functions (Common)
F1 button: Thumb or List
● Normal Playback
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. (Refer to
p. 19.)
Note: Refer to the recorder’s operating instructions for
details and other playback modes.
Changes the monitor display between the recording
event list window and thumbnail menu.
F3 button: Text
Displays text information of selected event on the
recording event list.
● Manual Recording
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. (Refer to
p. 20.)
F4 button: Copy
Displays the DATA COPY window while the recording
event, VMD search, or making list window is displayed.
F1 button while holding down the SHIFT button: Nr-A
Specifies the normal or event recording area for the
playback media.
● Stopping REC ONLY Alarm
Recording
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. (Refer to
p. 20.)
F2 button while holding down the SHIFT button: Cp-A
Specifies the copy area for the playback media.
F3 button while holding down the SHIFT button: Cpy1
■ Search Playback
This button is reserved for future use.
You can search recorded images through the date and
time.
F4 button while holding down the SHIFT button: Cpy2
This button is reserved for future use.
Every time you press the SEARCH/T&D SEARCH button in
the recorder mode, the monitor display will change as fol-
lows.
Live image → Date-and-time entry form → Recording event
list → VMD search list → Marking list → Date-and-time
entry form…
Notes:
• The monitor display is not changed even if pressing the
F1 button while the date-and-time entry form is dis-
played.
• To close the monitor display activated by the function
buttons, press the MON (ESC) button.
• The DATA COPY window is not displayed while a
thumbnail window is displayed.
The following are the details on LCD display patterns and
function buttons.
• Refer to the operating instructions of recorder for details
on each function.
LCD display while the event list is displayed on the
monitor
Available buttons and functions (Text information)
<Main unit>
Search Mode /HD300
Thumb
Text Copy
CAM (SET), MON (ESC), or EXIT button: Returns to
the upper menu.
F1
F2
F3
F4
Note: Text editing is not available.
Available buttons and functions (DATA COPY window)
<Main unit>
LCD display while the thumbnail menu is displayed on
the monitor
JogDial clockwise: Increments a parameter.
JogDial counterclockwise: Decrements a parameter.
CAM (SET) button: Executes the selection and starts
data copy. (If "OK" is selected) / Cancels the selec-
tion and returns to the upper menu. (If "CANCEL" is
selected)
Search Mode /HD300
Text Copy
List
F1
F2
F3
F4
MON (ESC) or EXIT button: Cancels the selection and
returns to the upper menu.
<3D joystick unit>
3D joystick upward (D): Moves the cursor up.
3D joystick downward (C): Moves the cursor down.
3D joystick leftward (A): Moves the cursor to the left.
3D joystick rightward (B): Moves the cursor to the
right.
Note: While holding down the SHIFT button, the LCD dis-
play will become as follows.
Search Mode /HD300
Nr-A Cp-A Cpy1 Cpy2
F1
F2
F3
F4
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Select a desired searching filter by moving the joystick
rightward or leftward.
• Date-and-time Search Playback
The recorded images can be searched for through the date
and time.
TIME&DATE
CAMERA
REC EVENT
TEXT
UNLOCK FILTER
TEXT
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 19 Recorder
Mode.)
TIME&DATE
CAM REC EVT
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
2. Press the SEARCH/T&D SEARCH button repeatedly
until the date-and-time entry form appears on the moni-
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM
TOTAL
100
tor.
TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK
The date-and-time entry form will appear on the center
of monitor.
Note: The illustration is an example in which "CAMERA"
has been selected for the searching filter.
START
4. To determine the filter setting, press the CAM (SET) but-
:
:
ton.
FEB
2
12
00
00 AM
04
.
.
The searching filter window will be displayed on the
monitor.
TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK
CAMERA FILTERING
CAMERA
Note: The factory default setting is the current date and
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
time.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
3. Enter the desired date and time by performing either of
the following.
SET : [ SET ]
CANCEL : [ ESC ]
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
The cursor can be adjusted by moving the 3D joystick
to the right or left.
Note: The searching filter window differs depending on
the searching filter selected in Step 2. Refer to p. 25
Searching filter windows for details on each win-
dow.
4. Press the PLAY/PAUSE or CAM (SET) button. After the
search through the date and time, the recorded image
will be played.
5. Filter recording events. (Refer to p. 25 earching filter
windows.)
5. To exit the entry form, press the MON (ESC) or EXIT
button. The live image will be displayed again on the
monitor.
6. To exit the searching filter window, press the MON
(ESC) button. The searching filter window will be
closed, and the recording event list window will be dis-
played again on the monitor.
• Recording event search
Note: Refer to Step 3 for the screenshot.
You will select a searching filter from "TIME&DATE", "CAM-
ERA", "REC EVENT", and "TEXT". Playback pictures will be
searched by the selected searching filter.
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 19 Recorder
Mode.)
7. Select a desired recording event by performing one of
the following.
• Move the 3D joystick controller to up or down.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
2. Repeat pressing the SEARCH/T&D SEARCH button
until the recording event list window is displayed on the
monitor. The recorder will enter the searching mode.
Note: To move to the next or previous page, perform
either of the following.
• Move the zoom wheel controller to the right or left.
• Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or counterclock-
wise.
TIME&DATE
CAMERA
REC EVENT
TEXT
UNLOCK FILTER
TEXT
TIME&DATE
CAM REC EVT
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
8. Press the PLAY button.
The playback of selected recording event will start.
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM
TOTAL
100
TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK
9. To exit the search mode, press the MON (ESC) or EXIT
button.
The live image will be displayed again on the monitor.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Searching filter windows
Available controls and functions (REC EVENT FILTER-
ING window)
Available controls and functions (TIME&DATE FILTER-
ING window)
REC EVENT FILTERING
EMERGENCY OFF
VMD
ON
TIME&DATE FILTERING
■
TERMINAL ON
COMMAND ON
VIDEO LOSS ON
MANUAL
SCHEDULE
START
.
.
.
.
:
:
AM
AM
JAN
1
1
03
03
00
0
00
00
ON
ON
END
SET : [ SET ]
CANCEL : [ ESC ]
JAN
SET : [SET] CANCEL : [ESC]
<Main unit>
JogDial clockwise: Increments a parameter.
JogDial counterclockwise: Decrements a parameter.
+ button: Increments a parameter.
<Main unit>
JogDial clockwise: Increments a parameter.
JogDial counterclockwise: Decrements a parameter.
+ button: Increments a parameter.
– button: Decrements a parameter.
CAM (SET) button: Executes the filtering.
MON (ESC) or EXIT button: Cancels the filtering and
returns to the upper menu.
– button: Decrements a parameter.
CAM (SET) button: Executes the filtering.
MON (ESC) or EXIT button: Cancels the filtering and
returns to the upper menu.
<3D joystick unit>
3D joystick upward (D): Moves the cursor up.
3D joystick downward (C): Moves the cursor down.
3D joystick leftward (A): Moves the cursor to the left.
3D joystick rightward (B): Moves the cursor to the
right.
<3D joystick unit>
3D joystick upward (D): Moves the cursor up.
3D joystick downward (C): Moves the cursor down.
3D joystick leftward (A): Moves the cursor to the left.
3D joystick rightward (B): Moves the cursor to the
right.
Available controls and functions (TEXT FILTERING win-
dow)
Available controls and functions (CAMERA FILTERING
window)
TEXT FILTERING
WITHOUT TEXT
CAMERA FILTERING
CAMERA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SET : [ SET ]
CANCEL : [ ESC ]
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SET : [ SET ]
CANCEL : [ ESC ]
<Main unit>
JogDial clockwise: Increments a parameter.
JogDial counterclockwise: Decrements a parameter.
+ button: Increments a parameter.
<Main unit>
JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise: Changes the
camera number, pointed by the cursor, between On
and OFF.
+ button: Selects the next camera number.
– button: Selects the previous camera number.
CAM (SET) button: Executes the filtering.
MON (ESC) or EXIT button: Cancels the filtering and
returns to the upper menu.
– button: Decrements a parameter.
CAM (SET) button: Executes the filtering.
MON (ESC) or EXIT button: Cancels the filtering and
returns to the upper menu.
• VMD search
Recording events will be searched by the date and time
when a camera detected the brightness-level change.
Then, a result list or a thumbnail will be displayed.
For playback, you will select a time and date displayed on
the result list or thumbnail. Filtering is available by camera
channel, date-and-time, detection area or search mode.
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 19 Recorder
Mode.)
<3D joystick unit>
3D joystick upward (D): Moves the cursor up.
3D joystick downward (C): Moves the cursor down.
3D joystick leftward (A): Moves the cursor to the left.
3D joystick rightward (B): Moves the cursor to the
right.
2. Repeat pressing the SEARCH/T&D SEARCH button
until the VMD search list window is displayed on the
monitor. The recorder will enter the searching mode.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VMD SEARCH
TIME&DATE
CAM
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM
TOTAL
12345
TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK
3. Press the CAM (SET) button.
The VMD search window will be displayed on the moni-
tor.
Note: To set all displayed areas as motion detection
areas, press the CAM (SET) button after selecting
"ALL AREAS".
SELECT CAMERA & DATE
■
CAMERA
7. Move the "+" mark to a desired area with the 3D joy-
stick, and then press the CAM (SET) button. The start
point of motion detection area will be determined.
CAM1
START
.
.
.
.
:
:
AM
AM
JAN
END
1
1
03
03
12
12
00
00
JAN
8. Move the "+" mark to another desired area with the 3D
joystick, and then press the CAM (SET) button again.
The end point of motion detection area will be deter-
mined.
SET : [SET] SEARCH : [PLAY] CANCEL : [ESC]
4. Enter a camera number and time range.
Available controls and functions
<Main unit>
JogDial clockwise: Increments a parameter.
JogDial counterclockwise: Decrements a parameter.
+ button: Increments a parameter.
– button: Decrements a parameter.
PLAY/PAUSE button: Executes the VMD search and
returns to the upper menu.
STOP button: Stops the VMD search.
MON (ESC) or EXIT button: Cancels the VMD search
and returns to the upper menu.
9. To configure more motion detection areas, repeat Step
7 and 8. (Up to 4 motion detection areas are available.)
<3D joystick unit>
Note: To delete the motion detection area, select
"DELETE AREA" on the status bar by rotating the
JogDial or pressing the +/– button. Then, move the
"+" mark to the desired area with the joystick, and
press the CAM (SET) button.
3D joystick upward (D): Moves the cursor up.
3D joystick downward (C): Moves the cursor down.
3D joystick leftward (A): Moves the cursor to the left.
3D joystick rightward (B): Moves the cursor to the
right.
10. Select "SENSITIVITY" on the status bar by performing
either of the following.
5. Press the CAM (SET) button.
The motion detection area setup window will be dis-
played.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
Note: If no image was recorded in the time range set in
step 4, the motion detection area setup window will
not be displayed.
Note: Depending on the position of the set detection
areas, the sensitivity indications of the detection
areas may be displayed overlapping each other.
6. Select "SETUP AREA" on the status bar by performing
either of the following.
11. Select the motion detection area by moving the 3D joy-
stick to the right or left.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
26
A "+" mark will appear at the center of the monitor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Select the sensitivity by moving the joystick upward or
downward.
17. Press the PLAY button.
The playback of selected recording event will start.
The sensitivity will be applied.
OFF: The motion detector is not activated on the
camera channel.
18. To exit the search mode, press the MON (ESC) or EXIT
button.
LOW: The sensitivity level is low.
MID: The sensitivity is level is medium.
HIGH: The sensitivity level is high.
The live image will be displayed again on the monitor.
• Marking search
13. To exit the motion detection area setup window, press
the CAM (SET) button.
The recording time of the recorded images with a marked
point will be displayed in a list or a thumbnail. For playback,
you will select the desired recording time to play. (Refer to
the recorder's operating instructions for details on marking.)
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 19 Recorder
Mode.)
The motion detection mode setup window will be dis-
played on the monitor.
VMD SEARCH
■
ANY AREA
MASKING DURATION
24H
2. Repeat pressing the SEARCH/T&D SEARCH button
until the marking list window is displayed on the moni-
tor.
VECTOR
s
s
s
s
A
20
B
20
C
C
20
20
D
D
DURATION
The recorder will enter the searching mode.
s
s
s
A
20
B
20
20
SET : [SET] SEARCH : [PLAY] CANCEL : [ESC]
TIME&DATE
CAM
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
Notes:
• To cancel the motion detection area setup, press
the MON (ESC) button. The VMD search list window
will be displayed again on the monitor.
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM
TOTAL
12345
• Refer to the unit's operating instructions for details
on each detection mode.
TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK
3. Select the desired marked time by performing one of
the following.
14. Select a desired detection mode with the 3D joystick,
and select a desired parameter by performing either of
the following.
• Move the 3D joystick controller up or down.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
Note: To move to the next or previous page, perform
either of the following.
• Move the zoom wheel controller to the right or left.
• Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or counterclock-
wise.
15. Press the CAM (SET) or PLAY/PAUSE button.
The motion detection mode will be determined, and the
VMD search list window will be displayed again on the
monitor.
Notes:
4. Press the PLAY button.
• Refer to Step 2 for the screenshot.
• To cancel the setting and return to the motion
detection area setup window, press the MON (ESC)
or EXIT button.
The playback of selected recording event will start.
5. To exit the search mode, press the MON (ESC) or EXIT
button.
The live image will be displayed again on the monitor.
16. Select a desired recording event by performing one of
the following.
• Thumbnail window
• Move the 3D joystick controller up or down.
• Rotate the JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise.
• Press the + or – button.
To change a list (recording event list, VMD search list, or
marking search list) to the thumbnail, press the F1 button.
The monitor display will become as follows.
Note: To move to the next or previous page, perform
either of the following.
• Move the zoom wheel controller to the right or left.
• Rotate the shuttle ring clockwise or counterclock-
wise.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Available controls and functions
<Main unit>
4. When you specify a disk, the search list display will
appear on the active monitor, and "Search Mode" menu
will appear on the LCD. Then, perform the search play-
back operation. (Refer to p. 23 Search Playback.)
Shuttle ring clockwise: Moves to the next page.
Shuttle ring counterclockwise: Moves to the previous
page.
JogDial clockwise or counterclockwise: Moves the
cursor.
+ or – button: Moves the cursor.
PLAY/PAUSE button: Starts playback of the record
pointed by the cursor.
Search Mode /HD300
Thumb
Text Copy
MON (ESC) or EXIT button: Exits the search mode
and returns to the upper menu.
F1 button: Changes the monitor display to the list.
<3D joystick unit>
3D joystick upward (D): Moves the cursor to the left.
3D joystick downward (C): Moves the cursor to the
right.
■ A - B Repeat Playback
You can playback the recorded images repeatedly by
specifying the start point (A) and end point (B).
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 19 Recorder
Mode.)
3D joystick leftward (A): Moves the cursor to the left.
3D joystick rightward (B): Moves the cursor to the
right.
2. Press the MENU button repeatedly until "HD300 A – B
repeat" appears on the LCD.
Zoom wheel controller to the right: Moves to the next
page.
Zoom wheel controller to the left: Moves to the previ-
ous page.
HD300 A—B Repeat 303
Start End
Cancel
Note: To cancel the setting and exit "HD300 A – B
repeat", press the MON (ESC) or EXIT button. The
LCD display will return to the default status.
■ Disk Selection
You will specify a disk of recorder for search playback.
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 19 Recorder
Mode.)
3. During playback, press the F1 button at the point you
wish to start playback. The playback start point (A) will
be set.
2. Press the MENU button repeatedly repeatedly until
"HD300 DiskSelect" appears on the LCD.
Note: To cancel the start point, press the F4 button.
4. Press the F2 button at the point you wish to end play-
back. The playback end point (B) will be set, and the
repeat playback will be performed between (A) and (B).
HD300 DiskSelect 302
Nr-A Cp-A Cpy1 Cpy2
3. Press one of the F1 to F4 buttons.
The specified disk will be selected.
■ Canceling Filters
Available buttons and functions
During the filtering playback, the searching filter will be
F1: Nr-A
temporarily canceled or recovered.
Specifies the normal or event recording area for play-
back.
F2: Cp-A
Notes:
• This function is available only during filtering playback.
• You can change the ON/OFF setting during playback
and playback pause.
Specifies the copy area for playback.
F3: Cpy1
This button is reserved for future use.
F4: Cpy2
This button is reserved for future use.
MON (ESC)
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 19 Recorder
Mode.)
Cancels search playback and recovers the default LCD
status.
EXIT
2. Press the MENU button repeatedly until "HD300 Listed"
appears on the LCD.
Cancels search playback and recovers the default LCD
status.
HD300 Listed
On Off
304
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note: If the recorder is WJ-HD300 Series, "B" mark will
■ Marking
light up beside "Off" in the default status.
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 19 Recorder
Mode.)
3. Press the F2 button.
The searching filter will be canceled, and "B" mark will
2. Press the MARK button during the playback.
The playback start point will be marked.
light up beside "Off".
HD300 Listed
On Off
304
Note: The marked playback images will be listed in the
marking list window. Refer to p. 27 Marking search for
how to play back.
Notes:
• To recover the searching filter, press the F1 button.
The searching filter will be recovered, and "B" mark
will light up beside "On".
• To cancel the setting and exit "HD300 Listed", press
the MON (ESC) or EXIT button. The LCD display will
return to the default status.
■ Displaying Camera Titles
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 19 Recorder
Mode.)
2. When you press the OSD button, the OSD display will
change.
Note: Refer to the recorder’s operating instructions for
details on operations.
■ Electronic Zooming (EL-ZOOM)
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. (Refer to
p. 21.)
Note: 2 x and 4 x are available zooming range. 8 x is
unavailable.
■ System Function
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 19 Recorder
Mode.)
2. Press the CAM FUNC/SYS FUNC button while holding
down the SHIFT button, system function of recorder will
be executed.
Notes:
• Refer to the operating instructions of recorder for details
on available functions and function numbers.
• If you have entered a wrong function number (other
than 1 to 999), "Prohibited" will appear on the LCD for
three seconds. Then, the LCD will return to the former
status.
■ Playing the Latest Recorded
Image
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 19 Recorder
Mode.)
2. Press the GO TO LAST button during the playback.
The latest recorded image will be played back.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WJ-HD200 SERIES CONTROL (TERMINAL MODE)
Matrix switcher can control Digital Disk Recorder WJ-
HD200 Series. The following is the procedure of WJ-HD200
Series SETUP MENU.
● Manual Recording
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. (Refer to
p. 20.)
Notes:
Note: Refer to WJ-HD200 Series Operating Instructions for
•
The following operating procedures are for the terminal mode.
If you are using a PS·Data system controller, refer to p. 36.
When a Multiplexer board is installed in the matrix switch-
er, you can neither connect nor control a WJ-HD200 Series
recorder. You need to remove the board from the matrix
switcher.
details and other recording modes.
•
● Stopping REC ONLY Alarm
Recording
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. (Refer to
p. 20.)
■ Displaying WJ-HD200 Series
SETUP MENU
● Search Playback
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. (Refer to
p. 18.)
You can search playback images using the ALARM
RECALL table or the SEARCH table.
Every time you press the SEARCH/T&D SEARCH button,
the display will change as follows.
Live image → Date-and-time entry form → ALARM RECALL
table → Live image
■ Controlling Digital Disk
Recorder WJ-HD200 Series
The following are the operating procedures of WJ-HD200
• Date-and-time Search Playback
Series via system controller.
The recorded images can be searched for through the date
and time.
Note: Refer to the operating instructions of Digital Disk
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 19 Recorder
Mode.)
Recorder WJ-HD200 Series for details.
2. Press the SEARCH/T&D SEARCH button. The date-and-
time entry form will appear on the center of the monitor.
● Recorder Mode
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. (Refer to
p. 19.)
● Multiscreen Segment Switching
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. (Refer to
p. 19.)
SEARCH
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM
2002/05/07 19:32
Note: 4C-, 4D-, 7-, 10-, 13- and 16-segment multiscreen
display patterns are unavailable.
● Normal Playback
Note: The factory default setting is the current date and
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. (Refer to
p. 19.)
time.
Note: You cannot skip to the previous/next record.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the numeric buttons or +/– button to enter the
desired date and time.
● Electronic Zooming (EL-ZOOM)
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. (Refer to
p. 21.)
The cursor can be adjusted by moving the 3D joystick
rightward or leftward.
Note: 2 x and 4 x are available zooming range. 8 x is
unavailable.
● Multiscreen Sequence
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. (Refer to
p. 21.)
4. Press the PLAY/PAUSE button. After the search through
the date and time, the recorded image will be played.
5. To return to the multiscreen display, press the STOP
button.
Note: To cancel the entry form, press the MON (ESC) or
EXIT button.
• ALARM RECALL table
The recorder’s alarm history will be displayed on the
ALARM RECALL table.
1. Press the ALM RECALL button. The ALARM RECALL
table will appear on the monitor.
2. Move the cursor with the 3D joystick to the desired
alarm number, and then press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The associated image will be played back.
ALARM RECALL YEAR03
NO. DATE TIME
ALM
2000 06-14 20:30:00 T1
1999 06-14 15:30:12 T3
1998 06-14 12:15:04 T4
1997 06-14 12:15:02 V8
1996 06-14 10:07:05 V2
1995 06-14 10:07:04 T2
1994 06-14 10:06:55 T6
1993 06-14 09:58:32 V5
(TOTAL 2000EVENTS)
TO SEARCH PUSH T&D KEY
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MUX
WJ-HD100 SERIES CONTROL
(TERMINAL MODE)
Digital Disk Recorder WJ-HD100 Series are operable with
the system controller, when the Multiplexer board is
installed in the matrix switcher.
● Manual Recording
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series.
Refer to p. 20.
Note: Before the use, it is necessary to install the Multi-
plexer board in the matrix switcher, connect the
matrix switcher to the digital disk recorder, and con-
figure the system through WJ-SX150A Administrator
Console, OSD SETUP MENU, and WJ-HD100
Series SETUP MENU. (Refer to the operating
instructions of matrix switcher.)
● Stopping REC ONLY Alarm
Recording
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. Refer to
p. 20.
● Search Playback
You can search playback images using the ALARM
RECALL table or the SEARCH table.
■ Displaying WJ-HD100 Series
SETUP MENU
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series.
Refer to p. 18 Displaying WJ-HD500 Series SETUP MENU.
The following functions and buttons are valid in SETUP
MENU.
Every time you press the SEARCH/T&D SEARCH button,
the display will change as follows.
Live image → Date-and-time entry form → ALARM RECALL
table → Live image
3D joystick to the left (A): Decrements a parameter
3D joystick to the right (B): Increments a parameter
• Date-and-time Search Playback
The recorded images can be searched for through the date
and time.
■ Controlling Digital Disk
Recorder WJ-HD100 Series
The following are the operating procedures of WJ-HD100
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 19 Recorder
Mode.)
2. Press the SEARCH/T&D SEARCH button. The date-and-
time entry form will appear on the center of the monitor.
Series via the system controller.
● Multiscreen Segment Switching
The operating procedure is the same as WJ-HD500 Series.
(Refer to p. 19.)
SEARCH
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM
2002/05/07 19:32
Note: 7-, 10-, or 13-segment multiscreen display is unavail-
able.
Note: The factory default setting is the current date and
● Normal Playback
time.
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. (Refer to
p. 19.)
Notes:
• You cannot skip to the previous/next record.
• Refer to WJ-HD100 Series Operating Instructions for
details and other playback modes.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the numeric buttons or +/– button to enter the
desired date and time. The cursor can be adjusted by
moving the 3D joystick rightward or leftward.
4. Press the PLAY/PAUSE button. After the search through
the date and time, the recorded image will be played.
5. To return to the multiscreen display, press the STOP
button.
Note: To cancel the entry form, press the MON (ESC) or
EXIT button.
• ALARM RECALL table
The recorder’s alarm history will be displayed on the
ALARM RECALL table.
1. Press the ALM RECALL button. The ALARM RECALL
table will appear on the monitor.
2. Move the cursor with the 3D joystick to the desired
alarm number, and then press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The associated image will be played back.
ALARM RECALL 1 OF 10
NO DATE
TIME ALM
99 JUN 9.00 00:00:00 * T
98 JUN 1.00 02:34:56 T
97 JUN 1.00 01:10:01 * V
96 MAY31.00 23:34:45 V
95 MAY30.00 02:00:20 * T
94 MAY14.00 05:30:31 * T
93 MAY 7.00 23:00:59 T
92 MAY 6.00 22:05:50 V
91 APR14.00 23:00:59 * T
90 APR14.00 16:06:34 * V
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MUX
TIME-LAPSE VCR CONTROL
[PANASONIC MODELS] (TERMINAL MODE)
A time-lapse VCR (Panasonic Models) is operable with the
system controller, while connecting to the matrix switcher.
● Rewind
1. During the stop, move the shuttle ring counterclockwise
to rewind the tape.
2. Press the STOP button to stop rewinding.
Note: Pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button during rewind
will start playback.
Note: Before the use, it is necessary to install the
Multiplexer board in the matrix switcher, connect
the matrix switcher to the time-lapse VCR, and con-
figure the system through WJ-SX150A Administrator
Console, OSD SETUP MENU, and time-lapse VCR's
SETUP MENU. (Refer to the operating instructions
of matrix switcher.)
● Manual Recording
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series.
Refer to p. 20 Manual Recording.
The following is the procedure of a Panasonic model time-
lapse VCR.
● Stopping REC ONLY Alarm
Recording
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series. Refer to
p. 20.
■ Controlling the Time-lapse VCR
The following are the operating procedures of the time-
lapse VCR via system controllers.
● Multiscreen Segment Switching
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series.
(Refer to p. 18.)
Note: 7-, 10-, and 13- segment multiscreen display pat-
terns are unavailable.
● Normal Playback
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series.
(Refer to p. 19.)
Note: You cannot skip to the previous/next record.
● Fast-forward
1. Move the shuttle ring clockwise to fast-forward the tape
during the stop.
2. To stop fast-forwarding, press the STOP button.
Note: Pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button during fast-for-
ward will start playback.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MUX
TIME-LAPSE VCR CONTROL
[NON-PANASONIC MODELS] (TERMINAL MODE)
A time-lapse VCR is operable with the system controller,
while connecting to the matrix switcher.
Note: 7-, 10-, and 13- segment multiscreen display pat-
terns are unavailable.
Notes:
• Before the use, it is necessary to install the
Multiplexer board in the matrix switcher, connect
the matrix switcher to the digital disk recorder, and
configure the system through WJ-SX150A
Administrator Console, OSD SETUP MENU, and
time-lapse VCR's SETUP MENU. (Refer to the oper-
ating instructions of matrix switcher.)
● Normal Playback
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to p. 19 Recorder
Mode.)
2. Do the playback procedure using the buttons on the
front panel. (Refer to the time-lapse VCR’s operating
instructions for how to operate.)
3. Press the PLAY/PAUSE button. The playback image will
appear on the monitor.
• You cannot control non-Panasonic time-lapse VCRs
from system controllers.
4. To display the spot picture, press the numeric buttons
corresponding to the desired camera number, then
press the CAM (SET) button. Then, the active monitor
number will appear on the LCD. (Refer to p. 20 Normal
Playback for the illustration.)
The following is the procedure of a non-Panasonic model
time-lapse VCR.
■ Controlling the Time-lapse VCR
● Multiscreen Segment Switching
The operations are the same as WJ-HD500 Series.
(Refer to p. 19.)
● Other Operations
Refer to the time-lapse VCR’s operating instructions for how
to operate.
MONITOR DISPLAY CONTROL (PS·DATA)
The operations are the same as System Controller WV-
CU360C/CJ, except for the following.
F4: Monitor status
Displays/hides the monitor status.
Note: Refer to the operating instructions of matrix switcher
for other operations.
■ On-screen Display (OSD)
■
Video Loss History Table
Control
1. Display "VLD History" sub menu. (Refer to the operat-
ing instructions of WV-CU650.)
1. Display "SX150 OSD" sub menu. (Refer to the operating
instructions of WV-CU650.)
VLD History
On Off
303
OSD On/Off
Clock Cam Event Mon
302
2. Press the F1 button.
2. Press one of the F1 to F4 buttons.
The VIDEO LOSS HISTORY table will appear on the
active monitor. (Refer to p. 13 for the illustration.)
One of the following OSD items will appear/disappear
on/from the active monitor. (Refer to p. 11 for monitor
display illustration.)
3. To close the VIDEO LOSS HISTORY table, press the F2
button.
Available buttons and functions
F1: Clock
Displays/hides the time and date.
F2: Camera title
Displays/hides the camera title.
F3: Event
Displays/hides the event.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WJ-HD500/300/200/100 SERIES CONTROL (PS·DATA)
The details on recorder control are described in WV-CU650
■ Functions Only Available with
Operating Instructions. However, when the system con-
troller (WV-CU650) is connected to recorders via the matrix
switcher (WJ-SX150 Series), the following differences will
occur.
WJ-HD200 Series/WJ-HD100
Series
The following functions are available only when the system
controller (WV-CU650) is connected to WJ-HD200 Series or
WJ-HD100 Series via the matrix switcher (WJ-SX150
Series).
■ Unavailable Functions through
WJ-SX150A Connection
The following functions are unavailable when the system
controller (WV-CU650) is connected to recorders via the
matrix switcher (WJ-SX150 Series).
Note: This function is unavailable when the system con-
troller (WV-CU650) is connected to WJ-HD500 Series
via the matrix switcher (WJ-SX150 Series).
● Alarm Recall (WJ-HD200 Series)
The LCD display becomes as follows.
● HD500 V-Multi
LCD MENU
HD500 V—Multi
HDD 204
Alarm Recall /HD200
Edit
● HD200 Alarm Search
● Alarm Recall (WJ-HD100 Series)
The LCD display becomes as follows.
J/S MENU
HD200 Alm Search
514
Alarm Recall /HD100
■ Functions Only Available with
WJ-HD300 Series
The following functions are available only when the system
controller (WV-CU650) is connected to WJ-HD300 Series
via the matrix switcher (WJ-SX150 Series).
● Time & Date Search Playback
Mmm/DD/YYYY HH:MM 12
Mar/17/2004 12:00 AM
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(2) ADDENDUM FOR MATRIX SWITCHER WJ-SX150 SERIES:
TO USE DIGITAL DISK RECORDER
WJ-HD300 SERIES/WJ-HD220 SERIES
SYSTEM CONNECTIONS AND SETUPS (WJ-HD300 SERIES/WJ-HD220 SERIES)
■ Connection with Digital Disk Recorder WJ-HD300 Series
Notes:
• Refer to service personnel for details on the connection with a recorder to operate via LAN or the Internet.
• Check that the firmware of recorder is Ver. 1.30 or later.
• Only one recorder can be connected to the DATA HDR connector of this unit. (Multiple unit connections, such as cascade
connection, are not available.)
● Basic Connection
The following is the description of the connection between a recorder and this unit to confirm the images from the recorder.
1. Set the unit address of the recorder to 1.
2. Set the [Camera control] setting to “PSD” for all cameras in SETUP MENU of the recorder.
3. Connect the unit’s CAM OUT 1 to 16 connectors to the recorder’s VIDEO IN 1 to 16 connectors with a coaxial cable.
4. Connect the unit’s EXT IN connector to the recorder’s MULTISCREEN OUT connector with a coaxial cable.
5. Connect the unit’s DATA HDR connector to the recorder’s DATA port with a modular cable.
System controller
(Terminal Mode)
Monitor
EXT IN
MONITOR OUT
EXT IN
(PLAY IN)
3
1
SIGNAL GND
ALARM
SERIAL
DATA
CAMERA
RS485(CAMERA)
SW IN
DATA HDR DATA
4
DATA
3
2
DATA
1
LINE
TERM
OFF ON
SELECT
2
4
POWER
AC IN
4
2
1
EXT OUT
PS•DATA
10
RS485(CAMERA)
8
MONITOR OUT
(REC OUT)
4
16
16
15
15
14
14
13
13
12
12
11
9
7
6
5
5
3
3
2
IN
OUT
11
10
9
8
7
6
4
2
1
CAMERA
DATA HDR
DATA 4*
(PS·Data)
Matrix Switcher
MONITOR OUT x
DATA
1
SIGNAL GND
3
1
MODE
2
COPY
1
SERIAL
ALARM
1
CASCADE
OUT
4
2
POWER
AC IN
2
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN
MONITOR (VGA)
ALARM/CONTOROL
8
DATA
RS485(CAMERA)
4
10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE
16
15
15
14
14
13
12
11
10
9
7
7
6
6
5
5
3
3
2
1
IN
OUT
16
13
12
11
10
9
8
4
2
1
VIDEO
Recorder**
* Connect these ports if you control cameras from the front panel of recorder.
** Set the recorder’s unit address to 1.
Notes:
• Make sure the recorder’s unit address is set to 1 through SETUP MENU or WJ-SX150A administrator Console. (Refer to this
unit’s operating instructions.) If another number is selected, you cannot control the recorder.
• To control cameras at the front panel of recorder, connect the DATA 4 connector and the DATA port of recorder with a
modular cable. (PS·Data system controller is not connectable to the DATA 4 connector.)
• From system controllers connected to the unit (WJ-SX150A), you cannot control the monitor connected to the MONITOR
OUT 1 connector of recorder.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● To Control a Recorder and Cameras via the Network
The following is the description of the connection between a recorder and this unit to control the recorder and cameras via the
network.
1. Set the unit address of the recorder to 5 or larger.
(Refer to the recorder’s operating instructions.)
2. Set the [Camera control] setting to “PSD” for all cameras in SETUP MENU of the recorder.
3. Connect the unit’s CAM OUT 1 to 16 connectors to the recorder’s VIDEO IN 1 to 16 connectors with a coaxial cable.
4. Connect the unit’s EXT IN connector to the recorder’s MULTISCREEN OUT connector with a coaxial cable.
5. Connect the unit’s DATA HDR and DATA4 connectors to the recorder’s DATA ports with modular cables.
6. Select the recorder’s new unit address, which is set in Step 1, in 600 RECORDER of SETUP MENU or the Recorder window
of WJ-SX150A Administrator Console. (Refer to this unit’s operating instructions.)
System controller
(Terminal Mode)
Monitor
EXT IN
MONITOR OUT
EXT IN
(PLAY IN)
3
1
SIGNAL GND
ALARM
SERIAL
DATA
CAMERA
RS485(CAMERA)
SW IN
DATA HDR DATA
4
DATA
3
2
DATA
1
LINE
TERM
OFF ON
SELECT
2
4
POWER
AC IN
4
2
1
EXT OUT
PS•DATA
10
RS485(CAMERA)
8
MONITOR OUT
(REC OUT)
4
16
16
15
15
14
14
13
13
12
12
11
9
7
6
5
5
3
3
2
IN
OUT
11
10
9
8
7
6
4
2
1
CAMERA
DATA HDR
DATA 4
(PS·Data)
Matrix Switcher
MONITOR OUT x
DATA
1
SIGNAL GND
3
1
MODE
2
COPY
1
SERIAL
ALARM
1
CASCADE
OUT
4
2
POWER
AC IN
2
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN
MONITOR (VGA)
ALARM/CONTOROL
8
DATA
RS485(CAMERA)
4
10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE
16
15
15
14
14
13
12
11
10
9
7
7
6
6
5
5
3
3
2
1
IN
OUT
16
13
12
11
10
9
8
4
2
1
VIDEO
Recorder*
HUB/Router
LAN**
* Set the recorder’s unit address to 5 or larger.
** LAN: Local Area Network
Notes:
• Select the PS·Data protocol for the DATA 4 setting.
(Refer to this unit’s operating instructions.)
• If the recorder’s unit address, set in Step 1, and the recorder setting, set in Step 6, are different, the recorder will not be
operable.
• In these connections, you cannot use a PS·Data system controller.
• From system controllers connected to the unit, you cannot control the monitor connected to the MONITOR OUT 1 connec-
tor of recorder.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● PS·Data Connection
1. Set the unit address of the recorder to 5 or larger.
2. Set the [Camera control] setting to “PSD” for all cameras in SETUP MENU of the recorder.
3. Connect the unit’s CAM OUT 1 to 16 connectors to the recorder’s VIDEO IN 1 to 16 connectors with a coaxial cable.
4. Connect the unit’s DATA4 Port connector to the recorder’s DATA port with a modular cable.
Select the recorder’s new unit address, which is set in Step 1, in 600 RECORDER of SETUP MENU or the Recorder window
of WJ-SX150A Administrator Console. (Refer to this unit’s operating instructions.)
System controller
(Terminal Mode)*
Monitor
MONITOR OUT
EXT IN
(PLAY IN)
3
1
SIGNAL GND
ALARM
SERIAL
DATA
CAMERA
RS485(CAMERA)
LINE
SELECT
SW IN
DATA HDR DATA
4
DATA
3
2
DATA
1
TERM
OFF ON
2
4
POWER
AC IN
4
2
1
EXT OUT
PS•DATA
10
RS485(CAMERA)
8
MONITOR OUT
(REC OUT)
4
16
16
15
15
14
14
13
13
12
12
11
9
7
6
5
5
3
3
2
IN
OUT
11
10
9
8
7
6
4
2
1
CAMERA
DATA 4*
(PS·Data)
Matrix Switcher
DATA
1
2
SIGNAL GND
3
4
1
2
MODE
2
COPY
1
SERIAL
ALARM
1
CASCADE
OUT
POWER
AC IN
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN
MONITOR (VGA)
ALARM/CONTOROL
8
DATA
RS485(CAMERA)
4
10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE
16
15
14
14
13
12
11
10
9
7
7
6
6
5
5
3
3
2
1
IN
OUT
16
15
13
12
11
10
9
8
4
2
1
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT z
MONITOR
OUT x
Recorder*
Monitor
Monitor
System controller
(PS·Data)
* Recorder control from system controllers connected to the matrix switcher is not available.
Notes:
• Select the PS·Data protocol for the DATA 4 setting.
(Refer to this unit’s operating instructions.)
• If the recorder’s unit address, set in Step 1, and the recorder setting, set in Step 5, are different, the recorder will not be
operable.
• Do not connect the recorder to the DATA HDR port.
• From system controllers connected to the unit, you cannot control the recorder.
• Only one matrix switcher can be connected in the PS·Data mode.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Settings of Administrator Console and SETUP MENU(OSD)
When WJ-SX150A Administrator Console is Ver. 2.03 or later
Select “HD300”.
When the firmware of this unit is Ver. 2.03 or later.
Select “HD300” for “CONTROL” in 600 RECORDER of SETUP MENU(OSD).
600 RECORDER
CONTROL
610 MASTER ---
620 SLAVE1 HD300
630 SLAVE2 HD300
640 SLAVE3 HD100
650 SLAVE4 OFF
ADR
EXT IN
01
01
01
GENLOCK OFF
GENLOCK OFF
GENLOCK OFF
--COMMUNICATION STATUS--
DATA BIT
PARITY BIT
STOP BIT
BAUD RATE
COMM PORT
7bit
ODD
1bit
9600bps
SERIAL PORT
■ Connection with Digital Disk Recorder WJ-HD220 Series
● To Confirm the Images from a Recorder Connected to the Unit
• Connection procedures are the same as WJ-HD200 Series.
• Set the DATA setting to “PSD” for CAMERA 1 to 4 in the CAMERA SYSTEM SETUP menu of the recorder.
● To Control a Recorder via the Network
• Connection procedures are the same as WJ-HD200 Series.
• Set the DATA setting to “PSD” for CAMERA 1 to 4 in the CAMERA SYSTEM SETUP menu of the recorder.
● Settings of Administrator Console and SETUP MENU(OSD)
Select “HD200” in the Administrator Console window.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WJ-HD300 SERIES CONTROL (WV-CU650 TERMINAL MODE)
Refer to p. 22 WJ-HD300 SERIES CONTROL (TERMINAL MODE).
WJ-HD300 SERIES CONTROL (WV-CU650 PS·DATA)
Refer to p. 36 and the operating instructions of system controller.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WJ-HD300 SERIES CONTROL (WV-CU360C/CJ TERMINAL MODE)
• Available operations are in common with WJ-HD500
UP
Series. (Refer to this unit’s operating instructions.)
This document describes operations applicable to WJ-
HD300 Series only.
• You cannot control the following functions from System
Controller WV-CU360C and WV-CU360CJ. (It is recom-
mended to use System Controller WV-CU650.)
• A – B repeat playback
L
R
DOWN
• GO TO LAST
• Filtering ON/OFF
Note: To exit the entry form, press the MON (ESC) but-
• MARK
ton.
• Text display ON/OFF
• Disk selection
• System functions
4. Press the PLAY or CAM (SET) button. After the search
through the date and time, the recorded image will be
played.
• Recording event search
■ Controlling Digital Disk
You will select a searching filter from "TIME&DATE", "CAM-
ERA", "REC EVENT", and "TEXT". Playback pictures will be
searched by the selected searching filter.
Recorder WJ-HD300 Series
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to the unit's operating
instructions.)
● Search Playback
You can search playback images using the ALARM
RECALL table or the SEARCH table.
2. Repeat pressing the INDEX button until the recording
event list window is displayed on the monitor.
The recorder will enter the searching mode.
Every time you press the INDEX button, the display will
change as follows.
Live image → Date-and-time entry form → Recording event
list → VMD search list → Marking list → Date-and-time
entry form...
TIME&DATE
CAMERA
REC EVENT
TEXT
UNLOCK FILTER
TEXT
TIME&DATE
CAM REC EVT
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
• Date-and-time Search Playback
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM
TOTAL
100
TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK
The recorded images can be searched for through the date
and time.
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to the unit's operating
instructions.)
Note:
• To change the monitor display to the thumbnail,
press the F1 button. (Refer to the operating instruc-
tions of recorder for details on monitor display.)
• You can display neither the text information nor
DATA COPY window.
2. Press the INDEX button. The date-and-time entry form
will appear on the monitor.
START
3. Select a desired searching filter by moving the joystick
rightward or leftward.
:
:
FEB
2
12
00
00 AM
04
.
.
TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK
TIME&DATE
CAMERA
REC EVENT
TEXT
UNLOCK FILTER
TEXT
TIME&DATE
CAM REC EVT
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
Note: The factory default setting is the current date and
time.
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM
TOTAL
100
TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK
3. Press the NEXT or PREV button to enter the desired
date and time. The cursor can be adjusted by moving
the joystick rightward or leftward.
Note: The illustration is an example in which "CAMERA"
has been selected for the searching filter.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. To determine the filter setting, press the CAM (SET) but-
Joystick: Moves the cursor.
ton.
NEXT or PREV button: Changes a parameter.
CAM (SET) button: Executes the filtering.
MON (ESC) button: Cancels the filtering and returns to
the upper menu.
The searching filter window will be displayed on the
monitor.
CAMERA FILTERING
CAMERA
Available controls and functions (REC EVENT FILTER-
ING window)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
REC EVENT FILTERING
EMERGENCY OFF
SET : [ SET ]
CANCEL : [ ESC ]
VMD
ON
TERMINAL ON
COMMAND ON
VIDEO LOSS ON
MANUAL
SCHEDULE
ON
ON
Note: The searching filter window differs depending on
the searching filter selected in Step 3. Refer to
Searching filter windows for details on each win-
dow.
SET : [ SET ]
CANCEL : [ ESC ]
Joystick: Moves the cursor.
5. Filter recording events. (Refer to Searching filter win-
dows.)
NEXT or PREV button: Changes a parameter.
CAM (SET) button: Executes the filtering.
MON (ESC) button: Cancels the filtering and returns to
the upper menu.
6. To select a desired recording event, perform the follow-
ing.
• Move the joystick upward or downward.
• Press the NEXT or PREV button.
Available controls and functions (TEXT FILTERING win-
dow)
Note: To exit the search mode, press the MON (ESC)
TEXT FILTERING
WITHOUT TEXT
button.
7. Press the PLAY button.
The playback of selected recording event will start.
SET : [ SET ]
CANCEL : [ ESC ]
Searching filter windows
NEXT or PREV button: Changes a parameter.
CAM (SET) button: Executes the filtering.
MON (ESC) button: Cancels the filtering and returns to
the upper menu.
Available controls and functions (TIME&DATE FILTER-
ING window)
TIME&DATE FILTERING
■
START
.
.
.
.
:
:
AM
AM
JAN
1
1
03
03
00
0
00
00
• VMD search
END
Recording events will be searched by the date and time
when a camera detects a motion. Then, a result list or a
thumbnail will be displayed.
JAN
SET : [SET] CANCEL : [ESC]
For playback, you will select a time and date displayed on
the result list or thumbnail. Filtering is available by camera
channel, date-and-time, detection area or search mode.
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to the unit's operating
instructions.)
Joystick: Moves the cursor.
NEXT or PREV button: Changes a parameter.
CAM (SET) button: Executes the filtering.
MON (ESC) button: Cancels the filtering and returns to
the upper menu.
2. Repeat pressing the INDEX button until the VMD search
list window is displayed on the monitor.
The recorder will enter the searching mode.
(The list displayed in the window is the results of previ-
ous search.)
Available controls and functions (CAMERA FILTERING
window)
CAMERA FILTERING
CAMERA
VMD SEARCH
TIME&DATE
CAM
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SET : [ SET ]
CANCEL : [ ESC ]
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM
TOTAL
12345
TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the CAM (SET) button.
8. Move the "+" mark to another desired area with the joy-
stick, and then press the CAM (SET) button again. The
end point of motion detection area will be determined.
The VMD search window will be displayed on the moni-
tor.
SELECT CAMERA & DATE
■
CAMERA
CAM1
START
.
.
.
.
:
:
AM
AM
JAN
END
JAN
1
1
03
03
12
12
00
00
SET : [SET] SEARCH : [PLAY] CANCEL : [ESC]
4. Enter a camera number and time range.
9. To configure more motion detection areas, repeat Step
7 and 8. (Up to 4 motion detection areas are available.)
Available controls and functions
Joystick: Moves the cursor.
Note: To delete the motion detection area, select
"DELETE AREA" on the status bar by pressing the
NEXT or PREV button. Then, move the "+" mark to
the desired area with the joystick, and press the
CAM (SET) button.
NEXT or PREV button: Changes a parameter.
PLAY button: Executes the VMD search and
returns to the upper menu.
MON (ESC) button: Cancels the filtering and
returns to the upper menu.
10. Select "SENSITIVITY" on the status bar by pressing the
NEXT or PREV button.
5. Press the CAM (SET) button.
The motion detection area setup window will be dis-
played.
Note: Depending on the position of the set detection
areas, the sensitivity indications of the detection
areas may be displayed overlapping each other.
Note: If no image was recorded in the time range set in
step 4, the motion detection area setup window will
not be displayed.
11. Move the motion detection area by moving the joystick
rightward or leftward.
6. Select "SETUP AREA" on the status bar by pressing the
NEXT or PREV button.
12. Select the sensitivity by moving the joystick upward or
downward.
A "+" mark will appear at the center of the monitor.
The sensitivity will be applied.
OFF: The motion detector is not activated on the
camera channel.
LOW: The sensitivity level is low.
MID: The sensitivity is level is medium.
HIGH: The sensitivity level is high.
13. To exit the motion detection area setup window, select
"EXIT" on the status bar by pressing the NEXT or PREV
button. Then, press the CAM (SET) button.
Note: To set all displayed areas as motion detection
areas, press the CAM (SET) button after selecting
"ALL AREAS".
The motion detection mode setup window will be dis-
played on the monitor.
7. Move the "+" mark to a desired area with the joystick,
and then press the CAM (SET) button. The start point of
motion detection area will be determined.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Marking search
VMD SEARCH
■
ANY AREA
The recording time of the recorded images with a marked
point will be displayed in a list or a thumbnail. For playback,
you will select the desired recording time to play. (Refer to
the recorder's operating instructions for details on marking.)
1. Enter the recorder mode. (Refer to the unit's operating
instructions.)
MASKING DURATION
24h
VECTOR
A
20s
DURATION
20s
B
20s
C
C
20s
20s
D
D
A
B
20s
20s
SET : [SET] SEARCH : [PLAY] CANCEL : [ESC]
2. Repeat pressing the INDEX button until the marking list
window is displayed on the monitor.
Notes:
The recorder will enter the searching mode.
• To cancel the motion detection area setup, press
the MON (ESC) button. The VMD search list window
will be displayed again on the monitor.
• Refer to the unit's operating instructions for details
on each detection mode.
TIME&DATE
CAM
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch
14. Select a desired detection mode with the joystick, and
select a desired parameter by pressing the NEXT or
PREV button.
APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM
TOTAL
12345
TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK
Note: To cancel the setting and return to the motion
detection area setup window, press the MON (ESC)
button.
Note:
• To change the monitor display to the thumbnail,
press the F1 button. (Refer to the operating instruc-
tions of recorder for details on monitor display.)
• You cannot display the DATA COPY window.
15. Press the CAM (SET) button.
The motion detection mode will be determined, the
VMD search will be started, and the VMD search list
window will be displayed again on the monitor.
3. Select the desired marked time by performing either of
the following.
• Move the joystick upward or downward.
• Press the NEXT or PREV button.
Note: To cancel the VMD seach, press the STOP but-
ton.
4. Press the PLAY button.
16. To select a desired recording event, perform the follow-
ing.
The playback of recorded image will start from the
selected time.
• Move the joystick upward or downward.
• Press the NEXT or PREV button.
5. To exit the search mode, press the MON (ESC) button.
The live image will be displayed again on the monitor.
Notes:
• To exit the search mode, press the MON (ESC) but-
ton.
• To change the monitor display to the thumbnail,
press the F1 button. (Refer to the operating instruc-
tions of recorder for details on monitor display.)
• You cannot display the DATA COPY window.
• Thumbnail window
The thumbnail window is displayed when you press the F1
button while the recording event list window, VMD search
list window, or marking list window is displayed.
17 Press the PLAY button.
The playback of selected recording event will start.
Available controls and functions
Joystick: Moves the cursor.
NEXT or PREV button: Moves the cursor.
PLAY button: Plays back the selected recording event.
F1 button: Changes the monitor display to the list.
MON (ESC) button: Exits the search mode.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WJ-HD300 SERIES CONTROL (WV-CU360C/CJ PS·DATA)
Available operations are in common with WJ-HD500 Series. (Refer to the unit's operating instructions.)
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL (FOR USERS OF WJ-HD300 SERIES)
The following commands have been described in the operating instructions of this unit (matrix switcher). However, while Digital
Disk Recorder WJ-HD300 Series are being connected to the unit, these commands will be changed as follows.
Recorder Control
Transmission Command
(ASCII)
Item
Response (ASCII)
Parameter (ASCII)
Stop
CMD:RmmSPn
ANS:RmmSPn
mm=Monitor No.
n=0 Stop playback
n=1 Stop recording
n=V Stop VMD search
mm=Monitor No.
Index
CMD:RmmSCn
ANS: RmmSCn
n=0: Search playback*
(Described as
n=1: Time & date search playback**
"CMD:RmmSC"
in the operating instructions)
* Transmission command changes the moni-
tor display as follows.
Date-and-time entry form
→
Recording
event list → VMD search list → Marking list
→ Date-and-time entry form...)
** Date-and-time entry form of matrix
switcher appears.
CMD:RmmMLn
(Described as
Multiscreen segment switch-
ing
ANS:RmmML
mm=Monitor No.
n=0: 4 segments
"CMD:RmmML"
in the operating instructions)
n=1: 7 segments
n=2: 9 segments
n=3: 10 segments
n=4: 13 segments
n=5: 16 segments
n=skipped: Segment pattern change*
* Transmission command changes the multi-
screen segment pattern as follows.
4 (segments) → 7 → 9 → 10 → 13 → 16 →
4....
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following commands have been newly added. These commands are available only while Digital Disk Recorder WJ-HD300
Series are being connected to the unit.
Recorder Control
Transmission Command
(ASCII)
Item
Response (ASCII)
Parameter (ASCII)
Disk selection
CMD:RmmDSn
ANS:RmmDS
mm=Monitor No.
n=0 HDD normal/event recording sector
n=1 HDD copy sector
n=2 Disk connected to COPY 1
n=3 Disk connected to COPY 2
A - B repeat playback
CMD:RmmRPn
CMD:RmmLTn
ANS:RmmRP
n=0 A - B repeat playback OFF
n=1 Set repeat start point (A point)
n=2 Set repeat end point (B point)
Filtering ON/OFF
ANS:RmmLT
ANS:RmmMP
mm=Monitor No.
n=0 OFF
n=1 ON
MARK
CMD:RmmMP
CMD:RmmPM
mm=Monitor No.
mm=Monitor No.
GO TO LAST
ANS:RmmPM
ANS:RmmDI
WJ-HD300 Series OSD dis- CMD:RmmDI
play ON
mm=Monitor No.
(Refer
to
WJ-SX150A
Setup control commands are available.
Operating Instructions for WJ-
SX150A OSD ON/OFF.)
(
Refer
to
)
WJ-SX150A
Operating
Instructions.
DATA COPY window ON
Text display ON
CMD:RmmPD
CMD:RmmDT
CMD:RmmTN
ANS:RmmPD
ANS:RmmDT
ANS:RmmTN
mm=Monitor No.
Setup control commands are available. (Refer
to WJ-SX150A Operating Instructions.)
mm=Monitor No.
Setup control commands are available.
(Refer to WJ-SX150A Operating Instructions.)
List/Thumbnail
mm=Monitor No.
Transmission command displays list or
thumbnail alternately.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PANASONIC CANADA INC.
5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga,
Panasonic Digital Communications & Security Company
Unit of Matsushita Electric Corporation of America
Ontario, L4W 2T3 Canada (905)624-5010
PANASONIC SALES COMPANY
DIVISION OF MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC OF PUERTO RICO INC.
San Gabriel Industrial Park 65th Infantry Ave. KM. 9.5 Carolina,
P.R. 00985 (809)750-4300
Security Systems Group
www.panasonic.com/cctv
Executive Office: One Panasonic Way 3E-7, Secaucus, New Jersey 07094
Zone Office
Eastern: One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, NJ 07094 (201) 348-7303
Central: 1707 N.Randal Road, Elgin, IL 60123 (847) 468-5205
Western: 6550 Katella Ave., Cypress, CA 90630 (714) 373-7840
2004 © Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
N0504-0
3TR002744AAA
Printed in Japan
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Miele Dishwasher G643SCVI User Manual
Minolta Digital Camera Dimage S 304 User Manual
Nady Systems Snow Blower PM 200A User Manual
NETGEAR Musical Toy Instrument WAG302 User Manual
NETGEAR Network Card WNHDE111 User Manual
Omega Vehicle Security Air Conditioner DRN ACC User Manual
Onkyo Home Theater System SKS HT528 User Manual
Panasonic All in One Printer 403171 User Manual
Panasonic Camera Lens H FS14140 User Manual
Patriot Products Chipper 10F CSV User Manual